kmmvj^ 


w^^^^'^^^^F^^^ 


vmrnm 


GIFT  OF 
W.  CARPENTIEl 


'     i 


Ht2.^5' 


n. 


WILLIAM  R.  HARPER'S:':..'".:  ...: 

Elements  of  Hebrew 


BY 


AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


NEW  AND  REVISED  EDITION 


BY 


J.    M.    POWIS    SMITH,   Ph.D. 

Professor  of  Old  Testament  Language  and  Literature 
m  THE  University  of  Chicago 


CHARLES   SCRIBNER'S   SONS 

NEW   YORK  CHICAGO  BOSTON 


)1- 


COPTRIQHT,   1921,    BT 

CHARLES  SCRIBNER'S  SONS 


THE  SCRIBNER  PRESS 


PREFACE 


HAiO 


The  sixth  edition  of  Harper's  Elements  of  Hebrew  appeared  in 
1885.  Since  that  time  it  has  served  the  needs  of  large  numbers  of 
students  beginning  the  study  of  Hebrew,  and  has  gained  for  itself  a 
secure  position  among  elementary  text-books.  But  during  the  past 
thirty-five  years  much  progress  has  been  made  in  the  study  of 
Hebrew  grammar,  of  which  Harper's  Elements  remained  unaware. 
The  late  President  Harper  himself  was,  of  course,  fully  conscious  of 
this,  and  frequently  expressed  his  eagerness  to  bring  out  a  new  edi- 
tion of  the  Elements.  The  pressure  of  official  duties,  however,  and 
his  premature  death  denied  him  this  privilege. 

The  value  of  the  Harper  manner  of  approach  to  the  study  of  He- 
brew has  been  so  clearly  demonstrated  in  the  experience  of  successive 
generations  of  students  that  the  perpetuation  of  the  text-books  in 
which  it  is  embodied  seems  called  for.  To  this  end  the  present  re- 
vision has  been  undertaken.  Effort  has  been  made  to  preserve  the 
form  and  method  of  the  original  as  far  as  possible.  The  changes  in- 
corporated in  the  new  edition  are  only  such  as  seem  demanded  by 
the  present  status  of  our  knowledge  of  Hebrew  and  Semitic  grammar. 
The  more  important  of  these  changes  may  be  noted  here. 

(1)  The  half-open  syllable  has  been  eliminated,  as  was  suggested 
by  Sievers  (Metrische  Studien,  vol.  I,  p.  22),  and  approved  by  Gesenius- 
Kautzsch  {Hebr.  Grammatik,  28th  ed.,  1909).  (2)  A  beginning  has 
been  made  along  the  line  of  bringing  Hebrew  grammar  into  accord 
with  the  results  of  the  modern  study  of  phonetics.  This  involves 
some  marked  changes  in  the  treatment  of  the  Hebrew  vowel-system; 
but  it  seems  well  to  make  this  departure,  even  in  a  book  for  beginners, 
since  beginners  are  entitled  to  protection  from  known  errors;  and 
further  because  many  students  in  our  best  colleges  are  learning  the 
newer  phonetic  principles  and  will  welcome  them  as  old  friends  when 
they  find  them  in  this  new  field.  (3)  A  frank  acceptance  has  been 
accorded  the  biliteral  explanation  of   the  so-called  ^"J?   and  V'J? 


rv  -I    4   i\  4 


4  PREFACE 

verbs  and  nouns.  This  point  of  view  seems  more  nearly  in  accord- 
ance with  the  facts,  and  likewise  makes  the  study  of  these  forms 
simpler  for  beginners.  The  biliteral  hypothesis  has  not  been  carried 
as  far  here  as  it  might  well  be  in  a  more  advanced  grammar,  its  appli- 
cation being  confined  to  the  more  apparent  cases,  for  the  sake  of  sim- 
plicity. 

It  remains  to  express  my  sense  of  obligation  to  two  of  my  col- 
leagues. Professor  Ira  Maurice  Price  has  read  the  work  both  in 
manuscript  and  in  proof,  and  has  done  much  to  insure  accuracy  in 
printing.  To  Professor  Martin  Sprengling,  who  read  the  book  in 
manuscript,  I  am  especially  grateful  for  numerous  and  valuable  sug- 
gestions, the  acceptance  of  which  will,  I  trust,  greatly  increase  the 
worth  of  the  book.  Its  errors  are  my  own;  I  cannot  hope  to  have 
escaped  error  in  the  presentation  of  a  subject  beset  with  so  much 
that  is  problematical.  "To  err  is  human;  to  forgive,  divine  I"  I 
can  hope  only  that  the  present  edition  may  give  a  new  lease  of  life 
to  this  work  of  my  greatest  teacher. 

J.  M.  Powis  Smith. 
The  University  of  Chicago,  Jan.  1,  1921. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  SIXTH  EDITION 

The  first  edition  of  the  Elements  was  issued  in  July,  1881;  the 
second,  in  October,  1882;  the  third,  in  February,  1883;  the  fourth, 
in  November,  1883;  the  fifth,  in  November,  1884.  All  these  editions, 
the  first  excepted,  were  printed  from  one  set  of  plates,  with  only  such 
changes  and  additions,  from  time  to  time,  as  the  use  of  the  same 
plates  would  permit.  The  peculiar  circumstances  of  publication  ex- 
plained, although  they  could  not  excuse,  the  incomplete,  and  often 
imperfect,  treatment  accorded  in  these  editions  to  very  many  of  the 
subjects.  While  the  present  edition  lays  no  claim  to  completeness, 
or  to  freedom  from  error,  it  will  certainly  be  found  more  nearly  com- 
plete and  perfect  than  preceding  editions.  The  author  can  only  re- 
gret that  regular  and  special  duties  of  a  most  exacting  nature,  have 
not  permitted  him  to  give  that  amount  of  time,  or  that  attention  to 
the  preparation  of  the  book,  which  justice  to  the  subject,  to  those 
who  may  use  the  book,  and  to  himself,  demanded. 

The  present  edition,  which  contains  nearly  one  hundred  additional 
pages,  and  is  entirely  re-written,  differs  considerably  from  the  former 
editions,  and  radically  from  other  grammars  now  in  common  use. 
Some  of  the  distinguishing  features  of  the  grammar  deserve,  perhaps, 
special  mention: 

1)  For  the  purpose,  not  of  aiding  the  beginner  to  pronounce,  but 
of  teaching  the  exact  force  and  value  of  the  several  consonant-  and 
vowel-sounds,  a  minute  system  of  transliteration  has  been  employed, 
by  which  the  attention  of  the  student  is  directed  from  the  very  be- 
ginning to  the  details  of  the  vowel-system.  Too  little,  by  far,  is 
made  in  Hebrew  study,  of  the  vowel-system,  without  a  correct  knowl- 
edge of  which  all  effort  is  merely  groping  in  darkness. 

2)  A  tolerably  exhaustive  treatment,  more  complete  perhaps  than 
any  that  has  yet  appeared  in  English,  is  given  of  the  various  vowel- 
sounds.  Each  sound  is  treated  separately,  the  laws  which  regulate 
its  occurrence  and  the  grammatical  forms  in  which  it  appears  being 
carefully  noted. 

6 


PREFACE 


3)  Certain  important  distinctions,  not  heretofore  generally  recog- 
nized by  American  teachers,  are  indicated  throughout  the  grammar; 
e.  g.y  (a)  the  tone-long  6  (-7-),  heightened  from  a,  which  is  seen  in 
Segholates,  in  H' /  Imperfects  and  Participles,  and  elsewhere;  (6)  the 
naturally  long  e  {^-rr)  contracted  from  ay,  which  occurs  in  plural 
nouns  before  the  pronominal  suffixes  "H,  H?  ^^^  ^^  certain  Imper- 
fects before  H^  J   (c)  the  6  obscured  from  a,  as  distinguished  from  the 

T 

6— aw. 

4)  Instead  of  adopting  a  new  Paradigm-word  for  each  class  of 
weak  verbs,  the  verb  7 Op  is  retained,  with  such  variation  as  the 
particular  weak  verb  under  consideration  demanded;  e.  g.,  ^^"jj 
for  the  'S  guttural  verb,  ^JOp  for  the  ^"i;  verb,  ^^Ip  for  the 
X))  verb.  There  can  be  no  objection  to  this  method.  Many 
grammarians  have  adopted  it  in  the  treatment  of  noun-formation. 
Experience  has  shown  that,  in  this  way,  men  learn  the  verb  more 
rapidly  and  more  thoroughly. 

5)  In  the  treatment  of  the  strong  verb,  the  student  is  referred,  in 
every  case,  to  the  primary  form  or  ground-form  from  which  the  form 
in  use  has  arisen  in  accordance  with  the  phonetic  laws  of  the  lan- 
guage. That  treatment  which  starts  with  stems  having  the  form 
which  occurs  in  the  Perf.  3  m.  sg.,  or  Impf.  3  m.  sg.,  is,  at  the  same 
time,  unscientific  and  unsatisfactory.  The  bugbear  of  Hebrew  gram- 
mar is  the  weak  verb.  Nor  will  it  be  otherwise  so  long  as  the  effort 
is  made  to  explain  the  forms  of  weak  verbs  from  those  of  the  strong 
verb.    How  absurd,  for  example,  to  derive  Q^p^  from  a  form  like 

/COp^J   but  how  simple  to  derive  it  from  a  form  like  ^CDD^>  the 

)'  '  7 .  '•■)'' 

ground-form  of  ^OD^*    Together  with  the  form  in  use,  the  student 

ii  * 
should  learn  also  the  primary  form  from  which  the  usual  form  is 

derived.     This  method  will  furnish  a  knowledge  of  the  language, 

which  will  be  not  only  more  scientific,  but  also  more  lasting. 

6)  Particular  attention  is  given  to  the  subject  of  noun-formation, 
and  on  this  is  based  the  treatment  of  noun-inflection.  The  same 
method  which  would  teach  the  primary  forms  of  verbal  stems,  will 
also  teach  the  primary  forms  of  noun-stems. 

7)  That  fiction  of  Hebrew  grammarians,  the  connecting-vowel,  has 


PREFACE  7 

been  practically  discarded.  The  Hebrew  has  no  connecting-vowels. 
The  vowels  incorrectly  called  connecting-vowels  are  the  relics  of  old 
case-  or  stem-endings.  These  case-  or  stem-endings,  summarily  dis- 
posed of  in  current  grammars  under  the  head  of  "paragogic"  vowels, 
are  restored  to  the  position  which  their  existence  and  occurrence 
demand. 

But  it  is  asked,  What  has  a  beginner  to  do  with  all  this?  Why 
should  a  grammar  which  proposes  only  to  consider  the  "elements" 
of  the  language,  take  up  these  subjects?  While  this  may  do  for 
specialists,  of  what  service  is  it  to  him  who  studies  Hebrew  only  for 
exegetical  purposes  ?    Our  reply  is  this  : — 

1)  The  experiment  of  teaching  men  something  about  Hebrew  gram- 
mar, of  giving  them  only  a  superficial  knowledge,  has  been  tried  for 
half  a  century;  and  it  has  failed.  Men  instructed  in  this  manner 
take  no  interest  in  the  study,  learn  little  or  nothing  of  the  language, 
and  forget,  almost  before  it  is  learned,  the  little  that  they  may  have 
acquired.  If  for  no  other  reason,  the  adoption  of  a  new  system  is 
justified  by  the  lamentable  failure  of  the  old  to  furnish  any  practical 
results. 

2)  Those  who  take  up  the  study  of  Hebrew  are  men,  not  children. 
Why  should  they  not  learn,  as  they  proceed,  the  explanation  of  this 
or  that  fact?  Why  should  the  student  be  told  that  the  Infinitive 
Construct  O^p)  is  formed  from  the  Absolute  (?^JOp)  by  reject- 
ing the  pretonic  qame?  ?  Is  it  not  better  that  he  should  learn  at  once 
that  the  6  of  the  Construct  is  from  u,  while  the  6  of  the  Absolute  is 
from  a,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  grasp  all  the  more  firmly  those  two 
great  phonetic  laws  of  the  language,  heightening  and  obscuration? 

3)  The  best  way,  always,  to  learn  a  thing  is  the  right  way,  even  if, 
at  first,  it  is  more  difficult.  If  there  is  a  difference  between  the  6  of 
the  Imperfect,  Imperative  and  Infinitive  Construct  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  6  of  the  Infinitive  Absolute  and  Participles  on  the  other, 
what  is  gained  by  passing  over  it  in  silence? 

4)  In  order  to  learn  any  subject,  the  student  must  be  interested  in 
that  subject.  Is  he  not  more  likely  to  be  interested  in  an  accurate, 
scientific  treatment,  than  in  an  arbitrary,  superficial  treatment? 

The  treatment  adopted  in  the  Elements  is  an  inductive  one,  so 


8  PREFACE 

far  as  it  was  possible  to  make  it  such.  In  the  discussion  of  each  sub- 
ject there  are  first  given  sufficient  data,  either  in  the  way  of  words 
taken  from  the  text,  or  of  Paradigms,  to  form  a  basis  for  the  work. 
The  words  cited  are  from  the  early  chapters  of  Genesis,  with  which 
the  student  is  supposed  to  be  familiarizing  himself,  as  the  subjects 
are  being  taken  up.  Where  these  chapters  furnished  no  suitable 
example,  a  word  is  taken  from  some  other  book,  the  chapter  and  verse 
being  cited  in  each  case.  It  is  intended  that  the  student  shall  feel 
in  all  his  work  that  he  is  dealing  with  the  actual  facts  of  the  language, 
and  not  with  hypothetical  forms.  After  the  presentation  of  the 
"facts,"  the  principles  taught  by  these  facts  are  stated  as  concisely 
as  possible.  While  the  book  is  an  elementary  treatise  and,  for  this 
reason,  does  not  aim  to  take  up  the  exceptions  and  anomalies  of  the 
language,  it  will  be  found  to  contain  a  treatment  of  all  that  is  essen- 
tial, and  to  include  everything  of  importance  which  can  be  classified. 
In  the  treatment  of  the  strong  and  weak  verbs,  a  list  is  given  under 
each  class  of  the  more  important  verbs  belonging  to  this  class.  This 
list  may  be  used  as  an  exercise,  or  merely  for  handy  reference. 

The  author  lays  no  claim  to  originality  so  far  as  concerns  the  ma- 
terial employed;  there  is  indeed  little  room  for  originality  in  this  line. 
In  the  matter,  however,  of  arrangement,  and  of  statement,  he  con- 
fidently believes  that  a  kind  of  help  is  here  afforded  the  student  which 
cannot  be  found  elsewhere. 

In  the  work  of  preparation,  the  best  and  latest  authorities  have 
been  freely  used.  Special  acknowledgment  is  due  the  grammars  of 
Bickell,  Gesenius  (Kautzsch),  and  Davidson;  but  valuable  aid  has 
been  received  from  those  of  Green,  Nordheimer,  Kalisch,  Land, 
Ewald,  Olshausen,  Konig,  Stade,  and  Bottcher. 

For  his  assistance  in  the  preparation  of  the  manuscript  for  the 
printer,  and  for  many  valuable  suggestions,  the  author  is  indebted  to 
Mr.  Frederic  J.  Gurney,  of  Morgan  Park.  He  desires  also  to  express 
his  thanks  to  Mr.  C.  E.  Crandall,  of  Milton,  Wis.,  for  aid  rendered  by 
him  in  the  verification  of  references  and  in  the  revision  of  the  proof- 
sheets,  and  to  Rev.  John  W.  Payne,  of  Morgan  Park,  111.,  for  the 
skill  and  care  exhibited  in  the  typographical  finish  and  accuracy  of 
the  book.    He  is  under  obligations,  still  further,  to  Professors  C.  R. 


PREFACE  9 

Brown,  of  Newton  Centre,  S.  Burnham,  of  Hamilton,  E.  L.  Curtis, 

of  Chicago,  and  F.  B.  Denio,  of  Bangor,  for  useful  suggestions  and 

corrections. 

It  is  generally  conceded  that  in  America  we  are  on  the  eve  of  a 

great  revival  in  the  department  of  Semitic  study.     It  is  the  author's 

hope  that  this  volume  may  contribute  something  toward  this  greatly 

needed  awakening.     Trusting  that  the  new  edition  may  be  received 

with  the  same  favor  as  those  which  have  preceded  it,  and  that  its 

shortcomings  will  be  as  far  as  possible  overlooked,  he  places  the  book, 

although  with  many  misgivings,  in  the  hands  of  those  who  favor  the 

Inductive  Method. 

W.  R.  H. 

Morgan  Park,  III.,  Sept.  1,  1885. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PART  FIRST— ORTHOGRAPHY. 

I.     THE    LETTERS. 

Sec.  Page 

1.  Alphabet 17 

2.  Remarks  on  the  Pronunciation  of  Letters 18 

3.  Remarks  on  the  Forms  of  Letters 19 

4.  The  Classification  of  Letters 19 

II.     VOWELS. 

6.     The  Vowel-Signs 22 

6.  The  Vowel-Letters 22 

7.  The  Classification  of  the  Vowel-Sounds 24 

8.  The  Names  of  the  Vowels 25 

9.  Simple  and  Compound  ^*w§, 26 

10.  Vocal  S^wa 26 

11.  Silent  S«wa 27 

III.     OTHER    POINTS. 

12.  Dageg-Lene 29 

13.  Dage§-P6rte 30 

14.  Omission  of  Dage§-F6rte. 30 

15.  Kinds  of  Dages-F5rte 31 

16.  MSppik  and  Raf6 31 

17.  Makt:ef 32 

18.  Mm§ 32 

19.  ?:«r6  and  K«Wv 33 

IV.     THE    ACCENTS. 

20.  The  Place  of  the  Accent 35 

21.  Shifting  of  the  Tone '        36 

22.  The  Table  of  Accents 36 

23.  Remarks  on  the  Table  of  Accents 37 

24.  The  Consecution  of  the  more  common  Accents 38 

25.  A  Table  showing  the  Consecution  of  the  Accents 40 

V.     SYLLABLES. 

26.  Kinds  of  Syllables 42 

27.  Syllabification ,  42 

28.  Quantity  of  the  Vowel  in  Syllables 43 

VI.     EUPHONY   OF    VOWELS. 

29.  Short  Vowels 44 

30.  Naturally  Long  Vowels 46 

31.  Tone-Long  Vowels 50 

32.  Reduced  Vowels 52 

33.  The  A-Class  Vowels 54 

34.  The  1-Class  Vowels 54 

35.  The  U-Class  Vowels 55 

36.  Changes  of  Vowels 55 

37.  Tables  of  Vowel-Changes 59 

38.  Pause 60 

11 


12  CONTENTS 


Sec.                               VII.     EUPHONY  OF  CONSONANTS.  Page 

39.  Assimilation 62 

40.  Rejection 62 

41.  Addition,  Transposition,  Commutation 63 

42.  The  Peculiarities  of  Laryngeals 64 

43.  The  Weakness  of  n  and  n 66 

44.  The  Weakness  of  i  and  ^ 67 

PART  SECOND— ETYMOLOGY. 

VIII.     INSEPARABLE    PARTICLES. 

45.  The  Article , 73 

46.  He  Interrogative 74 

47.  The  Inseparable  Prepositions 74 

48.  The  Preposition  j p 75 

49.  Waw  Conjimctive 76 

IX.  PRONOUNS. 

50.  The  Personal  Pronoun 77 

51.  Pronominal  Suffixes 78 

52.  The  Demonstrative  Pronoun 80 

63.     The  Relative  Particle 80 

54.  The  Interrogative  Pronoun 81 

X.  THE   VERB. 

55.  Roots 82 

56.  Classes  of  Verbs 82 

57.  Inflection 83 

58.  The  Verb-Stems 84 

XI.      THE    TRI-LITERAL   VERB. 

A.  The  Strong  Verb 87 

59.  General  View  of  the  Tri-Literal  Verb-Stems 87 

60.  The  If ai  Perfect  (Active) 88 

61.  The  K:ai  Perfect  (Stative) 89 

62.  The  Remaining  Perfects 90 

63.  The  1^^\  Imperfect  (Active) 91 

64.  The  Kai  Imperfect  (Stative) 93 

65.  The  Remaining  Imperfects 94 

66.  The  Imperatives 96 

67.  The  Infinitives 98 

68.  The  Participles 99 

69.  Special  Forms  of  the  Imperfect  and  Imperative 100 

70.  The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  with  Waw  Conversive 102 

71.  The  Verb  with  Suffixes 104 

72.  General  View  of  the  Strong  Verb 109 

B.  The  Laryngeal  Verb 110 

73.  Classes  of  Laryngeal  Verbs 110 

74.  Verbs  'o  Laryngeal Ill 

75.  Verbs  'p  Larsmgeal 113 

76.  Verbs  'S  Laryngeal 115 

C.  The  Weak  Verb 117 

77.  Classes  of  Weak  Verbs 117 

78.  Verbs  Pe  Nfln  (j'd) 118 

79.  Verbs  Pe  'Algf  (k'o) 120 

80.  Verbs  Pe  Waw  (i'd) 121 

81.  Verbs  Pe  YOd  (>'o) 123 

82.  Verbs  /•?  or  I'S.^caDed  M'S 124 

83.  Verbs  Lam6d  'Al6f  (n'S) 128 


CONTENTS  13 

Sec                                        XII.     BI-LITERAL    VERBS.  Page 

84.  Classes  of  Bi-LIteral  Verbs 130 

85.  The  'Ayin-Doubled  Verb 131 

86.  The  Middle- Vowel  Verb 136 

87.  A  Comparative  View  of  the  Verb  Forms 142 

XIII.     NOUNS. 

88.  The  Inflection  of  Noims 146 

89.  Nouns  with  One,  Originally  Short,  Formative  Vowel 146 

90.  Nouns  with  Two,  Originally  Short,  Formative  Vowels 148 

91.  Nouns  with  One  Short  and  One  Long  Formative  Vowel 149 

92.  Nouns  with  One  Long  and  One  Short  Formative  Vowel 150 

93.  Noims  with  the  Second  Radical  RedupUcated 151 

94.  Nouns  with  the  Third  Radical  Reduplicated 152 

95.  Noims  with  n  and  ^  Prefixed 152 

96.  Nouns  with  d  Prefixed 153 

97.  The  Signification  of  Nouns  with  a  Prefixed 154 

98.  Nouns  Formed  by  Prefixing  n 155 

99.  Noims  Formed  by  Means  of  Affixes 155 

100.  Noims  from  Bi-Literal  Roots 156 

101.  Nouns  Having  Four  or  Five  Radicals 159 

102.  Compound  Nouns 159 

103.  Nouns  Formed  from  Other  Nouns 160 

104.  The  Formation  of  Noun-Stems 160 

105.  The  Formation  of  Cases 161 

106.  Affixes  for  Gender  and  Number 162 

107.  The  Absolute  and  Construct  States 163 

108.  The  Pronominal  Suffixes 165 

109.  Stem-Changes  in  the  Infiection  of  Nouns 168 

110.  Classification  of  Noun-Stems 171 

111.  Nouns  of  the  First  Class 172 

112.  Nouns  of  the  Second  Class 176 

113.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Class 177 

114.  Nouns  of  the  Fourth  and  Fifth  Classes 179 

115.  Feminine  Nouns 180 

116.  Irregular  Nouns 183 

117.  Numerals 184 

XIV.     SEPARATE    PARTICLES. 

118.  Adverbs 187 

119.  Prepositions 188 

120.  Conjunctions 189 

121.  Interjections 189 

PARADIGMS. 

Paradigm  A. — The  Personal  Pronoun  and  Pronominal  Suffixes 192-193 

Paradigm  B. — The  Strong  Verb 194-195 

Paradigm  C. — Strong  Verb  with  Suffixes 196-197 

Paradigm  D. — Verb  Pe  Co)  Laryngeal 198 

Paradigm  E. — Verb  'Ayin  C>')  Laryngeal 199 

Paradigm  F. — ^Verb  Lamed  (S)  Laryngeal 200 

Paradigm  G. — ^Verb  Pe  Nfin  (fa) 201 

Paradigm  H.— Verb  Pe  'Algf  (k'd)  .     Verb  Pe  Y6d  V'd) 202 

Paradigm    I. — ^Verb  Pe  Waw  O'd) 202-203 

Paradigm  K. — ^Verb  L^Sd  He  (n'h) 204-205 

Paradigm  L.— Verb  'lyin  Doubled  (J?"  V) 206-207 

Paradigm  M. — Middle- Vowel  Verbs  (Vy  and  '"';?) 208-209 

Paradigm  N.— Verb  L^6d  'Algf  (n'V) 210 

INDEX. 
Of  Subjects 211-218 


PART  FIRST-ORTHOGRAPHY 


I.    The  Letters 

1.    Alphabet 


Sign. 

Equiv- 
alent. 

Name. 

Num. 
Value. 

Sign. 

Equiv- 
alent. 

Name. 

Num. 
Value. 

1 

i< 

> 

1-lef 

1 

12 

b 

1 

L^-med 

30 

2 

3 

b 

Be^ 

2 

13 

D 

m 

Mem 

40 

3 

[3 

•1 

(3 

V 
g 

1 
Gi-mel 

] 

3 

14 
15 

D 

n 
s 

Ndn 
Si-meX 

50 

60 

4 

1 

d 

DUeB 

4 

16 

V 

* 

'A-yin 

70 

n 

d= 

ih  in  this] 

17 

B 

P 

Pe 

80 

5 

n 

h 

H^ 

5 

[D 

f 

] 

6 

1 

w 

W&w 

6 

18  • 

y 

? 

§i-dg 

90 

7 

1 

z 

Za-yin 

7 

19 

P 

k 

l^ot 

100 

8 

9 

10 

n 

1 

1^ 

X 

y 

Yod 

8 

9 

10 

20 
21 

-1 

r 

RI5 
§ini  gin 

200 
300 

11 

3 
D 

k 

Kaf 

] 

20 

22 

n 
[n 

t 

e=^th 

T&w 

in  cloth] 

400 

1.  The  Hebrew  language  has  twenty-two  letters;  these  are  con- 
sonants and  are  written  from  right  to  left. 

2.  The  vowels  in  the  "names"  of  the  letters,  given  above,  are 
sounded  according  to  the  English  equivalents  given  in  §  5.  The 
"equivalents"  for  the  consonants  given  above  are  rather  to  be  re- 
garded as  symbols  suggestive  of  the  characters  they  represent  than  as 
exact  reproductions. 

3.  The  equivalent  of  each  sign  is  the  initial  letter  of  its  name. 

4.  The  six  consonants  written  with  a  dot  in  them  are  also  written 
without  the  dot;  but  then  they  are  changed  in  pronunciation,  viz., 
2  =  v;  a  =  g;  T  =  d;  D  =  X;  S  =  f;  n  =  ^;  see  §  12. 

17 


1^  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  2 

2.    Remarks  on  the  Pronunciation  of  Letters 

1.  n«  =  'e^  (1:1)';   ynS^n  =  li«-re§  (1:1);    D^i^^^  =  Mo-him 

(1:1);  Dlnn  =  ^'h6m(l:2). 

2.  ^];  =  'al  (1:2);    2*1^  =  '^-rev  (1:5);  ^"ip^^  =  ra-ki(a)'  (1  :  6). 

3.  im  =  'e-Wd  (1:5);  TJC^n  =  ^5-%  (1:2);  nCrn.D  =  m^ra- 

liife^(l:2). 

4.  ^*Jp  =  ka-r&'  (1  : 5);  •JS  =  ki  (1:4);  *^n2  =  b5-ker  (1  : 5). 

5.  2lD  =  t6v   (1:4);   nHnp  =  mit-tiha^Vl  :  V);   jCDj^n  =  hak- 

U'ton  (1 :  16). 

6.  n^Ci^'><")2  =  h^e'-m  (1:1);  E^^Jll^  way-yi-'as  (1:7);  TJ^fn  = 

bo-sex  (1:2). 

7.  YJ;  =  'es  (1 :  11);  t^^^R  =  t6-se'(l :  12);  ^lQ\  =  yis-gor  (2  :  21). 

8.  nii^l  =  w«'e^  (1  : 1);'  ^31  =  wa-v6-hil  (1:2);  Hm  =  w'ru(a)ti 

a:2). 
1-  t*?  ( ' )  is  a  laryngeal  stop,  made  by  bringing  the  edges  of  the 
larynx  together,  thus  shutting  off  the  emission  of  the  breath;   H  0^) 
is  a  "rough  breathing,"  like  h  in  how. 

2.  J/  ( *  )  is  a  sound  peculiar  to  the  Semitic  and  made  far  down  in 
the  larynx;  it  is  so  difficult  of  utterance  that  no  attempt  is  made  to 
reproduce  it  here. 

3.  n  (b)  was  a  deep  laryngeal;  it  is  now  generally  pronounced  like 
ch  in  the  German  Buck. 

4.  p  (k)  is  a  A:-sound,  but  pronounced  farther  back  on  the  palate 
than  3  (k). 

5*  ED  (t)  is  a  dental  sound  made  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  higher 
up  than  in  the  pronunciation  of  p]  (t)^. 

6.  £f  (§)  is  pronounced  like  the  English  sh;  ^  (s)  is  an  ordinary 
5-sound,  now  indistinguishable  from  Q  (s). 

7.  y  (s)  is  a  sharp  hissing  5-sound;  more  emphatic  than  the  ordi- 
nary D  (s). 

8.  )  (w)  is  pronounced  like  w  in  water,  and  not  like  our  v. 

9.  The  spirant  3  (x)  is  pronounced  like  weak  German  ch  in  Kirche. 

10.  The  spirant  ^  (g)  is  pronounced  like  g  in  German  Tage. 

1  The  chapter  and  verse  in  Genesis,  in  which  a  given  word  is  found,  are  thus  indi- 
cated;   1  :  1 — meaning  chapter  1,  verse  1;   2  :  3 — meaning  chapter  2,  verse  3,  etc. 
» In  ordinary  practice,  ::  and  r\  are  scarcely,  if  at  all,  to  be  distinguished. 


§4] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


19 


»  » » *  i 


■)     3  ^  1      »     J 


3,    Remarks  on  the  Forms  of  Letters 


1-  nMi  D^DE^n  njv  o^nhx  w"i3  n^E^j^?"i3 


2.     13(1 


D^i^i<(l:l) 

D1Dn(l:2) 


i:S(l:2)pJB    (1:2)  main  (1:12) 
p3(l:4)[p|"lj;(l:20)[       y;;(l:ll) 
3.  D'lDDlS  (1:16);    mi3   (1:28),    "iJS  (1:2);    Tj-nrj   (3:24); 
nn\n  (1:2),  TjEfn  (1:2);  \T1  (1:3);  p  (1:4),  J/nt  (1:11); 
31CD  (1:4),  D^O  (1:2);  nap^  (2:21),  Qlt  (1:5);  Jlp"!  (1:6), 

i<aln  (1 :  12);  T^pn  d :  4),  3|rj|  d :  n). 

1.  Words  are  written  from  right  to  left,  and  may  not  be  divided; 
when  it  is  necessary  to  fill  out  a  line,  certain  letters  (}«»?,  ri>  ^i  O) 
J~\)  are  extended. 

2.  Five  letters  Q,  Q,  J,  S,  y)  have  two  forms;  the  second  ("1, 
Q,  |,  P|,  y)  is  used  at  the  end  of  words. 

3.  Certain  letters,  very  similar  in  form,  are  to  be  carefully  dis- 
tinguished: 2.  3;  a.  J;  1.  "I.  T];  H.  n.  n;  1.  ■*;  1. 1;  CD.  0;  D. 

D;  V'  a;  t'-  £'• 

4.    The  Classification  of  Letters 


Labials. 

Labio- 
Dentals. 

Dentals. 

Palatals. 

Velars. 

Laryngeals 

Stops 

33 

mD 

asp 

K 

Fricatives 

1 

DD 

1 

aD 

nnj; 

Nasals 

a   , 

J 

Lateral 

^ 

Rolled 

1 

2G  ;;':,,     elements  of  Hebrew  [§  4 

'  'Hebrew  woitls  -ocmsist  of  consonants  and  vowels  as  in  all  other  lan- 
guages. The  use  of  the  breath  is  fundamental  in  the  production  of 
these  sounds.  Vowels  are  produced  by  the  relatively  free,  unob- 
structed emission  of  the  breath,  the  modifications  of  vowel-sound 
being  caused  by  varying  positions  of  the  vocal  organs.  Consonants, 
on  the  other  hand,  involve  either  a  total  or  a  partial  obstruction  of 
the  breath.  The  Hebrew  consonants,  therefore,  are  classified  on 
two  bases:  (1)  the  use  of  the  breath  in  their  production,  (2)  the  vocal 
organs  employed. 

1.  The  first  classification  includes  five  groups  of  sounds: 

a.  The  Stops  which  involve  a  complete  stoppage  of  the  breath. 

b.  The  Fricatives  produced  by  the  friction  of  the  breath  escaping 
through  some  narrow  passage. 

Remark. — The  Fricatives  2»  X  Hi  !D»  D»  H  ™ay  ^or  convenience 
be  designated  spirants. 

c.  The  Nasal  sounds  in  which  the  breath  is  emitted  through  the 
nose. 

d.  The  Lateral  sound  (7  I)  in  which  the  breath  escapes  along 
openings  on  one  or  both  sides  of  the  tongue. 

e.  The  Rolled  sound  (*^  r)  in  which  the  tongue  rapidly  taps  the 
teeth  or  the  ridge  of  the  teeth,  thus  successively  obstructing  and  free- 
ing the  passage  of  air. 

2.  The  second  classification,  based  on  the  organs  of  speech  em- 
ployed, falls  into  six  sub-divisions: 

a.  The  Labials  proper  involve  the  closing  or  partial  closing  of 
the  lips. 

b.  The  Lahio'Dentals,  a  special  variety  of  labials,  are  made  by 
allowing  the  breath  to  escape  with  the  front  teeth  placed  upon  the 
lower  lip. 

c.  The  Dentals  are  made  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  touching, 
or  in  close  proximity  to,  the  front  teeth.  Of  these  some  bring  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  close  to  the  front  teeth,  or  in  contact  with  them,  while 
with  others  the  contact  or  approach  is  a  little  farther  back  on  the 
tongue.  The  difference  between  2  and  ^,  p  and  {!»  ^  and  J,  B  and 
B,  "^  and  *1,  2  and  2  is  that  in  the  stops  the  breath  is  fully  checked, 
while  in  the  spirants  the  breath  is  allowed  a  partial  outlet. 


i  4]  BY  AN  INDtJCTIV»  METHOD  21 

d.  The  Palatal  consonant  (^ y)  involves  the  approach  toward 

the  highest  part  of  the  palate  of  that  part  of  the  tongue  which  is 
opposite  the  top  of  the  palate. 

e.  The  Velars  involve  contact  between  the  tongue  and  the  soft 
palate  (velum).     Of  these  p  is  made  the  farthest  back. 

/.  The  Laryngeals  involve  action  of  the  larynx  which  is  not  as 
yet  clearly  understood. 

Note  1. — A  third  classification  is  generally  recognized  by  stu- 
dents of  phonetics:  viz.,  voiced  and  unvoiced  consonants.  The  former 
involve  vibration  of  the  vocal  cords,  the  latter  do  not.  Examples 
of  voiced  consonants  are  2»  1»  ^^'^  o^  unvoiced,  g,  p^.  But  for 
further  details  of  phonetics  the  student  may  refer  to  G.  Noel-Arm- 
field.  General  Phonetics  for  Missionaries  and  Students  of  Languages 
(Cambridge:  Heffer  &  Sons,  1915). 


II.    Vowels 

5.  TTie  Vozvel'Signs^ 

1.  2,  «>  K/,  f>  «,  na  1;  K^'n,  p,  ^j;,  on,  nn,  2p 

2.  n^£^.  b^>  %>  ^V  ^n,  '^j;  D^  p^  np,  pp,  d^  ^^: 

3-  1  ';?'   ^^:  r?'   I?'   e^'>    Yl>  "^^^  na  2%  np,  nE^ 

4.  in,  n,  11,  1\  15t,  12,  n;      ^2,   pb,   Dn,   p%   ^^ 

5.  Din,  D^  niK,  ""^,  ""n,  ^fc^;   ""^s;'  D2;,"*tjx,"  2^" 

6.2,     1,     \    S,     n,     !p;       «,     j;;       «,     K;       p,     H 

1.  -T-  is  pronounced  as  a  in  d// ;  -=-  like  a  in  c/cw^. 

2.  ^ is  pronounced  as  i  in  machine;  -v-  (i.  e.,  without  a  following 

''),  as  I  in  piw.* 

3.  "^ or is  pronounced  as  ey  in  they;  as  ^  in  met. 

4.  1  is  pronounced  as  oo  in  Tnoon  ;  -v  as  w  in  pu^^ 

5.  ^  or  -=-  is  pronounced  as  o  in  note ;  -r-  practically  the  same  as  d 
in  Ml,  the  same  sign  being  used  for  both  sounds. 

6.  a.  -^-  is  a  very  quickly  uttered  sound,  as  e  in  below,  when  the 
word  is  pronounced  rapidly,  so  as  to  slur  over  the  e  and  run  the  b  and 
/  almost  (but  not  quite)  together;  thus — b'low,  not  below,  nor  blow; 
pHice,  not  police,  nor  plice. 

b.  '=T  (a  combination  of  -=-  and  -r)  is  a  little  fuller  in  sound 
than  -r,  and  with  a  slight  a  quality, 

c.  -vT  (a  combination  of  -7-  and  -r)  is  a  little  fuller  in  sound  than 
-r,  and  with  a  slight  e  quality. 

d.  TT  (a  combination  of  -7-  (6)  and  -7-)  is  a  little  fuller  in  sound 
than  T-,  and  with  a  slight  d  or  0  quality. 

6.  The  Vowel-Letters 

Before  the  introduction^  of  vowel-signs  (§5.),  certain  weak  con- 
sonants, J^,  n,  1,  '',  were  sometimes  used  to  indicate  the  vowel- 
sounds,  and  hence  were  called  vowel-letters: 


» All  letters  in  Hebrew  are  consonants;  the  alphabet  contains  no  vowels.     To  sup- 
ply the  lack  of  vowels  the  above  system  of  vowel-signs  was  introduced. 

*  Sometimes  __  is  written  where  »___  was  intended,  and  __  where  i  was  intended; 
in  such  cases  ___  is  pronounced  as  ^__  (i  in  machine),  and  __  as  i  (oo  in  moon). 

» These  signs  were  introduced  between  the  sixth  and  eighth  centuries  A.  D. 

22 


§  6]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  23 

1.  D«p'  =  fe^am;  ^n^^  =  ^a-r^a  (l :  2);  n'^n  =  tay.y&  (1 :  20). 

2.  inn  =  ^o-htl  (1:2);  nn  =  rii(a)b  (1 : 2);  Vfl  =  M-yii  (1:15); 

m«  =  '6t  (1:3);  y\Q  =  t6v  (1:4);  Q^  =  yto  (1 : 5). 

3.  U^nbi<  =  M6-htm  (1  : 1);  p^t^J^n  =  re^Si^  (1 : 1);  ^^^bz^  = 

Hi-§i  (1 :  13);  ^^Q  =  p'n6  (1:2);  "^JE;  =  §'n6  (1 :  16);   p2  = 
ben  (1:4). 

4.  ^^^^  =  yi^-y^    (l  :29);    nipD  =  mH:.wl   (1 :  10);     hSiK  = 

'6h--16  (12  : 8). 

1.  The  a-sound  was  indicated,  when  medial,  by  the  laryngeal  {<; 
when  final,  by  the  laryngeal  H- 

Note  1. — Medial  a  (^  or  a)  was  indicated  rarely;  final  k  was 
generally,  though  not  uniformly,  indicated.^ 

Note  2. — ^The  letter  {i^,  when  the  final  letter  of  a  root,  does  not 
belong  here;  since,  in  this  case,  it  is  not  a  vowel-letter,  but  has  merely 
lost  its  consonantal  character. 

2.  The  sounds  ti  and  6  were  indicated  by  ). 

Note. — ^Medial  u  and  6  were  generally  indicated;  final  H  and  6 
were  always  indicated. 

3.  The  sounds  i  and  e  were  indicated  by  ^. 

Note. — Medial  i  and  e  were  generally  indicated;  final  1  and  6 
were  always  indicated. 

4.  The  sounds  e  and  6,  when  final,  were  frequently  indicated  by  Hr 
Note  1. — Only  long  vowels  were  thus  indicated,  and,  with  but 

few  exceptions,  besides  k,  only  the  naturally  long  (§  30.)  vowels. 

Note  2. — ^Vowels  indicated  thus  are  said  to  be  written  fully; 
when  not  thus  indicated,  they  are  said  to  be  written  defectively. 

Note  3. — Briefly  stated,  the  use  of  the  vowel-letters  may  thus 
be  put: 

The  vowels  i  and  e,  medial  and  final,  are  represented  by ^. 

The  vowels  u  and  6,  medial  and  final,  are  represented  by \ 

Final  vowels,  except  i  and  ti,  are  represented  by .... , H* 

Note  4. — In  the  later  books  of  the  Old  Testament  the  full  writing 
is  more  common  than  in  the  earlier  books,  the  tone-long  vowels  (§31.) 
being  often  thus  represented. 
» Hos.  10  :  14.  «  Cf.  r^p  (3  :  10) ;  n'?3K  (3  :  11). 


24  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  7 


7.    The  Classification  of  the  VoweUSounds 

The  primary  vowel-sounds  in  Hebrew  are  represented  by  the  three 
vowels  a  {-=-),  i  (-r-),  and  u  (-v).  Of  these  a  is  made  with  the  widest 
opening  of  the  vocal  organs;  i  is  made  with  a  narrower  opening  and 
with  the  breath  striking  the  front  of  the  hard  palate;  ii  is  also  made 
with  a  narrow  opening,  but  farther  back  in  the  mouth,  and  with 
rounding  of  the  lips. 

Closely  related  to  the  foregoing  are  five  other  sounds,  viz.,  e  (-?-), 
e  (-:r-),  i,  (  T  ),  o  (t^),  and  5  (  ).  Of  these,  e  is  midway  between  a 
and  i,  and  may  arise  from  either  by  deflection.  Likewise  ^  and  6  are 
midway  between  a  and  u,  and  are  so  closely  alike  as  to  be  represented 
by  the  same  sign;  ^  comes  from  a  under  the  influence  of  the  tone  by 
a  rounding  of  the  lips,  while  6  comes  from  ii  without  tonal  influence 
by  a  lowering  of  the  back  of  the  tongue,  which  produces  a  greater 
opening  as  for  the  a  sounds — this  may  also  be  designated  as  deflection. 
The  remaining  two  vowels,  e  and  6,  arise  from  i  and  ii,  respectively, 
under  the  influence  of  the  tone;  each  of  them  is  made  farther  back 
on  the  palate  than  its  corresponding  short  vowel.  Hence  we  shall 
speak  of  e  and  6  as  lowered  respectively  from  i  and  ii. 

In  addition  to  these  vowel-sounds,  there  are  two  other  classes, 
viz.,  those  made  by  lengthening  the  primary  vowel-sounds  and  those 
made  by  redicdng  them  to  their  lowest  terms. 

The  naturally  long  vowels  are  of  three  classes,  viz.,  (1)  those  arising 
from  contraction,  g.  ^.,  S  +  w  =  6;  (2)  those  arising  in  compensation 
for  the  quiescence  or  loss  of  a  consonant,  e.  g.,  in  "^Di^^  the  ^  has 
quiesced  causing  &  to  become  &,  which  was  then  rounded  to  6; 
(3)  those  which  acquired  their  length  in  the  eariiest  stages  of  the 
language  and  are  found  as  characteristic  of  certain  formations,  e.  g., 
the  6  of  the  Jf al  active  participle  which  has  been  rounded  from  a. 

The  reduced  vowels  are  of  two  classes,  viz.,  (1)  the  simple  S'wa  which 
is  a  neutral  sound  to  which  any  one  of  the  short  vowels  may  be  re- 
duced, and  (2)  the  compound  o*w4  which  has  a  distinct  form  for  each 
of  the  three  short  vowels,  viz.,  -=r  from  a,  -vt  from  i,  and  -tt  from  ii. 

The  vowel-sounds,  therefore,  may  be  classified  according  to  (1) 


§  8]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  26 

their  organic  fonnation,  (2)  their  quantity,  (3)  their  nature,  (4)  their 
value: 

1.  Classified  according  to  their  organic  formation,  they  are: 

a.  A-class,  including  the  a-vowels  and  those  derived  from  them. 

b.  I-class,  including  the  i-vowels  and  those  derived  from  them. 

c.  U-class,  including  the  w-vowels  and  those  derived  from  them. 

2.  Classified  according  to  their  quantity,  they  are: 

a-class.  i-class.  w-class. 

a.  Short,  -=-  -=r-  -t-    -n-  -^  -t-(6) 

b.  Long,  t-  ^-^,  ^-n-  or  -^,  ^-r-      1>  1  or 

c.  Reduced,  -r  -^  "i-    -vt  -r       ^ft 

Note. — ^The  vowels  -r-  and  -^  are  sometimes  called  doubtful; 
because,  not  infrequently,  they  are  the  defective  writing  of  a  long 
vowel. 

3.  Classified  according  to  their  origin  or  nature,  they  are: 

a.  Pure a; 

b.  Deflected e  from  a; 

c.  Attenuated i  from  a; 

d.  Tone-Long a  from  a; 


e.  Naturally  Long. .  . 


6  from  a; 


i; 

e  from  i; 

u. 

6  from  ii. 

e  from  i; 

i; 
e; 

6  from  u. 

ii. 

6. 

e(=^_orn_) 


/.  Reduced *  and  »;  *  and  •;  «  and  «. 

4.  Classified  according  to  their  value  in  inflection,  they  are: 

a.  Changeable — viz.,  (1)  all  short  vowels  not  followed  by  a  con- 
sonant in  the  same  syllable;  (2)  tone-long;  (3)  reduced. 

b.  Unchangeable — viz.,  (1)  short  vowels  followed  by  a  consonant 
in  the  same  syllable;  (2)  naturally  long. 

Note. — Changeable  and  unchangeable  here  apply  only  to  changes 
of  quantity,  not  of  quality. 

8,    The  Names  of  the  Vowels 

The  following  table  presents  the  arrangement  of  the  vowel-sounds 
according  to  their  quantity  (§  7.  d),  and  at  the  same  time  gives  the 
technical  name  of  eq,ch  sound, 


26 


ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW 


[§10 


Class. 

Long. 

Short. 

Reduced. 

A-Class. 

• 



a,  a 

e 

Ktoes 
S^gol 

-=- 

a 

Pa^at 

— 

e 
a 

Simple  §*wa 
Ijatef-Pa^at 

I-Class. 

i 

e,e 

Hirek 
§er^ 

-T- 

1 
e 

Hirek 
Siol 

"vT 

e 
e 

Simple  S'wa 
Pjatef-S'gol 

U-Class. 

u 
6,6 

gurek 
Holem 

T 

u 
o 

Ifibbtis 

s:ames-Hatiif 

-r 

e 
o 

Simple  §«wa 
Hatef-?&me§ 

9.    Simple  and  Compound  $'w6 

1.  )  originally  ];  2  originally  2;  ^^j:)']  (1  :  15),  but  yip"!  (1  :  6). 

2.  nE'X  (1  :  7);  "-^l^l  (2  :  24) ; " D^•^'b^?  (1:1);  DnJ?^'p(l  ■  l*): 

nnD^(2:23).'" 


1.  Simple  §*'wa  (-r)  is  a  neutral  sound  which  may  arise  from  any 
of  the  short  vowels  and  represents  the  minimum  of  vowel-sound. 
(For  transliteration  and  pronunciation  see  §  5.  /.) 

2.  Compound  §«wa  (-=r,  -^,  it)  is  a  more  audible  sound  than  simple 
g*wa  (§  5.  6.  b.  c.  d),  and  is  found,  instead  of  simple  S*wa,  chiefly 
under  laryngeals.  Each  of  the  three  classes  of  vowels  has  its  own 
distinctive  compound  §*wa. 

10,    Vocal  S'wd 

1.  n^c^xn?  (1:1);  Dinn  (i:2);  nn^-n  (i:2);  laTc^'i  (^-^o)- 

2.  ^-|-1T  =  way-hi  (1:3);  ^p-^S  =  bir-ki(a)'  (1:15);  ^jx-^p  = 

mii-'u  (1:28);    nr^?  =  bid-ga^   (1:28);    ^D'^J  =  way-Xal 
(2:2);  nn"?j;  =  'ov-dah  (2:15). 

3.  -2ry^  =yKz6v  (2:24);  nn"p^  =  luko-hl  (2 :  23);  H^-y'^ 

=ya'MI(2:6). 

1.  Vocal  §*wa  is  always  initial,  i.  e.,  it  goes  with  the  following  vowel 
to  form  a  syllable. 

2.  Certain  forms  in  which  g*wa  seems  to  waver  between  two  sylla- 


I  11]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  27 

bles,  and  is  consequently  called  medial  by  many  grammarians,  are  to 
be  treated  as  follows: 

a.  Forms  with  wlw-conversive  (§  70.),  where  the  dages-forte  has 
disappeared,  were  originally  pronounced  like  way-y®hi;  but  with  the 
loss  of  the  second  yod  the  vocal  §«wa  also  disappeared;  hence  such 
forms  are  better  pronounced  as  way-hi,  etc.,  ay  being  treated  as  a 
diphthong. 

h.  Similarly  S*wa  is  silent  in  such  forms  with  prefixed  preposi- 
tions as  bir-ki(^)*  and  lim-'o-ro^  and  in  forms  like  mil-'ti. 

Note. — This  pronunciation  is  attested  by  such  forms  as  73^7^ 
and  ^SE^H-^  That  there  was  more  or  less  variation  in  such  cases, 
however,  is  clear  from  the  variation  in  the  use  of  d§,ge§-lene  in  spirants 
after  such  a  S«wd,  from  the  fact  that  the  Hebrew  uses  the  same  sign 
for  a  vocal  §*^a  and  a  silent  §*wd,  and  from  the  testimony  of  the 
transliterations  in  the  older  strata  of  the  Septuagint  (§11.).  Cf, 
similar  variations  in  spoken  English,  e.  g.,  tol-e-ra-ble  and  tol-r^ble, 
con-side-ra-ble  and  con-sid-r®ble;  ath-letic  and  ath-e-letic. 

c.  In  such  forms  as  31^^,  etc.,  the  §*wa  is  only  a  helping 
vowel  and  does  not  affect  the  general  situation;  cf.  the  similar  situa- 
tion  in  such  forms   as  nH/E^*,  where  the   coming  in  of  pa^ah- 

:    -  J-    T 

furtive  does  not  increase  the  number  of  syllables. 

d.  In  forms  with  spirants  after  a  so-called  medial  §*wa,  the 
absence  of  the  d&ge§  is  a  survival  from  an  earlier  stage  when  a 
vowel-sound  was  heard  before  the  spirant;  cf.  again  Rn^C^*^  in  which 
the  presence  of  the  later  pa^ah-furtive  does  not  change  the  older  hard 
sound  of  the  t 

11.    Silent  S^wd 

1.  i^ljp^)  =  way-yik-r&'  (1:5);    bill'!)  =  way-yav-del    (1:7); 

bn?P  =  mav-dil  (1  : 6). 

2.  o.  1]Efn  (1:4);  l^lna  (1:6);  T^hnn  (2:14). 

&.  V\^  =  'att;    nnj  =  na-0att;  ph^D  =  ka-talt. 
Remark.-n''l^'t?n3  (1:1);  pi  (l':4);  2)lQ  (1:4);  Dl^  (1:5); 
D^e^Xn  (2:10). 


>Jer.  51:49.  ijsa.  47:2. 


28  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§11 

The  simple  S'wa  (-j-),  aside  from  its  use  to  indicate  a  vowel-sound 
(§  9.),  appears  frequently  where  it  has  no  sound.     It  occurs  thus: 

1.  Under  all  consonants  standing  in  the  middle  of  a  word  and 
closing  a  syllable  (§  26.). 

2.  Under  a  final  letter,  when  that  letter 

a.  IsKaf;  or 

b.  Is  a  consonant  containing  Ddge§-f6rte  or  lene,  or  preceded 
by  another  consonant  with  §*wa. 

3.  Under  an  initial  consonant  in  ^p[\lJ. 

Remark. — Th6  weak  letters  ^,  H,  ),  ^,  when  quiescent,  or  used 
as  vowel-letters  (§  6.),  do  not,  of  course,  receive  this  silent  S*wa. 

Note  1. — §«wa  under  an  initial  consonant,  whether  of  a  word 
or  of  a  syllable,  is  always  vocal. 

Note  2. — ^S*wa  under  a  final  consonant,  whether  of  a  word  or 
of  a  syllable,  is  always  silent. 


III.    Other  Points 

12.    D&ieS'Lene 

1.  n^E^'xna  (1:1);  nn\n  (i:2);  ^nsi  a  .-2);  -nina  (i:6); 

"  :  T   ;  IT  J   T  ;  ; 

"'JB-'Pi?  (1:2);  np  13  (1:29);  lllp"!  (2:21);  ^"I'l^D  (1:6). 

2-  ni"i2  =  bid-gae  (1  :'28);  PIlDyb  =  i'"ov-d&h  (2: 15).' 

3-  D^aa  iD^aa  (1:27);  i^na  napJI  (1:27);  Dl^3  ^3  (2:17): 

nn?  n"!  (1 :  28);  |S  13  1^30  (3  : 3). 

1.  The  letters  3*  i>  H*  D»  S>  II*  have  two  sounds.  Their  hard 
sound  (6,  ^,  (i,  kf  p,  t)  is  indicated  by  a  point  called  D^ge§-lene,  which 
they  regularly  receive  whenever  they  do  not  immediately  follow  a 
vowel-sound. 

Note  1. — As  fricatives  they  are  pronounced:  ^  =  v;  T  =  d 
=  th  in  those ;  ^  ="  fi^  fed  (cf .  ph  in  philosophy) ;  J^  =  0  =  <A  in  thin  ; 
2  =  X*  like  German  ch  in  Kirche,  but  made  farther  forward;  J  (=g 
in  German  Tage)  is  not  in  ordinary  practice  distinguished  from  ^{=g). 

Note  2. — To  distinguish  these  six  fricatives  from  the  rest  of  the 
class  thus  named,  we  shall  call  them  Spirants.  The  term  spirant  is 
commonly  used  in  a  wider  sense  than  this,  but  for  practical  purposes 
we  may  confine  it  here  to  this  definite  usage. 

2.  These  spirants  without  Diges-lene  usually  follow  a  vowel- 
sound,  but  sometimes  the  absence  of  the  D^ges  persists  even  after 
the  preceding  vowel  has  disappeared. 

Note. — The  soft  sound  of  these  letters  after  preceding  vowels 
is  due  to  the  failure  to  shut  off  completely  the  emission  of  the  breath 
involved  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  vowel  which  would  result  in  a 
stop  {y\,  p,  etc.,  cf.  §  4.).  Cf.  the  common  Irish  pronunciation  of 
lady  as  ladyy  and  better  as  heSer. 

3.  When  by  a  disjunctive  accent  (§  23.  2.  a)  one  of  these  letters 
is  cut  off  from  whatever  may  precede  it,  as  at  the  beginning  of  a 
chapter,  verse,  or  section  of  a  verse,  it  does  not  immediately  follow  a 
vowel  and  hence  takes  Dages-lene. 

29 


30  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  14 

13,    D&ies-Fdrte 

1.  D^OtS^'n  =  ha§-sl-ma-yim  (1:1);   Q^an  =  ham-ma-yim  (1:7); 

•j-     T        ~  'J-      - 

^e^*3^^  =  hay-yab-ba-§a  (1:9);    Hhi^Sn  =  ham-m«'6-r6^ 
(lh6)V 

2.  nin  =  taw-wa   (3  :  20);   nnnO  =  mit-ta-ha^  (1:7);  mnin 

=  hab-b^e-ma  (1 :  25);  T\}31il  =  had-da-'a^  (2  :  17). 

1.  The  doubling  of  a  letter  is  indicated  by  a  point  in  its  bosom, 
called  Dages-forte.  Consonants  may  be  doubled,  however,  only 
when  they  immediately  follow  a  full  vowel. 

2.  The  point  in  Wiw  and  in  the  spirants  is  always  Dage§-f6rte, 
if  preceded  by  a  full  vowel. 

Note  1. — Dages-forte  in  a  spirant  serves  also  as  Dages-lene, 
doubling  the  hard,  not  the  soft,  sound  of  the  spirant. 

Note  2. — A  syllable  whose  final  consonant  has  Dages-forte  is 
called  sharpened  (§  26,  3). 

Note  3. — A  doubled  letter  is  regularly  preceded  by  a  short 
vowel;  this  is  generally  a  pure  (§29.  1-3)  vowel,  seldom  a  deflected 
(§  29.  4,  5)  vowel. 

14.    Omission  of  Dd^el-Fdrte 

1.  by)  (2:2)  for  b^^);  ))i^)  (2:16) /or  )^^);  D«  (2:24) /or  UV^, 

2.  \T1  (1:3)  for  ^n^);  m^H  (1:24)  for]r\^n;  nHD^  (2:23)  for 

3.  nixn  a  :4)  for  ^)i^ri;  rjE^'nn  a  :4)  for  -TjEfrin;  ribhn 

(2:M)/or^^nn. 

1.  Dages-forte  is  always  omitted  from  a  final  vowelless  consonant, 
there  being  nothing  in  this  case  to  support  the  doubling.^ 

2.  It  is  often  omitted  from  medial  consonants  which  have  only  a 
§«wa  to  support  them.    (But  a  spirant  may  not  thus  lose  Dages-forte.) 

3.  It  is  always  omitted  from  the  laryngeals,  X,  H,  H^  y>  and  *^. 
Note  1. — When  Dages-forte  is  omitted  from  a  laryngeal  and  no 

compensation  made  for  the  loss  by  the  strengthening  of  the  preced- 
ing vowel,  the  Dages  is  said  to  be  implied  or  understood. 

1  The  only  exceptions  to  this  statement  are  dk  thou  (f.),  and  nnj  thou  (f.)  didst  give. 


§  16]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  31 

Note  2. — D&ge§  may  be  thus  implied  in  H*  H*  ^^^  ^y  but  not 
in  J^  and  *^. 

Note  3. — The  syllable  preceding  a  consonant  in  which  D^ge§- 
forte  is  thus  implied  is  really  a  closed  syllable. 

IS,    Kinds  of  Ddie^-Fdrte 

1.  nnnp  (i:7)  m  nnn-|p;  ))^]  a-^)  m  iipr;  ^nn: 

(1:29) /or  ^njni-   ^D  (3:22) /or  irp-p;  Hp;  (2:21) 
/or^p.^^ 
2.  Efip^  (2:3);    )^y  (2:1);   'nVnnO  (3:8);    nXESH    (4:7); 
11J3(4:21). 

3.  nD-HE^;;  (1  =  12);  i^-nE^;?K  (2:  is);  ni^rnnpb  (2:23). 

•  :  %■   ^  .  V   *%•:.•.•  T  Jt:i-., 

4.  |3^n  (17:17);  ^rSaH  (Ex.  2:3);  E^npJO  (Ex.  15:17). 

5.  !|Hn  (Judg.  5:7);  ^^m  (Job  29  :  21);  !|nai  (Isa.  33  :  12). 
6.r6i^  (2:4);  Hsb  (4:6)';  HIH  (6:2);  [nSnl- 

V    J"  TjT  T  J"  T    J" 

1.  When  the  doubling  represents  the  combination  of  two  similar, 
or  the  assimilation  of  two  dissimilar  consonants,  the  D^ge^-forte  is 
called  compensative. 

2.  When  the  doubling  is  characteristic  of  a  grammatical  form,  the 
Dlge§-f6rte  is  called  characteristic. 

3.  When  by  its  use  the  initial  letter  of  a  word  is  joined  to  the  final 
vowel  of  a  preceding  word,  the  Dages-forte  is  called  conjunctive. 

4.  When  it  is  inserted  in  a  consonant  with  S*wa,  which  is  preceded 
by  a  short  vowel,  to  make  the  §*wa  audible,  the  DIges-forte  is  called 
separative. 

5.  When  the  doubling  strengthens  or  emphasizes  the  final  tone- 
syllable  of  a  section  or  verse,  the  D^ges-forte  is  called  emphatic. 

6.  When  the  doubling  gives  greater  firmness  to  the  preceding 
vowel,  the  D^ges-forte  is  called  firmative. 

16.    Mdppi^  and  Rdf^ 

1.  nrp^  (1:24);  nnn:;^  (2: 15);  ny^pb  (2:15);  np^i6 

(3:6);  n^J?  (3:6)5  n:;^!  (3:15). 


32  EtBMElfTS  OF  HEBKfiW  ($  18 

2.  U'>tb  (1:6);  r^H  (1:26);  nHp^  (2:23);  }n3^nD1  (4:4); 

•IT  T  -     :  •  T  |t:...  )  V    ••   :     v     •• 

^nii'ini)  (4:8). 

1.  Mappik  (p^SP  extender)  is  a  point  placed  in  final  n*  when 
this  letter  is  used  as  a  consonant,  and  not  as  a  vowel-letter. 

Note. — ^Mappik  is  written  in  MSS.  also  in  {^/  )  and  ^. 

2.  "RkU  (nD*l  ^^*0  IS  a  horizontal  stroke  placed  over  a  letter,  to 

T 

call  particular  attention  to  the  absence  of  D§,ge§  or  Mappik. 

17.    M&^^ef 

1.  ^JS-^y  (1:2);  ^1K-^T  (1:3);  2nr^Tl  (1:5);  ^'2'^V^^ 

(1:11). 

2.  n1«n-n«    (1:4);    £^*Dr^2    (1:21);.'T]3-Wo^.    (3:16); 

inWDE^I  (2:13).*^' 

T  T  ~  I"    : 

1.  Makkef  (HpD  hinder)  is  a  horizontal  stroke  placed  between 

two  words,  to  indicate  that  they  are  to  be  pronounced  together  and 
accented  as  if  they  formed  but  a  single  word. 

2.  If  the  former  of  two  words,  joined  by  Makkef,  should  contain  a 
long  vowel  in  a  closed  syllable  (§  26.  2),  such  a  vowel  gives  way  to 
a  short  vowel,  or  receives  Me^eg  (§  18.  4). 

18,    Mieijt 

1.  n1«-^T^  (1:3);  v^'r^nn  (i:7);  n«nn  (i:9);  o^DDton 

(1:16);  D''j;2nt<n  (18:29). 

^   T      :  -  IT 

2.  nn\1  (1:2);  la^e'  (1:21);  nn^ln  (2:4);   DXnana  (2:4); 

T  :  IT  :iT  :        I  t      :it    •    : 

I^DJ^n  (3:1). 

:  I 

3.  nOl^n  (1:25);  HC^W  (1:26);  TS^b^^  (2:3);  nHp'?  (2:23); 

T     T-:  IT  V  ^:i-  ^:i""  t  jt:i'.. 

lE'J?,!  (3:7). 

4.  -imn-D£^1    (2:13);    ]^r^'^l    (3:2);    |in-^1n3    (3:3); 

nri3-n?!)  (4 :  12). 

» A  MJtppIl:  in  k  Is  found  in  printed  texts  in  Gen.  43  :  26;  Lev.  23  :  17. 


§  19]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  33 

5.  n^ni.  (1:29);  ^^ri^  (2:25);   D^l^^?  (4:8);   ni^^.  (17:18); 

n:!^,!  (20 : 7). 

6.  Ka'1  (4  :  16);     ^^  J?3E^11  (24  : 9);  D1K  HJIS  (28  : 2). 

I"  ,.—  ,_    j^       ._  ^_.  jT  4-,'   ' 

Medeg  (jnp  6n(i/g)  is  a  perpendicular  line  placed  on  the  left  side 
of  a  vowel-point,  to  indicate  that  the  syllable  to  which  it  belongs  has 
a  secondary  accent.^    The  following  are  its  chief  uses: 

1.  On  the  second  syllable  before  the  tone,  but  generally  on  the 
third,  if  the  second  is  closed  (§  26.  2). 

2.  With  a  long  vowel  followed  by  a  vocal  S'wa  pretonic. 

3.  With  all  vowels  before  compound  §*w&. 

4.  With  a  long  vowel  in  a  closed  syllable,  before  Makkef. 

5.  With  the  first  syllable  of  all  forms  of  H^H  ^^^  HTI  ^^  which 
the  n  and  n  have  Simple  (i.  e.,  silent)  §«wa. 

6.  With  an  unaccented  -n-  in  a  final  syllable;  and  to  insure  the 
distinct  enunciation  of  a  vowel  which  otherwise  might  be  neglected. 

19.    ^*r^  and  K'Biv 

1.  «ain  (8:17)  =  ^^aln;  De^^^l  (24:33)  =  Ub^^\,  HJD  (30:11) 

T  : 

2.  Kyin    (8:17),   read   J^Jf^l;     DC;'"1   (24:33)  =  U^^\.    133 

(30:11),  read  nji<2. 

T  T 

3.  ^^r\,  to  be  read  t<%1;    r\^n\  to  be  read  ^J^nX;    r\\r\\  to  be 

T      :  T       -;  •      v: 

read  D^i^X;  Ij;!  to  be  read  n^W- 

The  Hebrew  text  was  first  written  with  consonants  only.  Not 
until  somewhere  between  600  and  800  A.  D.  were  the  vowels  written 
with  the  consonants.  Sometimes  the  vowels  call  for  a  different  pro- 
nunciation from  that  indicated  by  the  consonants;  but  usually  the 
vowels  agree  with  the  consonants  as  to  pronunciation. 

1.  K'^iv  (2^n3>  written)  is  the  term  applied  to  the  pronuncia- 


^  MQn&l^  ( " )  is  sometimes  substituted  for  M6dgg. 


34  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  19 

tion  of  a  word  that  is  called  for  by  the  consonants  of  the  text  as  dis- 
tinguished from  the  vowels  written  with  them. 

2.  ^f*re  (^*lp,  to  be  read)  is  the  term  applied  to  the  pronunciation 
of  a  word  called  for  by  the  vowels  supplied  by  the  Massoretes  (the 
name  applied  to  those  students  of  the  Hebrew  text  who  established 
the  traditional  pronunciation  represented  by  the  present  vocalization 
of  the  text). 

3.  Some  words  are  always  read  otherwise  than  as  they  are  written. 
These  are  said  to  have  a  "perpetual  If *re.'* 


IV.    The  Accents 

20,    The  Place  of  the  Accent^ 

1.  n^E^Xn  (1:1);    Xna  (1:1);    D^DE^  (i:l);    V^Hn  (i:i); 

TjE^n  (1:2). 

2.  n^E^K-)  (1:1);    QlpD  (1:9);    D^DE^  (1:1);    D^»  (i:6); 

nnn  (i:9)- 

3.  n^E^Xn  (1:1);    5<~I3  (1:1);    ^^130   (1:6);    H-)!?"'  (2:23); 
TjSnnp  (3:8). 

rp-1    (1:6);    -inX    (1:5);    K-lpl    (1:5);    ^Dt<0(2:9); 

n^oan  (3:  is). 

4.  Y"1.{<  (1:10);  T]E^n  (1:2);  NE^T  (1:11);  ynE^  (1:20);  pi;  (2:8). 

inn    (1:2);    3-1;?   (1:6);    3E?3;  (1:11);    E^DJ    (1:20);    pX 
(2:12). 

1.  The  accent  or  tone  may  rest  on  the  ultima,  in  which  case  the 
word  is  called  Milra';  or  on  the  penult,  in  which  case  the  word  is 
called  Mir  el;  but  never  on  the  antepenult. 

2.  So  far  as  the  syllabification  of  a  word  is  concerned,  a  closed 
syllable  with  a  long  vowel,  or  an  open  syllable  with  a  short  vowel,  is, 
as  a  rule,  accented  (§  28.  1.  2). 

3.  Uninflected  words,  and  words  receiving  in  inflection  no  endings, 
are  accented  on  the  ultima. 

4.  Nouns  of  the  class  called  Segolates,  which  are  really  monosyllabic 
(§  89.),  usually  accent  the  characteristic  vowel  and  not  the  helping 
vowel. 

Note  1. — ^The  place  of  the  accent  in  inflected  words,  involving 
appendages,  must  be  studied  in  connection  with  the  subject  of  verbal 
and  nominal  inflection. 


1  The  place  of  the  accent  is  indicated  in  this  grammer  by  the  the  use  of  the  accent -r*. 
Words  which  are  not  thus  indicated  are  to  be  accented  on  the  ultima. 

35 


36  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  22 

Note  2. — ^The  term  "accent"  is  used  of  the  sign  marking  the 
syllable  which  receives  the  stress  of  voice;  the  term  "tone"  is  used  of 
the  stress  of  voice. 

21.    Shifting  of  the  Tone 

1.  n^^^  «np  (1:5);  ne  r\^v  d-n);  on^bsi^n  (3:i9). 

2.  T\m  (4  : 7),  but  r\m  (3  :  H);  ""DJiJ  (7  : 4),  but  ipj^  (4  : 9). 

3.  lOii'KlrS);  •n-)2^Va:22);  -ia^'(2:7);  Qp^l  (4:8). 

V         J-  )    vjT   :-  V     J--  |tjt- 

4.  n^Dxi  (3:18);  ^n"i3m  (Ex.  3:20);  in«aim,  in^am 

jT  :    -  IT  :  J'      ••    •    :  j*        ••      i    :  j*  :    -    •    : 

(Ex.  6 : 6). 

1.  The  tone  is  often  shifted  from  the  ultima  to  the  penult  of  a  word 
which  is  followed  closely  by  a  monosyllable,  or  by  a  dissyllable  ac- 
cented upon  the  penult. 

2.  The  tone  is  sometimes  shifted  in  the  case  of  words  standing  at 
the  end  of  a  clause  or  section,  i.  e.,  in  pause  (§  38.). 

3.  Wdw  Conversive  with  the  Imperfect  usually  causes  shifting  of 
the  tone  from  the  ultima  to  the  penult  when  the  latter  is  an  open 
syllable  (§  73.)  and  the  former  is  closed. 

4.  Waw  Conversive  with  the  Perfect  often  causes  shifting  of  the 
tone  from  the  penult  to  the  ultima  (§  73.). 

22.    The  Table  of  Accents 

1.    DISJUNCTIVES 

class  I, — Emperors 

3.  xnbiDS'goita X 

4.  rhifb\^  Maimed X 


1.  :p^^psmuk ,x 

2.  mnt^'A(9nab ^ 


Class  11.— Kings 


6.  '?1naP]pTZaii:efgld6I...« 


7- Ji"'?"!  R'^i(a)" K 


Class  III.— Duke« 


8.  J<D£fS  PaSta ^ 

T    :     - 

9.  y^r\^  Y'Siv J< 

10.  J^nSiD  Tifta ...X 


11.  T^n  T«vir N 

12.  iipni  ZarU « 


23] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


37 


Class  IV.— Counts 


13.  £f*^3  GereS {< 

14.  D'»£fi:i  G'rlSiyim J^ 

•  ~      T : 

15.  lnOniH'g5rmeh'....|>^ 


16.  IIS  Pizer ^ 

17.  rnQ  •'jnD  tfarn^  F^r^ . .  ^ 

T  :  T       •     :  p 


2.    CONJUNCTIVES 

Class  v.— Servants 


19.  t^D-ipMerxa ^ 

20.  J^blSD  JOID  Merxa 

y/T  :  T      :  v 

rMia ^ 

21.  miaMtoab {^ 

22.  j^n^Darga i< 

ST    :   -  s 

23.  NDlp  ?adma K 


24.  T]SnO  MahpaX « 

25.  nJDp  KE^i^n  T'1K& 

if'tanna J< 

26.  lDl''"Dn")"'Ye'ral>ben 

V  I  :■  -r 

y6m6 J< 

27.  X^'KD  M«'ay-yW « 


23.    Remarks  on  the  Table  of  Accents 

1.  The  "Accents"  were  designed  to  have  a  threefold  use: 

a.  To  serve  as  musical  notes  in  the  cantillation  of  the  Law  and 
the  Prophets  in  the  synagogue; 

b.  To  indicate  the  tone-syllable  {i.  e.,  the  syllable  which  is  to 
be  accented)  of  every  word; 

c.  To  show  the  relation  sustained  by  each  word  to  the  other 
words  in  a  clause  or  sentence. 

2.  Every  accent  is  used  as  a  sign  of  interpunction  (§  23.  1.  c),  to 
separate  or  join  the  several  words  of  a  sentence: 

a.  Disjunctives  (those  numbered  1-18  in  the  Table)  mark  a  sepa- 
ration. 

b.  Conjunctives  (those  numbered  19-27  in  the  Table)  mark  a 
connection. 

3.  The  Disjunctives  vary  in  strength  or  power,  and  are  accordingly 
divided  into  four  ranks:  Emperors,  Kings,  Dukes,  Counts. 

4.  Those  accents  numbered  9  and  18  are  pre-positive,  i.  e.,  written 

1  Made  up  of  MGna^i  and  P«sH:. 

«  Used  for  M6«6g  with  words  which  have  Snmfc:  or  'Kdnhfy. 


38  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  24 

only  on  the  first  letter  of  a  word,  wherever  the  tone-syllable  of  that 
word  may  be. 

5.  Those  accents  numbered  3,  8,  12,  25  are  postpositive,  i.  e., 
written  only  on  the  last  letter  of  a  word,  wherever  the  tone-syllable 
of  that  word  may  be. 

6.  The  post-positive  accents  are  repeated  whenever  their  word  is 
accented  on  the  Penult,  or  has  Pa^ah-furtive  (§  42.  2.  d)  under  the 
last  letter. 

7.  SiUdk  may  be  distinguished  from  Me^eg  (§  18.),  Pa§t&  from 
Ifadm^,  and  Y'^iv  from  MahpaX  by  their  position. 

24.    The  Consecution  of  the  More  Common  Accents 

1.  :Y"l«n Gen.  1:1. 

I        V  IT     T 

2.  :  Y"l«n D^i^X Gen.  1 : 1. 

3.  :p rp^^ y^P'\n Gen.  1:7. 

:  vixn-^;; nE^SDi D^i^« Gen.  i :  28. 

I     V  IT  T  ^  T  A-..    :    •    :  •        v: 

1.  Every  verse  (PIsAk)  is  separated  from  the  verse  following  by 
the  sign  *,  called  Sof  P^siik  {end  of  the  verse) ;  while  the  last  word  of 
every  verse  has  on  its  tone-syllable  the  accent  -r,  called  Silluk,  which, 
in  form,  is  like  M^^eg  (§  18.). 

Note. — Since  Silliik  always  stands  on  the  last  tone-syllable  of  a 
verse,  while  Me^eg  never  stands  on  a  tone-syllable,  they  are  easily 
distinguished. 

2.  If  the  verse  contain  two  primary  sections,  Silluk  marks  the  end 
of  the  first,  while  the  end  of  the  second  is  indicated  by  -7-,  'A^n&lj. 

Note  1. — In  the  study  of  the  accentuation  of  a  verse  one  must 
begin  with  Silltik,  i,  e.,  at  the  end  of  the  verse. 

Note  2. — These  accents  have  only  relative  power.  The  pauses 
marked  are  logical  pauses. 

3.  If  the  verse  contain  three  primary  sections,  Silltik  marks  the  end 
of  the  first;  'A^n^b,  the  end  of  the  second;  while  the  end  of  the  third 
is  indicated  by  -^,  called  S'golti. 

Note. — ^For  an  explanation  of  the  repetition  of  -^,  see  §  23.  6. 


§  34]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  39 

4. :  D^»n D\n^x Dinn inav-Gen.  1:2 

•  IT    -  •        v:  A     :  T 

5.  a.  rh^^n Hd."!^ WbWn  .  .Cen.  1 :  14. 

T   :at    -  •  :    -.  :  •  -    t     - 

6-  ne^3'n nn«- •  •D^"^b«  noK'V  •  -Gen.  1 : 9. 

AT      T     -    -  TV  •  V:  V  J  - 

6.  :  y-iNin  •  •  ■  Dpc^n D\rj!?x ....  n^ic^x").?  •  •  •  cen.  1 : 1. 

:  Ti^nn -ii«n ato-is  -iWn-nj<...Gen.i:4. 

;•.••-  IT  A  •  t       T 

••  .D%-i^N.  • -DnN-Gen.  1:28.. .  .njil. ..  .E^mn. -Gen.  3:14. 

v:  T  T   T   - 

4.  When  a  primary  section  is  large  enough  to  be  divided,  or  to  con- 
tain a  secondary  section,  the  end  of  this  secondary  section,  whether 
it  stand  in  the  primary  section  ruled  by  Silhik;  or  *A^nHi,  is  most 
frequently  marked  by  — ,  called  ZHkef  k^ton. 

5.  a.  In  secondary  sections  containing  but  a  single  word,  where 
Zlkef  t:^ton  would  have  been  expected,  Z&kef  g^dol,  -^,  is  generally 
found  instead. 

b.  A  secondary  section  of  less  importance  than  that  which  is 
indicated  by  Zikef  k^ton  is  marked  by  — ,  called  R'vi(a)\ 

6.  The  pause  required  by  the  rhythm  before  SflWlf  and  *A^n&h  is 
marked  by  a  disjunctive  -7-,  called  Tift^;  that  before  S'golti,  by  -^, 
called  Z§,rk§,. 

Note. — ^For  the  consecution  of  the  remaining  disjunctives  see  the 
Table  of  Consecution  of  Accents  (§  25.)- 

7.  :Y"i.«n  m] (i:i);  :Dpn  ]^P'hv. (1=2); 

:T]E/nn'pni (i:4). 

8.  D^ribii  4^13 (1:1);  Dinn  ^js-^j; (i:2); 

A'        v:  jT  T  A     :        J"  :  - 

r\b''b  K-ip (1:5). 

T     :aT  tJ  JT 

9.  nt^-T  n^E^;?  ^3 (3 :  14);  'jan-?|in2  ne^x (3:3). 

7.  The  Conjunctive  accent  which  always  accompanies  SiUiil^  is  -j-, 
called  MerX^. 

8.  The  Conjunctive  accent  which  always  accompanies  ' A^n&t  is  -r-, 
called  Mtin^t. 

9.  The  Conjunctive  accent  which  always  accompanies  S'g6lt&  is 
likewise  Mtin^t- 


40 


ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW 


[§25 


25.    A  Table  Showing  the  Consecution  of  the  Accents 


r     ) 


or  \  or 

P  QP 

J  J  J  V  y 

or  \  or 

p  Qp 

or  \  or 

P  <5P 

q  f      y 

or  \  or 

p  «p 

Q  f     y 

—        .        __  __ 

or  \  or 

P  <5P 


REMARKS   ON  THE  TABLE 

1.  The  Consecution  of  SiUdk  and  *A^n^h,  with  the  exception  of  the 
first  conjunctive,  is  the  same. 

2.  The  third  disjunctive  preceding  Silluk  and  *A0nah,  the  second 
preceding  S'golt^  and  Zikef  k&ton,  and  the^r^^  preceding  R«vi(a)'  is 
Geres,  after  which  the  consecution  is  the  same  for  all. 

3.  This  Geres  may  be  entirely  omitted,  in  which  case  the  servant 
of  the  preceding  disjunctive  will  be  present  and  will  assume  the  func- 
tions of  Geres. 

4.  After  l^admS,  the  consecution  may  proceed  either  with  T'lis^ 
^f 'tannS,  (and  its  Mun^h's)  or,  if  there  is  a  slight  emphasis,  with  the 
disjunctive  T'\M  6'd614  (and  its  Mun&h's). 

5.  Words  standing  between  the  T'lis^  Jf  *tannl  or  the  T'lis^  6'd61a 
and  the  beginning  of  the  section,  will  receive  Mun&h  if  they  are  closely 
related,  but  Pizer  if  there  is  a  great  emphasis.  Words  standing  be- 
tween P&zer  and  the  beginning  of  the  verse  will  receive  Miin&h. 

Note. — Instead  of  Munah,  L'garmeh  (t.  e.,  Mtlnah  with  P*sik 
(It-))  is  substituted  if  there  is  a  slight  emphasis  on  the  word. 


¥ 


§  25]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  41 

6.  Instead  of  Pllzer,  preceded  by  MAn&t*  there  may  be  substituted 
!lif arn^  F^r§,,  which  is  always  preceded  by  Yeraji  ben  y6m6.  Other 
words  will  have  Mlln^t* 

Note  1. — ^This  table  exhibits  in  general  the  features  of  the  prose 
system.  There  are,  however,  many  exceptions.  The  poetic  system 
is  entirely  different. 

Note  2. — A  few  accents,  occurring  but  seldom,  are  omitted  from 
the  table. 

Note  3. — This  very  brief  treatment  of  the  accent  aims  only  to 
introduce  the  student  to  a  subject,  which  demands  much  careful 
study  and  investigation  for  its  mastery.  Reference  may  be  made  to 
Wickes,  A  Treatise  on  the  Accentuation  of  the  Twenty-One  so-called 
Prose  Books  of  the  Old  Testament  (1886) ;  Idem,  A  Treatise  on  the  Three 
so-called  Poetical  Books  of  the  Old  Testament,  Psalms,  Proverbs  and  Job 
(1881). 


V.    Syllables 

26.    Kinds  of  Syllables 

1.  KV3(1:1);  in"h(l:2);  !in"3n  (1:2);   ''JB  (1:2);   ^T 

(1:3). 

2.  ^^T??  (1=6);    p3  (1:4);    2l0   (1:4);    j;n-]D    (1:11); 

^e^D^  (1 :  18). 

1.  Syllables  which  end  in  a  vowel-sound  are  called  open. 

2.  Syllables  which  end  in  a  consonant  are  called  closed. 

Note  1. — A  closed  syllable  whose  final  consonant  is  doubled  is 
called  sharpened. 

Note  2. — ^What  seems  to  be  an  unaccented  open  syllable,  with  a 
short  vowel,  is  of  frequent  occurrence;  this  is  commonly  called  a 
half-open  syllable;  but  it  is  better  treated  as  closed  (§  10.). 

27.    Syllabification 

1-  |n-?-^n-p-1  (4:4);  Jfip"!  (1:20);  -1E^{<  (1:7). 

2.  la-l-2/^  (1:20);  n"iE^-«n3  (1:1);  Wrtb^  (1:1);  p^-l  (1:4). 

3.  na^M.  (9  :  21);   -yV  (l :  22)  for  TV;,   '2'))),^  (1 : 5)  for  2-lJ?. 

1.  A  word  contains  as  many  syllables  as  it  has  vowels;  but  Pa^afe- 
furtive  (§  42.  2.  d),  and  S*wa  do  not  fornji  syllables. 

2.  Syllables  must  begin  with  a  consonant,  the  only  exception  being 
the  prefixed  conjunction  ^ ;  they  may  begin  with  two  consonants,  the 
first  always  having  under  it  a  vocal  S*wa.^ 

Remark. — Syllables  often  occur  which  apparently  begin  with  a 
S'wa.  These  are  cases  in  which  S'wa  creeps  in  after  a  laryngeal  as 
a  transitional  or  liaison  element  linking  the  two  syllables  together 
and  facilitating  pronunciation  of  the  laryngeal.  The  §'wa  is  better 
treated  as  belonging  with  the  preceding  laryngeal. 

»  There  is  a  single  exception  to  this  remark,  viz.,  >5«y  (Gtcn.  4 :  19)  in  which  the  8*»rft 
is  silent. 

42 


§  28]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  43 

3.  Syllables  may  end  in  two  consonants,  but  only  when  these  are 
strong.  The  harshness  resulting  from  this  combination  is  generally 
avoided  by  the  insertion  of  a  helping  vowel  (§  36.). 

28.    Quantity  of  the  Vozvel  in  Syllables 

1.  ^1X-n  (1:4);    brr2    (1:7);   n^E^'-«n2  (1:1);    Kn2  (1:1); 

J        T  J-      "  .     J*  •• :  T  T 

nor D  (1=2). 

2.  K-|-p'1  (1:5);  HTpD  (1:10);  ^"30  (1:6);  DX  (1:1); 

3.  DpWn  (1:1);  nWvh  (2:22);  )m  (2:24);  Dj?M4 :  15). 

4.  (a),  "qcfn-riati); 

(6).  nt^i  (1:26); 

(«).  rpn?  (1:14);  wVp  (1:22); 
(<0.  "•J-ixi  (18  :  12). 

I- 

6.  r\^2  (6:14);  QIQ  (1:6);  2T  (1:22);  -)W  (19:4). 

1.  The  vowel  of  an  unaccented  open  syllable  must  be  long. 

2.  The  vowel  of  a  closed  syllable  must  be  short,  unless  it  has  the 
tone;  when  it  has  the  tone,  it  may  be  long. 

3.  The  vowel  of  the  sharpened  syllable  is  short,  unless  it  has  the 
tone;  it  is  pure,  i.  e.,  a,  i,  u,  and  not  deflected,  i.  e.,  e  or  6. 

4.  Short  vowels  are  often  found  in  what  appear  to  be  unaccented 
open  syllables,  and  are  often  called  half-open  syllables;  but  they  are 
better  treated  as  closed  syllables.  For  example  in  (a)  digeS-forte  is 
implied  or  understood,  thus  making  the  syllable  closed;  in  (b)  the  la- 
ryngeal once  had  no  vowel  (cf.  ^DD^  [2:9];  ^DX'' ';  mW) 
and  the  S*wa  is  therefore  only  a  secondary  helping-element  and  does 
not  affect  the  syllabification;  in  (c)  the  S'wa  is  to  be  treated  as  silent 
(c/.  §  10.);  in  {d)  the  laryngeal  was  once  vocal  and  closed  the  syl- 
lable, and  the  short  vowel  persists  even  though  the  laryngeal  has  be- 
come quiescent  (c/.  §  10.). 

5.  The  vowel  of  an  open  accented  syllable  may  be  short. 


1 1  K^s.  20  :  14.  « Isa.  61 :  10. 


VI.    Euphony  of  Vowels' 

29.    Short  Vowels 

1.  o.  bl2\  (1:4);    np2l  (1:9);    Q^Tp\  (1:10);    .TH  (1:20); 

"jryp  (1 :  11)-' ' 

6.  -n;n  (1:25);  -Dni  (2:12);  |a  (2:8);  ^ji;-!?  (1:7);  r]« 

(3:1). 
e.n'2^  (2:3);    Upb  (2:22);    p21   (2:24);    nS^  (3:23); 

noa^  (2:9). 

d.  Dj;S   (2:23);    ni?^   (2:9);    p«    (2:5);    ^J^E^'H    (3:13); 

nCDK/  (15:5);  nn''2  (24:32). 

e.  nE;i;j  (1:26);  12];^  (2:5);  hV  (2:6);  ^DXD  (2:9). 

2.  o.  nJin  (1:29);    1BJ<  (2:24);    InE^K  (2:24);    3T  (1:22); 

'pi  (2:22). 

5.  Knp^    (1:5);     ^£^'0^    (1:18);    TDDH    (2:6);     ^Bp]; 
inpDJ  (3:5). 

J   J:    :   • 

3.  a.  !lb^1  (2:1);   D^STJ?  (3:7);   Hp"?  (3:23);   Dp^  (4:24); 

1.  The  pure  short  a  is  found: 

o.  In  unaccented  closed,  or  sharpened  syllables; 
h.  In  the  closed  syllable  with  secondary  accent  of  nouns  in  the 
construct  state,  and  a  few  monosyllabic  nouns  and  particles; 

c.  In  the  accented  closed  syllable  of  many  verbal  forms. 

d.  (1)  As  the  accented  characteristic  vowel  of  laryngeal  and  ^'^J? 
Segolates  (§89.);  (2)  before  the  suffix  ^J,  and  (3)  sometimes  before 
the  locative  ending  H .• 


»Tliis  treatment  is  not  intended  to  be  exhaustive;   it  will  be  found  practically 
complete,  however,  so  far  as  general  principles  are  concerned. 

44 


§  29]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  45 

e.  In  a  closed  syllable  with  Me^eg  (§  18.  3)  before  a  compound 
g'wa. 

2.  The  pure  short  i  is  found: 

a.  In  unaccented  closed,  and  especially  sharpened,  syllables, 
and  in  some  accented  open  syllables  (§  28.  5);  but 

h.  That  i  (-^)  which  comes  by  attenuation  or  thinning  (§  36. 
4)  from  an  original  a  must  be  distinguished  from  an  original  i,  al- 
though it  is  subject  to  the  same  rules  as  the  latter. 

3.  The  pure  short  ii  is  found  almost  exclusively  in  unaccented 
sharpened  syllables. 

4.  -nK(l:4);    'nn2^1  (1 :  22) ;     D2"H2:8);    2;iri(3:24); 

)    vjT  :  -  V  jT  -  vjT  :  - 

nbm(4:i). 

■?]12^n  (1:2);  2|':S;.(l:n);  n|:^.  (2:18);  'yy>(X:22);  j^^l  (2:22). 
ion:  (2:9);  Vn^;  12^;  [Wl];  DDT  (9:2). 

T     :   V  I     vjv  V  V.'  -  v:iv  v      :v 

5.  -^3  (1:21);  ^^"2^  (1:29);  T\^^tO  (3:21);  naH")  (6:15); 

T  t:t  :t  t;t 

6!Dj;5n]. 

mn;?  (2  :  15);  niDC^  (2  :  15);  "^DK  (3  :  11);  -3]^  (2  =  24). 

Tit  t:t  T-:  T^:t* 

4.  The  short  g-sound  -v-  (e),  as  a  deflection  from  a  or  i,  is  found: 
a.  In  unaccented  closed  syllables  in  general. 

h.  As  an  unaccented  vowel  in  certain  forms  with  wlw  conver- 
sive. 

c.  As  a  helping-vowel  in  Segolate  nouns. 

d.  As  the  characteristic  accented  vowel  in  Segolate  forms. 

e.  In  unaccented  closed  syllables  before  laryngeals. 

Note  1. — There  is  also  to  be  noticed  the  character  of  the  -?- 
which  appears  in  certain  particles,  e.  g.,  )J3,  *1E^{<,  etc.,  and  pro- 
nominal forms  (DOX;  DO 5  \V\y  D2'  ]^)y  ^6  origin  of  which 
is  obscure. 

5.  The  short  o-sound  -r-  (6),  deflected  from  and  more  common  than 
-^  (u)  and  sustaining  to  -^  and  -^  (o)  the  same  relation  that  is  sus- 
tained by  -V-  (e)  to  -r-  (i)  and  -^  (e),  is  found  in  unaccented  closed 
syllables. 


46  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  30 

30.    Naturally  Long  Vowels 

1.  a.  m  (4 :  14)  =  na';  n^  (4  :  25)  =  m;  6p  ==  kM]. 

T  T  )    T 

^.  D^3  =  gannavi;  jna^mattan*;  2n3  =  k'^av3;  a'lp^fe^'rav/^ 
c.  D^^^^<  (l  :  l)  =  **16him  for  '«lahim;   ^^i^'^  (1:3)  =  y6'mer 
/or  yfi'mer;   V^J  (1 :  16)  =  gSdol /or  gSdal;  ^3^  (2:16)  = 
'&XSl/or'&xai.  '  • 

2.  o.  ^T1  =  ^T'!  (1:6);  -iy^J  =  n^11  (2:7);  |E^11  =  |l£f">';  (2:21). 
6.  |ipi  =  y&mln5;    "Jlpn  =  bisid';    HICfD  ='maSt(a)lj.' 

"•  "llCD''p  for  -itep';  E^?.^''?.' 

d.  n^E'i;  (3: 13) /or  n">E'][;  (n:?;^);  wv  (3  =  17) /or  tn^iia 

e.  Tppn(2:5);  DE'2bM3:21);  T3n(3:ll);  NIE^H  (3:13); 

^112n(l:18). 
/•  D"'pP  (9:9);  D"'E'n  (6:16); 

3.  a.  y(f^V\  (3:19);  DIpV":  Dip-" 

6.  irin  =  irin  (1:2);  iri2  =  iri2  (i:2);  iDin=nDin"; 

Dpin-" 
c.  nn«  (3 :  14):  on;;  (3 :  D;  nnian  (4 : 23);  yrq  (3 : m-, 

EfD1(12:5). 

Naturally  long  vowels  have  arisen  either  (1)  from  contraction  of 
a  vowel  and  semivowel  {i.  e.,  y  or  w)^  or  (2)  as  the  characteristic  of 
certain  nominal  and  verbal  forms,  or  (3)  in  compensation. 

1.  Naturally  long  a  (-?-,  seldom  {^ ),  comparatively  rare,  is  found: 

a.  In  certain  forms  of  middle-vowel  verbs  (§  89.)  of  which  it  is 
characteristic. 

h.  In  certain  nominal  forms,  of  which  it  is  characteristic  (§§ 
94,  95.). 


» Ex.  22  : 1,  6,  7. 

«  Gen.  34:12; 

2  Kgs.  11 :  18. 

«  Esth.  4  :  8. 

«2  Sam.  17:  11. 

6  Gen.  13  :  9. 

•  Ps.  30  :  5. 

» 1  Sam.  2  :  10. 

«  Gen.  19  :  28. 

•  Judg.  19  :  2. 

w  Ex.  21 :  19. 

"  Gen.  13  ;  17. 

"Ezra  3: 11. 

M  Ex.  40 :  17. 

§  30]  BY  AN  DTDUCnVE  METHOD  47 

c.  Naturally  long  a,  in  the  great  majority  of  instances,  was 
rounded  to  6  (§  30.  6). 

2.  Naturally  long  i  (^ ,  sometimes ),  is  found: 

a.  As  the  contraction  of  iy  (§  83.  /). 

b.  In  certain  nominal  forms  of  which  it  is  characteristic  (§  94.). 

c.  In  certain  nominal  forms  in  which  it  is  compensative  (§  95.). 

d.  In  certain  H' /  forms,  before  consonant-additions  (§  85.). 

e.  In  Hif'il  forms,  in  which  e  would  naturally  have  been  ex- 
pected. 

/.  In  certain  forms  of  middle-vowel  verbs. 

3.  Naturally  long  ti  {),  sometimes  -r)  is  found: 

o.  As  characteristic  of  certain  middle- vowel  ^al  forms  (§  89.). 

h.  As  the  contraction  of  uw,  whenever  the  combination  uw 
would  be  final;  in  certain  YQ  Hof'al  forms  (§  83.);  and  in  cer- 
tain middle-vowel  and  J?"^  Hof'al  forms,  which  seem  to  follow  the 
analogy  of  V'S  forms. 

c.  As  characteristic  of  certain  nominal  forms,  including  the  J^&\ 
passive  participle. 

4.  a.  p2  (1:4);  n""?';  D^rjf  (3:6). 

b.  3ip"tp|  (4:7)  =  t«tlv  from  3"'E)"'ri;    np;rri  (21:7)  from 

c.  riE'l?  (6  :  14)  =  ''s&from  ">E^J?;  nipD  (1 :  10)  =  nulfwg  from 

d.  ""n^Dn^;  ^mv';  ^^'^>^*'  ^'■^-  'O^iv  (3:ii)i- 

e.  IJD  (1:2)  =  p'nS  from  tJB;  ^^^  (1 :  16);  IJI);  (3:7);  IQI 
(4 :  10). 

/•  DDD"'OV''o™DCD"'D;  ?n''«V'-om|n"'K;  1E^"'DV'-omnE^iD. 

T"  t:-)t"  )   t   I  -  r       '•  r    -.  - 

5.  a.  nTi;vP\''  n:"'32n';  nraon"; nr>>an";  nraran-" 

6.  rp^n  (3  :  14);  TI^SN  (3  :  19);  TJIJS  (4:6);  [iT'DID]- 

c.  r\nm  (2:5);  n^y  a-.ny.  ncy^  (i8:25). 

1  Gen.  12  :  15.  »  Ex.  3  :  10.  »  Deut.  3  :  21.  «  Deut.  4  :  35. 
» 1  Sam.  15  :  9.  •  Gen.  49  :  24.  '  Isa.-  26  :  7.  »  Deut.  1 :  44. 
•  Ruth  1:9.         M  Gen.  37  :  7.       "1  Sam.  3:11.      i»  Zech.  13  :  7. 


48  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  30 

4.  Naturally  long  e  (written  ^ ,  yet  sometimes  ___  and   H ) 

comes  from  the  contraction  of  ay  or  ai,  and  is  found: 

a.  In  the  inflection  of  V'j;  Segolates  (§  84.). 
h.  In  the  Hif'il  forms  of  verbs  originally  ^"Q. 

c.  In  the  Imperative  (2  m.  sg.)  of  verbs  H"/  (§  85.);  and  In 
the  construct  state  of  nouns  ending  in  H (^)  (§  HO.). 

d.  In  n' /  perfects  before  consonant  additions  (§  85.). 

e.  In  the  plural  construct  ending  of  masc.  nouns,  H"  /  (§  HO.). 
/.  In  the  penult  of  a  few  nominal  formations. 

Note. — ^The  told  very  frequently  yields  to  i,  especially  in  active 
perfects, 

5.  Besides  €,  there  is  another  naturally  long  ^-sound,  which  like- 
wise arises  out  of  ay.   It  is  written  ^ and  H and  may,  for  the  sake 

of  distinction,  be  transliterated  as  e.    It  is  found: 

a.  In  n''/  Imperfects  and  Imv's  before  the  fem.  plur.  termina- 
tion nJ  (§  85.);   and,  after  the  analogy  of  these  forms,  also  as  a 

T 

separating  vowel  in  similar  middle-vowel  and  ^^  forms. 

h.  In  the  forms  of  plural  nouns  before  the  pronominal  suffixes  ?] 
and  n  (§  in.). 

c.  In  the  absolute  forms  of  nouns  from  H' /  roots  and  in  the 
J^dX  Impf.  and  the  Participles  of  H' /  verbs. 

6.  a.  \>2V<  (2  :  16)  =  '&X61 /or  'liXal;  {^^'^    (2:10)  =  y6se', /or  yase'; 

T 

E^DT  (1 :  26)  =  r6mes  for  rames;  D^lD  (2  :  13)  =s6vev  for 

s&vev. 

h.  ^"Q^^  (1:3)  =  y6'mer  for  y^'mer;  [^^5*)  =  yiki:61  for  yikMl]. 
\-     i  I    • 

c.  D\i^N  (l:l)="16Wm;    -\\r\  (6:9);   uh'W  (3  =  22);   U'ht 

(26:31). 

d.  PjBlJ?^  (1 :  20)  =  y«-6fef ;  ')2'"l2f2n';  (2  :  25)  =  yWboSaSd. 

«•  ""n'Opq  (6:18);   TJ-inTE^H  (28:15);   ">n2D';   HlVp/ 

7.  a.  DV'  (1 : 5);  r]1n  (1 :  6)  =  06x  [cf.  Tjin]. 

h.  F|Dn  (4:2)  =  t6se£;  '\Th\n  (5 : 4);    ^"^^y 

1 1  Sam.  22  :  22.  >  Nahum  1 :  14.  *  Isa.  18 : 2. 


§  30]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  49 

c.  nn^ln  (2:4);  -i;;to  (1:14). 

d.  irp^  (1:11);   \2  (1:11);   mi  (1:11);    rJ^nS  (12:8). 

•  J-  t:  it 

8.       pVa  (9:13,  14,  16);   Dl-)j;n  (19:25,  29);   nXin  (1:9); 

I  T      T  IV  •    T  »V  V         r  I" 


6.  Naturally  long  6,  for  the  most  part  written  defectively,  is  in 
many  cases  only  the  rounding  of  a  naturally  long  d  (§  30.  1).  This 
is  the  case: 

a.  In  the  forms  of  the  Infinitive  Absolute  (§  70.  1.  h),  and  in 
the  5^1  Active  Participle  (§  71.  1.  a). 

h.  In  the  ^fal  Imperfect  of  verbs  {<"S  (§  82.),  and  in  the 
Nif'al  of  middle-vowel  verbs  (§  89.). 

c.  In  a  large  number  of  nominal  formations  (§§  94,  95.). 

d.ln  so-called  Polel  (or  Po'el),  and  Hi^polel  (or  Hi^po'el)  forms. 

e.  In  the  separating  vowel  used  before  consonant  terminations 
in  the  Perfects  of  ))")}  and  middle-vowel  verbs  (§§  88,  89.). 

7.  There  is,  however,  a  second  naturally  long  6,  which  is  the  result 
of  the  contraction  of  au  or  aw.    This  is  found: 

a.  In  a  large  number  of  monosyllabic  nouns  from  middle-vowel 
stems. 

h.  In  the  Nif'al  and  Hif'il  of  verbs  originally  f  S  (§  80.  3.  h), 

c.  In  many  YQ  nominal  formations  (§§  99,  101.). 

d.  In  the  contraction  of  &h<l=6  (seldom  written  f\). 

8.  Vowels  strengthened  in  compensation  for  the  loss  of  a  consonant 
are  unchangeable,  like  naturally  long  vowels. 

Note  1. — ^Naturally  long  vowels  are  usually  written  fully  (§  6.  4. 
N.  2),  and  are  thus  distinguished  from  tone-long  vowels.  There  are 
many  cases,  however,  in  which  the  distinction  can  be  determined 
only  from  a  knowledge  of  the  grammatical  form  in  which  the  vowel 
stands. 

Note  2. — Naturally  long  vowels  are  unchangeable.  The  excep- 
tions to  this  rule  are  so  few  as  scarcely  to  deserve  notice. 


1  Num.  22  :  6. 


50  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  31 

31.     Tone-Long  Vowels 

1.  a.  DIX  (1:26);    mX  (1:5);    H^DX  (3:11);    nay   (2:5); 

JT    T  TV  T     :     IT       T  AT      :       • 

■Tjin  (15:10). 
h.  r\^y  (1:9);    T\12n:^  (1:26);    .TH  (1:28);    t^-)3  (1:1); 

jT        r     -  T       ••       :  T    -  JT   T 

X-lpi  (1:5);  nj?2;n  (2:6);  ynXH  (1:1);  niO-' 
c.  X-l-3  (1 : 1)  for  «-13;  rp"*!  (1  •  6)  for  j;np-1. 

JT  T  -T-  'S^       |j-  T  ^        j.         _ 

Dip-!?  (1:9) /or  Dlpa;    mnjpSn(3:7);    i<^pM2:23); 

inin  (1:2);  mts^n  (3: 19). 

J      T  J  T 

rf-  n^D«  (3:11);  Tlima  (3:11);  iT^S^  HJnpSn  (3:7); 

T     :      IT       T  I       J*  •    •  T       JV    T  T       S     JJ-  T        • 

n^^^^  (1:5);  n;SV  (13:14). 

A  short  vowel  (-^,  -7-,  -^),  when  it  would  stand  in  close  proximity 
to  the  tone,  frequently  becomes  long,  a  becoming  I,  1  becoming  e/ 
ii  becoming  o.   These  vowels  are  called,  from  their  origin,  fone-long. 

1.  Tone-long  ^,  instead  of  an  original  a,  is  found: 
o.  In  a  closed  tone-syllable, 

(1)  in  the  absolute  state  of  nouns; 

(2)  in  pause  (§  38.); 

(3)  in  a  few  Segolates  from  middle-vowel  roots; 
6.  In  an  open  tone-syllable, 

(1)  in   the  more  recent  feminine    ending   H (from   a^) 

(§109.2.6); 

(2)  in  n"b  and  ^'\>  verbal  forms  (§§85,  86.  1.  a); 

(3)  in  some  Segolate  nouns; 

c.  In  an  open  2?^etone-syllable;    always ,  except  as  indicated  in 
§  32.  2. 

d.  In  an  open  positone-syllable, 

(1)  in  the  case  of  the  pronominal  ending  p,  and  frequently 
the  suffixes  H  and  ^; 

(2)  in  the  feminine  plural  termination  HJ,  and  the  locative 

T 

ending,  p] {directive)  (§  108.). 

t  Deut.  19: 6.  « Ruth  1 : 3. 


§  31]  BI  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  61 

2.a.[]pV,    ^:ib;    t^Tl;    E'Dh    (1:26);    ri^n    (2:14);    220 

);j"T  J"     T  J"    T  J"  |j..  J.. 

(2:11);  |ri"!  (1:17);  VSPi  (4:12);  jp)  (4:42);    J^^;;  (4:16); 
2p  (20  :  15) ;  12/lp_"i  (2:3);    ^^^i  (1:4);    |32fi  (3  :  24) ; 

J^ann^.  (3:8);  ■:] j?nnp  (3:8);  Ipl  (19  : 4) ;  2j?;^  (3 :  15) ; 
]^J2  (15:1);  ^njS?  (17:14);  dJet  (15:16);  yj?  (2:16);  DE^ 
(2:11);  n{<(l:l);  pa:7);  |3(4:25);  3^?;?  (1 :  H); 
-1|J?  (2  :  18) ;  -iBp  (5  : 1) ;  "la;  (6:5);  j-jj;  (2  : 8). 
b-  r\Dr\2  (1 :  24);  H^DJ  (1 :  27);  HOTin  (2  :  21);  32^  (Dt. 
28  :  28) ;  IJC^'  (1:8);  Ki:^_  (4  :  16) ;  2|2^)  (4  :  16)  for  3j2fi; 

i;T(4:i7)/<"-;;T: 

3.  a.  bi^J2  (1:18);    ^2^''  (2:2);  "laD"'  (2:21);    injbp  (32:11); 
"'n^P^,  (30  :  8) ;  DnJJ  (25  :  30) ;  p^^^^  i;  ^3  (1  :  30). 
6.  !inn(l:2);  !)n'3(l:2);    ■:]E^n(l:2);    -)p3(l:5);    Qr\p 
(2 :  12). 

c.  W\i  go-r'§(i^  TjipO';  T]13y 

2.  Tone-long ,  instead  of  short or ,  is  found: 

a.  In  a  closed  tone-syllable;  always,  except  in  a  few  monosyllabic 
particles.     Worthy  of  notice  is  its  occurrence, 

(1)  in  the  I^Cal  Perfect  of  many  stative  verbs  (§  64.  2),  and  in 
the  ]Kal  Active  Participle  (§  71.  1.  a); 

(2)  in  the  ^al  Imperfect  and  Imperative  of  )^^  (§  81.),  and 
of  verbs  originally  YQ  (§  83.); 

(3)  in  Nif'al,  Pi'el,  Hif'il  and  Hi^pa'el  forms  in  which  the  i, 
whence  e  comes,  was  originally  a  (§§  59.  1.  b,  60.  1.  6); 

(4)  in  many  monosyllabic  and  dissyllabic  nominal  formations; 

(5)  in  i-class  Segolates  (§  92.). 

b.  In  an  open  pretone  (or  ante-pretone)  syllable,  always  instead 
of  i,  as, 

(1)  in  nominal  formations; 

1  Lev.  13  :  3.  « Ex.  12  :  39.  » Num.  22  :  6.  <  2  Sam.  7  :  29. 


S2  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  33 

(2)  in   the  preformative  of   the   l^al   Impf.    of  I'B    verbs 
(§  83.  2.  a). 
3.  Tone-long  -*-  (6),  instead  of  -^,  is  found: 

a.  In  a  closed  tone-syllable.     Worthy  of  notice  is  its  occurrence, 

(1)  in  the  |fal  Infinitive  Construct,  Imperative,  and  Imper- 
fect (§  66.  R.  2); 

(2)  in  the  Jfal  Perfect  of  a  few  stative  verbs  (§  64.  3); 

(3)  in  a  few  nominal  forms  (§  93.  1.  c); 

b.  In  an  open  tone-syllable,  in  w-class  Segolates. 

c.  In  an  open  ^rdone-syllable. 

Note  1. — ^Tone-long  vowels  are  correctly  written  defectively;  in 
the  later  language  the  incorrect  full  writing  is  frequent. 

Note  2. — The  tone-long  vowel,  arising  from  the  rejection  of 
D&ges-forte  from  a  following  laryngeal,  is  unchangeable. 

32.    Reduced  Vowels 

1.  a.  n^bl'li  (1: 16) /rom  ^n'!^;    Hh^D  (1 :  16) /rom  ^l^'D; 

^pl-^;  from  i^r^- 
6.  nn^p-y^^  for  ur\''t;-^/,  onari? ;/<"•  nnnrv- 
c.  uvn  (4 :  25) /or  ij-|-n;  "n'Ti^j^-ii' /or  ?i"in'?K-a- 
2.  a.  ^n^^  d  :2)  for  nn\'-i;  laiic^"'  a  :20)  for  iiahE:'^  nbn 

t:it  jt-t  ::•  *         i    '  •:!•• 

(3  :  16)  for  n^H;  HJnJ  0  :  12)  for  n^Hi- 

J T       :  IT  JT      -    T 

b.  yipl  (1:20) /rom  ^^p"^;  >:iS   (1:2);    iJKf  (1:16);  IDT 

(4:10). 
c-  D"'pi?V  (4  :  10)  from  pj?2;  i;;;-ii  (3  :  5)  from  y-jr 

rf.  T]^Di<  (2  :  17);  DD^D^  (3:5);  T|bp  (3  :  10);  T|jha  (3  :  14); 
T]y-11  (3 :  15). 

Remark. — 2  originally  2;   7  orig.  7;  2  orig.  2;  1  orig.  ). 
3.  a.  n"inX(3:17);   D^lVx  (1:1);    Se/^  (1:7)";    HDnN  (2:6): 

T         -;  •         v:  V     -:  t      t  -: 

»  Ruth  1:8.  *  Ruth  2  :  16.  » Ruth  3  :  13.  « Ruth  1 :  2. 


§  32]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  53 

6-  nnpb  (2:23)  for  nni?^;  ^^E^';  ma^Ji^n';  .-nyoa.* 

c.  anil  (2:12);  ^nDH^I  (1:18);  HDE^I  (27:26);  "anpl.* 

A  short  vowel,  or  a  tone-long  vowel,  gives  way  to  §*w&,  either 
simple  or  compound,  when  it  would  stand  in  an  open  syllable  at  a 
distance  from  the  tone.  The  change  may  be  called  reduction  (§  36.  3). 
Reduced  vowels  are  found: 

1.  In  what  would  be  the  anf ^pr^ton^-syllable, 

a.  In  the  inflection  of  nouns  (§  36.  3.  6), 

b.  Before  the  grave  termination  in  the  inflection  of  verbs  (§  63 .  R.4) . 

c.  In  many  verbal  forms  to  which  a  pronominal  suffix  is  attached. 

2.  In  what  would  be  the  pr^tone-syllable, 

a.  In  the  inflection  of  verbs,  before  H »  1  and  ^ (§  36.  3.  o). 

b.  In  the  formation  of  the  construct  state  of  nouns  (sg.  and  pL). 

c.  In  the  nominal  inflection  of  participial  forms. 

d.  Before  the  suffixes  71,  DD  ^^^  P'  when  attached  to  nouns 
and  to  certain  verbal  forms. 

Remark. — In  many  particles  which  originally  had  __,  there  is 

found ,  but  before  the  tone  the  original  a  often  becomes (§§47, 

5;  49.  4). 

3.  The  simple  §«wa  (§9.  1)  may  represent  the  vowel-sound  of  any 
class.  But  the  compound  §*wa  (§  9.  2)  has  three  distinct  forms, 
one  for  each  class,  and  is  found: 

a.  Chiefly  under  laryngeal  (§  42.  3).     But  sometimes  also, 

b.  Under  a  letter  which  is,  or  should  be,  doubled. 

c.  Under  a  letter  preceded  by  the  prefix  ^. 

Note  1. — The  §'wa  under  a  laryngeal,  if  vocal,  must  be  compound 
§»wa;  since  a  simple  S'wa  standing  under  a  laryngeal  is  always  silent. 

Note  2. — The  Hatef  S*g61  never  appears  anywhere  but  under 
laryngeals. 

Note  3. — Simple  §*w&  is  always  vocal  (1)  at  the  beginning  of  a 
word,  (2)  under  a  consonant  with  d&geS-forte,  (3)  after  another  S*wft, 
except  in  the  case  of  a  final  consonant. 

*Zech.  4:12.  a  judg.  16  :  16.  <2Kgs.  2:1.  <P8.  55:22. 


54  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  34 

33.  The  A-Class  Vowels 

In  accordance  with  the  foregoing  statements  (§§  29-32.)  it  is  seen 
that  the  A-class  vowels  include: 

1.  The  pure  short  -^  (a). 

2.  The  attenuated  -^  (i),  arising  in  unaccented  closed,  and  especially 
sharpened,  syllables. 

3.  The  short  -7-  (e)  which  is  deflected  from  a,  either  with  or  with- 
out the  tone. 

4.  The  naturally  long  -?-  (a),  which  has  come  from  contraction  or 
from  compensative  lengthening,  or  from  a  lengthening  characteristic 
of  nominal  forms. 

5.  The  naturally  long  -^  (6),  which  has  come  by  rounding  from  a 
naturally  long  a. 

6.  The  tone-long  -7-  (&),  which  has  arisen  from  an  original  a  through 
the  influence  of  the  tone. 

7.  The  simple  -r  (*),  which  is  a  reduction  of  -^,  through  the  influ- 
ence of  the  tone. 

8.  The  compound  -=r  (*),  which  occurs  instead  of  -r  according  to 
the  usage  mentioned  in  §  32.  3.  a.  d. 

9.  The  naturally  long  ^___  {e)  which  is  probably  diphthongal  in 
character. 

34,  The  I' Class  Vowels 

In  accordance  with  the  foregoing  statements  (§§  29-32.)  it  is  seen 
that  the  I-class  vowels  include: 

1.  The  pure  short  -;:-  (i),  now  found  chiefly  in  unaccented  closed, 
and  especially  sharpened,  syllables. 

2.  The  deflected  -7-  (e),  found  in  unaccented  closed  syllables. 

3.  The  naturally  long  ^ (i),  from  iy,  see  a,  §  33.  3. 

4.  The  naturally  long  ^ (e),  which  is  diphthongal  in  its  character, 

coming,  as  it  always  does,  from  the  contraction  of  ai  or  ay. 

5.  The  tone-long  -tt-  (e),  which  has  come  from  an  original  -r-, 
through  the  influence  of  the  tone.' 

6.  The  simple  —  W,  cf.  §  33.  7. 

7.  The  compound  -tt  (®),  occurring  instead  of  ~t  chiefly  under 
laryngeals. 


§  36]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  65 

35.     The  U' Class  Vowels 

In  accordance  with  the  foregoing  statements  (§§  29-32.),  it  is 
seen  that  the  U-class  vowels  include: 

1.  The  pure  short  -v  (u),  now  found  chiefly  in  sharpened  syllables. 

2.  The  deflected  -?-  (6),  found  chiefly  in  unaccented  closed  sylla- 
bles. 

3.  The  naturally  long  )  (^),  from  uw;  and  see  k,  §  33.  3. 

4.  The  naturally  long  )  (6),  which  is  diphthongal  in  its  character, 
coming,  as  it  always  does,  from  the  contraction  of  au  or  aw.  [On  the 
6  rounded  from  a,  see  §  33.  4.] 

5.  The  tone-long  -^  (o),  which  has  arisen  from  an  original  -^, 
through  the  influence  of  the  tone. 

6.  The  simple  -r  O,  see  §  33.  7. 

7.  The  compound  -?r  (°),  occurring  instead  of  -t-  chiefly  under 
laryngeals. 

36,     Changes  of  Vowels 

1.  a.  np*1V  (16:2)/rom  Hpl^;  -llT  from  "inij  Y"1.i<  (1  =  24) 
from  y"lJSi;  *lDp  from  ISp- 
6.  Dnm    (15 : 1)  /rom   -131  •     ^J-IH     (4:25)    from    ^-\n: 

bi?pn,  hut  Dpn';  D\12^  (i^D  from  D"10E^;  ^Qp 

from  p^p. 

c.  iViS^p  for  I^EfO;  lanEf  (1 :21)  /or  ))i-0. 

d.  Xni' (1--1);  i^np^  (1:5);  n«1p  (17:19)  ^nK-l3;  (6:7). 
«•  D^D^  (1:6);  D^nty'  (1 :  17);  nOa^  (2:5);  nn«  (3  :  H). 

•   IT     T  'AT     T  AT      :      •  T  AT 

2  a.  ynC/  «>«<  =1^12^  (1:21);   bjikn  (2:16)  5«<  ^Dt^H  (3:1) 
for  I^Di^n;    lal.E^^    (1:20);    n^H    6«<   l-j^n   (3:16); 

jh(T  (for  ^')ni)but  imnn:  (4:8);  i::nn;:'  (4  =  14). 

6.  QIJs'Li  "IJB   a:2);    ^J^DI  but  i?1p-1   (1:20);    ^13   &"« 

Di^i3    (1:16);    -l1«D  but   n"1«P    (1:16);    n|?2   6«< 
1-1 1:;2  (2:23). 


■Deut.22:4. 


66  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  36 

In  the  formation  of  stems  and  the  inflection  of  words,  the  follow- 
ing vowel-changes  occur: 

1.  Tone-long  vowels  are  found, 

a.  Usually  when  in  nouns  an  original  short  vowel  comes  under 
the  tone,  either  in  open  or  closed  syllables. 

b.  When  a  short  vowel  would  stand  in  an  open  syllable  before 
the  tone.    This  is  characteristic  of  nominal  formations. 

c.  When  in  verbs  an  originally  ante-pretonic  short  vowel  be- 
comes pretonic,  in  an  open  syllable. 

d.  When  a  following  weak  consonant  becomes  quiescent. 

e.  When  an  originally  short  vowel  comes  to  stand  in  pause. 
Under  such  circumstances,  a  is  usually  rounded  to  &;  i  is  lowered 

to  e,  and  u  to  6  (see  §§  33-35.)- 

Note. — Cf.  German  alle,  but  English  dU. 

2.  Reduction  is  the  process  by  which  a  vowel  is  minimized  or  com- 
pressed to  its  smallest  proportions.  Cf.  heaven,  pronounced  hev*n, 
but  Anglo-Saxon  heofon;  even,  pronounced  ev'n,  but  Anglo-Saxon 
efen  and  ehhan;  also  the  initial  a  in  America  when  pronounced 
quickly.     This  process  takes  place, 

a.  When  an  ultimate  -=-  (a),  -r-  (i),  or  -^  (u)  in  the  inflection 
of  verbs  loses  the  tone;  as  when  personal  terminations  consisting  of  a 
vowel,  or  pronominal  suffixes  connected  by  a  vowel,  are  added. 

b.  When  a  penultimate  vowel,  in  the  inflection  of  nouns,  no  longer 
stands  immediately  before  the  tone,  as  in  the  formation  of  the  con- 
struct state,  when  terminations  of  gender  and  number  are  appended, 
and  when  pronominal  suffixes  are  added. 

Note  1. — Herein  consists  the  great  difference  between  verbal 
and  nominal  inflection,  that  in  verbal,  the  ultimate  vowel,  in  nominal, 
the  penultimate  vowel  is  changed. 

Note  2. — In  some  verbal  forms,  the  vowel  of  whose  ultima  is  un- 
changeable, the  penultimate  vowel  is  reduced. 

Note  3. — In  some  nominal  forms,  the  vowel  of  whose  penultima 
is  unchangeable,  the  ultimate  vowel  is  reduced. 

Note  4. — Only  vowels  standing  in  an  open  syllable  may  be  re- 
duced.    Naturally  long  vowels  are  never  reduced. 


J  36]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  87 

3.  a.  naK^I  (2  : 2)  originally  '^\  ^">"!]3n  but  ^"""lan  (1 :  18). 
h.  6Bp,  hit  b^\Th  E^-np  but  Efripi  (2:S);  r\2' but  "102-' 
.c.  Tl-imb"";    DD01    (9:5) /or  D301;  nni    (24: 30) /or 


4.  a.  lyen^  nbx  a =29) /or  nbi<;  6c2pn  /or  ^epni 


I      &•  ib^^jor  b^T.'  ^25j?j  /or  'pipy:;  b''^)}r\  m  bipvn]- 

c.  V-IX  (1:24);  2")^  (1:5);    E;Dn  (1:24);  Dm  (20:18). 

5.  m  («^<A).  -nX  (4:1);    "qnX  (e :  18);    DpJ^,  =  Dp^  =  Dp^^ 
(4 :  15). 

6.  a.  PirO^  (1:24) /or  nrO^. 

T      •    :  T  T       •    : 

6.  1,-111  (1 : 6)  for  «ini-|  =  wiy-hiy;  !)nn  (1 : 2)  for  inn  =  SShiiw. 

c.  r3  (1:4) /or  r2  =  bay(i)n;   I^D^  (1:11) /or  ^nT^bi  13 
(1 :  11)  /or  !|n3»  etc.,  etc. 

T 

d.  Dp  (from  Dp);  DipJ  (/ram  DpJ);  "jna  (/rom  bna); 

^ippn  (from  ^ppn). 

7.  ^CDlp/roTO^Qp;  ^Ina/romHa;  ">CDDle^ Aom  icdde'. 

8.  a.  j;ip-l3  (1 :  14);  mXO^  (1 :  15);  n^"13  (1 :  26). 
Wn=lDp  (1 :26);  nbx|?  (1 :  22) /or  ibx);  12}}^  (2:5); 

nn2.' 

•  t:   it 

I     ^-  i^IlI!  (4 : 8)  /9r  innH^  [n^Q:w  V  n^Bj^Ji- 

9.  a.  2"-|i;  (1:5);   y-)7  (1:11);    Di?B  (2:23);   n"!,?  (19:4);  !|n3 
(1:2). 

b-  ncnno  (i:2)  /or  nsnio;  h^e^dd  (i:16) /or  ri^2;po. 

c.  E^y'T  (I:  7) /or  E^^l;    3T  (1:22)  /or  3-|l;    p"!  (2:22) 

for  :3r 


»  Ex.  2  : 1.  *  Ruth  2:8.  » Ps.  2  :  7.  « Ps.  1 :  2. 

» Ezek.  20 :  5. 


68  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  36 

3.  Attenuation  is  a  thinning  of  -=-  (a)  to  -r-  (i).  It  is  the  same 
change  as  that  seen  in  sang,  sing  ;  tango,  attingo ;  and  in  master  which 
becomes  mister,  when  used  as  a  proclitic  title  {cf.  Oxford  Dictionary, 
s.  V.  Mr,).     It  takes  place, 

a.  In  closed  syllables  containing  preformatives:  as  in  the  Kal 
Imperfect,  the  Nif'al  and  Hif'il  Perfects. 

h.  In  sharpened  syllables:  as  in  the  Pi'el  Perfect,  and  various 
nominal  formations. 

c.  In  closed  syllables  which  have  lost  the  tone,  especially  in 
the  construct  plural  of  nouns  and  before  grave  suffixes. 

4.  Deflection  involves  a  change  of  quality  in  vowels,  whereby  a 
becomes  e,  i  becomes  e,  and  ii  becomes  6.  The  same  change  is  seen 
in  the  Greek  and  Latin  forms,  mihi  and  meiLS,  hulhus  and  ^oX^o^iy 
nummus  and  vofio^.     It  often  takes  place, 

a.  When  they  would  stand  in  an  unaccented  closed  syllable. 
h.  When  they  would  stand  before  a  laryngeal  with  §«wa. 
c.  When  a  stands  as  the  original  vowel  of  a  Segolate  form. 

5.  Original  short  vowels  usually  stand  unchanged  in  sharpened 
syllables. 

6.  Lengthening  (or  contraction)  takes  place, 

a.  When  two  similar  vowels,  generally  by  the  dropping  of  a 
consonant,  come  together. 

h.  When  a  vowel  and  a  semi-vowel  come  together;  \heni-\-y=\, 
u-^-w—^. 

c.  When  a  or  ^  is  followed  by  i  or  y,  or  by  ii  or  w;  then  a+i  or 
2/=e,  a-\-u  or  w—6. 

d.  As  characteristic  of  certain  verbal  and  nominal  forms. 

7.  Rounding  is  a  process  applied  not  only  in  producing  §-  from  a, 
but  also  in  changing  the  vowel  a  to  6.  The  same  change  is  seen  in 
the  Anglo-Saxon  ham,  hame,  or  haam  becoming  home  ;  stan,  becoming 
stone. 

8.  A  vocal  S^wa  must  always  be  followed  by  a  full  vowel,  rather 
than  by  another  §^wa.     Hence: 

a.  At  the  beginning  of  a  word,  an  original  short  vowel,  that 
ordinarily  is  reduced  to  §*wa,  will  remain  without  reduction  if  followed 
by  a  S*wa,  yielding  only  to  such  attenuation  or  deflection  as  may  be 


§  37]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  69 

necessary;   a  is  commonly  attenuated  to  i,  but  if  the  S*wS,  is  com- 
pound, the  short  vowel  is  assimilated  to  it. 

b.  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  where  a  compound  S*wa  stands  as 
helping-vowel  under  a  laryngeal,  when  inflectional  change  brings  a 
vocal  §*wa  immediately  after  the  compound  S^wa,  the  latter  in  every 
case  gives  place  to  the  corresponding  short  vowel  (or  a  deflection  of 
it)  as  helping- vowel. 

9.  When  two  vowelless  consonants  would  come  together  at  the 
end  of  a  word,  a  helping-vowel  is  usually  inserted  between  them  to 
aid  in  pronunciation.  The  helping-vowel  practically  constitutes  a 
new  syllable,  but  the  nature  of  the  vowel  treatment  in  many  cases 
shows  that  the  new  syllable  was  not  fully  recognized — (c/.  §  27.). 
This  helping-vowel  is  generally  e,  but  with  a  laryngeal  it  is  usually 

a,  with  ^ it  is  i,  and  with  ) it  is  generally  u.     The  most  common 

instances  of  this  are: 

a.  The  large  class  of  nouns  called  Segolates  (§  92.). 
h.  A  class  of  feminine  formations  resembling  Segolates. 

c.  Certain  short  verbal  forms  (§  85.  /). 

Note. — The  use  of  a  helping-vowel  is  common  in  carelessly 
spoken  English;  e.  g.,  elm  becomes  ellum;  prism=' prisum ;  film= 
fillum;  Henry=Henery;  athletic  =  atheletic,  etc. 

37.     Tables  of  Vowel-Changes 

The  following  tables  summarize  the  various  possible  vowel-changes: 

TABLE  I 

i-\-i  or  t+2/ =     i 

a-f-2/ =  ay 

a-\-i  or  a-\-y =  ^ 

a-\-y =  e 

a-\-a =  o 

a-\-a =  a 

a-\-w =  aw 

a+w  or  a-\-w =  6 

u-\-u  or  u-\-w =  ^ 


60 


ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW 


(§38 


TABLE  II 

original  a  attenuated  to  i  which  then  is  treated 

^^  like  an  original i 

original  a  retained  as a 

^^'^^^^^^  original  a  rounded  to & 

original  a  deflected  to e 

original  a  reduced  to • 

original  a  reduced  to • 

•fi      original  i  deflected  to e 

I      original  i  retained  as i 

t-^ -S      original  i  lowered  to e 

original  i  reduced  to • 

original  i  reduced  to • 

•6       original  u  deflected  to 6 

original  u  retained  as , u 

M^ 5       original  u  lowered  to 6 

original  u  reduced  to • 

original  u  reduced  to ® 

38.    Pause 

1.  Wp2n\  (2:25);    )m^i   (7:11);   rp):i^2  (3:17);    ?[ni^X 

(3:17). 

2.  D^Sn(l:2);    n^^^  (1:5);   n^DX(3:ll);   nOaM2:5);   y^] 

•  IT    —  T   :at  t   :    it     t  at    :    •  ~at 

(1:29) /or;;-)!  (=^1]):  ban  (4:2) /or  ^3n  (  =  ^3n). 

3.  nn«  (3: 11) /or  nn«;  ""DiX  (3 :10) /or  13 j«. 

T    AT  JT      -  •     J       T  J*  IT 

4.  n^On  (2:17);  hut  riD"!  (11:28);  and  plb'^l  (5:5,  8,  11,  14,  17, 

•        T  T    <T-  I      T- 

etc.). 

The  pause  at  the  end  of  a  verse  or  clause,  indicated  by  the  more 
powerful  accents  (§23.  3),  causes  certain  changes: 

1.  §*wa  yields  to  its  original  vowel,  and  this,  if  short,  undergoes  the 
customary  tonal  change  and  is  accented. 


§  38J  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  61 

Note. — ^The  S*wa  standing  before  the  suflSx  T],  yields  to  its 
original-^,  which  becomes  t  (§  30.  5). 

2.  A  short  vowel  becomes  tone-long.    The  -=-  in  Segolates  in  pause 
becomes  -7-. 

3.  The  tone  is  frequently  shifted  from  the  ultima  to  the  penult. 

4.  The  tone  which,  in  short  forms,  is  on  the  penult  is  given  to  the 
ultima. 


VII.    Euphony  of  Consonants 

39.     Assimilation 

1-  nnnp  (i-Vfor  nnn"p;  -b^D  (2:2) /or  -b2-]Q;  ni^ti 

(2:8). 

jn-i  (1:17)  for  jnr;  ns";  (2:7) /or  npr;  y©^  (2:8) /or  ycjr- 
2.  n2ipvor-i2nnp;  ^in^n  (35:2);  nn^js  (2:21) /or  nnnt^. 

3.  n|T  (2 :  15) /or  np^^  n|T.  (18:4);  pji«  ^or  pjfX. 

Remark.-in:pl2;';  yii^n-jP  (2:6);  ''nDm(6:7); '^DJ^.^ 

Assimilation  of  the  final  consonant  of  a  closed  syllable  to  the  initial 
consonant  of  the  following  syllable  takes  place: 

1.  In  the  case  of  the  weak  J,  of  the  preposition  |0  (§  48.  1),  and  of 
the  first  radical  of  verbs  Y'Q  (§  81.)- 

Note. — This  is  a  very  common  thing  in  English,  e.  g.  irresistible 
for  inresistible,  illegible  for  inlegible. 

2.  In  the  case  of  p  of  pf^  (§  59.  5.  b)  and  rarely  of  ^. 

Note. — Cf.  attract  for  adtract;  attest  for  adtest;  annotate  for 
adnotate;  appropriate  for  adpropriate. 

3.  In  the  case  of  7  in  Hp/  ^0  fa/ce  (§  84.  g)  and  *)  in  a  few  ^"3 
verbs  (§  83.). 

Remark. — The  letter  J  is  not  assimilated  when  it  stands  (1)  in 
an  accented  syllable,  or  (2)  before  a  laryngeal  (except  n)>  or  (3)  after 
the  preposition  7. 

Note. — Assimilation  is  indicated  by  a  Dages-forte  in  the  following 
)  consonant,  which,  however,  is  rejected  from  final  consonants  (§  14. 1). 

40,    Rejection 

1-  a.  nn(J)  (4:12);    nn|'p6)  (4:11);    -^^fd)  (19:9);    mt^i}) 
(4:7). 
b.  n?b(^)  (11:31);  nVlO)  (2:9);  }310)  (20:7);  n-!^(^)  (4:2). 


1  Num.  7  :  89.  2  Isa.  44  :  3.  «  Ex.  25  :  8.  *  Num.  14  :  3. 

62 


§  41]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  63 

c.  IJnj  (42: 11)  for  !|:nj>^;  ^3X'  probably  for  ^3«a. 

2.  11^5^  (1:5) /or  ']'\mb;  ^2^  (1:7) /or  H>T.- 

3.  inp^J^  (42:20)  6«(  pniDP  (3:3);  ^iri  (2: 10) /or  llfj. 

The  consonants  most  liable  to  rejection  are  the  laryngeals  J^  and 
n,  the  dentals  7  and  J,  and  the  vowel-letters  )  and  ^.  These  are 
often  rejected: 

1.  From  the  beginning  of  a  word  when  there  is  no  vowel  beneath  to 
sustain  them, 

a.  In  the  case  of  J  of  verbs  V'Q  (§  81.)  and  of  7  in  Hn^  in 

the  K^al  Imv.  and  Infinitive  Construct. 

b.  In  the  case  of  T  or  ^  of  verbs  YQ  in  the  same  forms. 

c.  In  a  few  isolated  cases. 

2.  From  the  middle  of  a  word  when  preceded  only  by  a  §'w&. 

3.  From  the  end  of  a  word,  by  ordinary  attrition,  as  in  the  case  of 

)  of  the  plural  ending  )'];  and  of  a  final  ^  in  verbs  H"!?  (§  85.). 

Note  1. — On  the  rejection  of  J«5  and  n>  see  also  §  43. 
Note  2. — On  the  rejection  of  T  and  ^,  see  also  §  44. 

41.    Addition,  Transposition,  Commutation 

1.  ^_1-|f  and  j;;1-|i{<i';  ni3]4<^  '?3ti^«'^;  pnx-' 

2.  -isniz^n'/or-isE^nn;  ninnc'y /<»•  niqE^n:- 

3.  a.  p^ean ' /or  p^anri;  ■T|Dan"'/or-i»vnn- 

6.  iaM2:8)/or-|yi;  D^p^/orDIp;  ">1E':;'Vo01E':;- 

1.  The  addition  of  a  letter  sometimes  takes  place  at  the  beginning 
of  a  word  to  avoid  harshness  in  pronunciation,  as  in  the  case  of 

^,  called  prosthetic,  when  used  in  the  formation  of  nouns. 

2.  The  transposition  of  letters,  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  prov- 
ince of  the  lexicon,  occurs  in  the  grammar  only  in  the  case  of  p  of 
the  Hi^pa'el  of  verbs  when  it  would  stand  before  a  sibilant  fricative. 


1  Ex.  3  :  2.         2  Ex.  6:6.  '  Jer.  32  :  21.         *  Lev.  2  :  2. 

6  Gen.  14  :  13.      «  Deut.  23  :  19.       »  Mic.  6  :  16.         «  Gen.  22  :  6. 
»  Gen.  44  :  16.      w  Josh.  9  :  12.        "  Ruth  4:7.         »  Ex.  3  :  16. 


64  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  42 

3.  The  commutation  of  letters,  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the  prov- 
ince of  the  lexicon,  occurs  in  the  grammar  in  the  case  of 
a.  n  ^^^  EO  in  the  Hi^pa'el  stem. 
h.  )  and  "i  in  YQ,  middle-vowel  and  n"^  forms  (see  §  44. 1.  a — e). 

42,     The  Peculiarities  of  Laryngeals 

1.  a.  rjirnn  (1:7);    HDIXn    (1  =  25);    T^'^n  (1:22);    n«ini 

'^      I    •       T  IT  T        T   -:    IT  I     '^      T  V         Tl"     J 

(1:9). 

6.  nsrn.o(i:2);  xinn  (2:12);  n'nn  (i:2i);  ■r\pnnix-A); 

2.  o.  N-i;n_  (1:4);    rb^^  (2:6);    i^^)    (2:5);    HC'^J    (1:26); 

-njj?1(2:24).'    ■' 
6.  nS:  (2:7);  ^^5^  (2:8);  nm\{2:9i;  ^T  (4:25);  [nC)p]. 

c.  iDn:  (2:9);  pm"!  (41:56);  ^nn';  "i:m2;;n-' 

d.  nn  (1:2);  yipn  (1:6);  j;nip  (1:11);  ;;-l_t  (1:29);  ^p'\ 
(1:15). 

3.  a.  n^J<5^'/ro™S&'al&;  □^i^X  (1:1) /'•<"" 'Hah; ''Vn*/'-OTO  toll. 

T    -;  IT  •        v:  ♦    t: 

I.  iaj;  (2:5);   niE'i;  (2:4);   nbK  (1:22);   PIVH  (2:18);   c/. 

n;ini(i2:2). 

HE'W  (1:26);  H  V  (2:6);  HE'yX  (2:18);  rt^yQ';  6D]?n]. 

V    ^:i-  V  ^:  I-  V  ^-i  IV  ;••  ^:  it  -  ^:it 

Remark8.-ri32/"'.  (2:2)  6«< -21,S;M2:24);  IDHJ  (2:9);  imniT 

/<"•  iniSn"'  (4:8);  TiD^n' »"<* rnD;/n'6"«  mD:s?ni"' 

J"    :-:•-  d'  ^:iv  r     :j-^:iv  jt     :  -'^ti-  : 

The  laryngeals,  in  the  order  of  their  strength  beginning  with  the 
weakest,  are  t^,  y,  H*  H-  1  shares  some  of  their  characteristics. 
They  have  the  following  peculiarities: 

1.  They  refuse  to  be  doubled  (i.  e.,  to  receive  DigeS-forte).  But 
here  a  distinction  must  be  made  between, 

a.  i^  and  *^,  which  entirely  reject  the  doubling,  and  require  a 
strengthening  of  the  preceding  vowel  (§  36.  2.  6);  and 


»  Deut.  23  :  23.  « Isa.  43  :  24.  « Ex.  3  :  22.  «  Deut.  28  :  61. 

»  Ruth  2: 12.  « Niim.  5  :  18, 30.  '  Ps.  31 :  9.  « Num.  3  :  6;  8  :  la 


§  42]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  65 

^'  J/>  n*  ^^^  n»  of  which  y  sometimes,  H  and  H  nearly  al- 
ways, receive  a  so-called  D^ge§-f6rte  implied,  and  allow  a  preceding 
vowel  to  remain  short. 

2.  They  take,  particularly  before  them,  the  a-vowels;  hence, 

o.  The  vowel  -=-  (a)  is  chosen  instead  of  -r-  (i)  or  -5-  (e),  es- 
pecially when  a  was  the  original  vowel. 

b.  The  vowel  -^  (a)  is  chosen  instead  of  -^  (e)  or  ~  (6),  es- 
pecially when  a  was  a  collateral  form. 

c.  The  vowel  -7-  (e),  arising  by  deflection  from  S,  is  chosen  for 
the  sake  of  dissimilarity. 

d.  The  vowel  -=-  steals  in  between  a  heterogeneous  long  vowel  and 
a  final  laryngeal  as  an  aid  in  pronunciation.  This  -=-  is  called  Pa^alj- 
furtive;  it  is  a  mere  transition-sound  and  does  not  make  a  syllable. 
It  disappears  when  the  laryngeal  ceases  to  be  final. 

Note  1. — The  letter  "^  (1)  does  not  receive  D&ge§-f6rte,  and  (2) 
often  shows  a  preference  for  -^,  and  is  consequently  frequently  classed 
for  convenience  with  the  laryngeals. 

Note  2. — A  final  {<  is  not  a  consonant,  nor  is  final  n*  unless  it 
contain  M&pp%  (§  16.  1). 

3.  They  have  a  decided  preference  for  compound  S*wa.    Hence 
there  is  found  under  laryngeals, 

a.  A  compound  §*wa,  rather  than  a  simple  S'wd,  in  the  place  of 
an  original  vowel;  and  in  this  case  the  compound  S'wa  of  the  class 
to  which  the  original  vowel  belonged,  is  used. 

h.  An  inserted  compound  §'w&  for  facilitating  the  pronunciation; 
and  here, 

(1)  an  initial  laryngeal  takes  -=r,  except  in  the  case  of  {<,  and 

of   n   and   n   in   the   verbs   n^H    and   n^H*   which 
prefer  -rj-; 

(2)  a  medial  laryngeal  takes  that  §«wa  which  corresponds  to 

the  preceding  vowel. 

Remark  1. — ^Thus  where  in  strong  forms  there  is  found  a  silent 
S*w&,  in  laryngeal  forms  there  is  usually  found  a  compound  S'wa  as 
a  helping-vowel,  which  does  not  affect  the  syllabification. 

Remark  2. — ^Under  the  strong  laryngeals,  especially  H*  the  use 


66  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  43 

of  the  compound  S*wa  for  the  facilitation  of  pronunciation  is  not  so 
general. 

Remark  3. — ^When  a  compound  §'wa  would  stand  before  a  sim- 
ple §'wa,  the  former  always  gives  way  to  a  vowel  (§  36.). 

Remark  4. — The  combination  -^r  tt  often  yields  to  -^  -p-,  when 
removed  to  a  distance  from  the  tone. 

43.     The  Weakness  of  i^  and  H 

1.  a,  K-J3  (1:1);  ^^nj^n  (1:5);  J^yln  (1:24). 

h.  n^£^«n   (1:1)  for  r\^p^y   D"'2/Xn  (2:10)  for  U'^p^y. 
n«1p^  (15:10) /or  HX^pj?;  ^DK^  (1:22) /or  nb«); 
D%i^K3  (3:5) /or  D%i^X3;  ^m^  (1:3) /or  ^^H\ 
Remarks.-K-1'il  (1:4);  «Qn>;   ^DK  (3: 12) /or  ^P««;   n^Ef^' 

for  n''E'«-i.. 

2.  a.  -|lN5>a:5)/ornlKn^;   "qS^n^  (1:5) /or  "^E^nH^;    Dl^3 

(1^8). 
6-  ^1T  (1:7) /or  ^"IDiT;  HXin  (1:9) /or  nj^inn. 

c.  irp^  (1:11)  /or  inrp^;    13  (1:11) /or  !|n3;    In'K  (2:3) 
/or^ni^lK. 

The  letters  5<5  and  H*  being  exceedingly  weak,  not  only  occasion 
change,  but  likewise  suffer  change: 

1.  t^  loses  its  consonantal  power  and  is  said  to  quiesce  or  to  be  silent, 
a.  Always,  when  it  stands  at  the  end  of  a  word;  here  belong  all 
forms  of  a  ^'^^  character. 

h.  Often,  when  it  stands  in  the  middle  of  a  word;  then, 

(1)  a  preceding  vowelless  consonant  receives  its  vowel; 

(2)  or,  it  loses  its  compound  S*wa  after  a  preceding  vowel. 

The  S'w4  disappears  as  soon  as  ^  quiesces  and  the  pre- 
ceding short  vowel  is  strengthened  in  compensation  for 
the  loss  of  the  {<. 
Remark  1. — A  final  J^,  preceded  by  a  simple  S*w&  is  otiose. 

»  Deut.  16  :  9.  « Deut.  11 :  12. 


§  44]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  67 

Remark  2. — ^A  quiescent  X  is  frequently  elided  from  the  middle 
of  a  word. 

2.  The  consonant  H  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  always  distinguished 
from  the  vowel-letter  H  by  the  presence  of  a  Mappik  (§  16.  1).  But 
on  account  of  its  weakness  it  is  often  entirely  lost, 

o.  In  the  case  of  the  article  after  an  inseparable  preposition 
(§  47.  4). 

b.  In  Hif'il,  Hof'al  and  Hi^pa'el  verbal  forms  after  a  preforma- 
tive  of  gender  or  person. 

c.  From  between  two  vowels,  which  then  contract. 

Note. — ^The  H  of  r\/  verbs  and  nouns  (§  85.)  is  always  a 
vowel-letter  and  has  no  connection  with  the  H  here  considered. 

44.    The  Weakness  of  )  and  '^ 

1.  a.  1^^  (4:23)  for  ^h)  {of,  ^^1  11:30);   yjj^  [c/.  22^^  (4:16)] 

V  JV  VJV  T     T  -      T  V  J" 

-      T 

h.  Dup':  n^^n?'  ^  of.  j;^inn  (45:i). 

d.  |E?"i^  (2:21) /or  |e?V;  lif^.  (2:7)  for  -|aV- 

2.  a.  r\'!r}.  (3:22)  /or  ^11;    J^Ji  (8:16)  for  i^yl;    {<<i;i  (4: 16) /or 

6.  ^^"I  (2:10)=Uyl;  n^r  (2:6)=ya'«l«. 
npE^n  (2:6)=liiSlf&;  n\T  (l:29)=yihyl. 


IT   : 


The  semi-vowels,  or  vowel-consonants,  *)  and  ^,  occasion  a  very 
large  number  of  changes: 

1.  Commutation  of  1  into  ^  takes  place , 

a.  Almost  always  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  the  exceptions 
being  very  few. 

h.  Frequently  in  the  Pi'el  of  middle-vowel  verbs,  and  generally 
in  T'B  verbs  after  HH  ^^  *^®  Hi^pa'el. 


»  Ruth  4:  7.  «Num.  1:18.  lEx.  3:16.  «I>eu(.  8:13. 


68  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBBEW  [§  44 

c.  Whenever  it  is  retained  as  the  third  radical  in  verbs  H"  A 
both  when  final  and  when  medial  (§  85.  3). 

d.  When  it  would  follow  i  in  a  closed  syllable,  as  in  the  ^f al  Im- 
perfect of  verbs  YQ  which  have  a  ^"Q  treatment  (§  83.)' 

2.  Elision  takes  place, 

a.  Of  an  initial  )  when  supported  only  by  S*wa,  as  in  certain 
YQ  Infs  Construct  and  Imv's  (§  83.);  and  also  when  in  the  ^fal 
Impf.  the  ),  following  i,  does  not  go  over  to  ^,  according  tol.  d  above. 

6.  Of  a  final  )  and  ^  in  verbs  called  H' /*  ^^  original  vowel  fol- 
lowing them  having  been  previously  lost;  in  this  case  the  vowel  pre- 
ceding, nearly  always  a,  is  rounded  to  ^  in  Perfects,  and  becomes  S  in 
Imperfects  and  Participles  (see  for  details,  §  85.). 

3.  o.  VnlJ  (41:21);   i^alH  (1:")  M  Xairi;  a"iE)"'n  (4:7)  for 

nrl'i^n';  T]"'^^n  (3: 14) /or  bay-ySy-ka;  ?jlBK  (3:19). 
6.  npV.  (6:14)  =''s«/or  l^^j  I^Q  (1:2)  =p«n6 /or  "IJS. 
c.  lD)n' for  lD)n:   jE^I^  (.2:21)  for  p^^  =  pT;  "ly^";  (2:7) 
for  "la-il. 

4.  a.  p!)  (1:4);  !|t^^p!|  (1:22);  nlpD^I  (1:10);  nDpJI  (1:27). 

b.  !inn  (1:2) /or  inn;  inn?':  ds : 2) /or  inne':  (ninn?':).' 

c.  V:^:3r2^Vform^T\-;  VSX  (2:7) /or  m^SX;  VJS5  (4:5). 

5.  a.  n^l  (4:26);  ^Ti  (4:1);   n^l  (4:18);  "Ufl  (2:8);  Up'"  (1:9); 

ln'31  (1:2). 
^-  "^It^i^^;  ^lil^;  see  also  the  cases  under  4.  c,  above. 
e.  nbr  (4:18);  niH  (3:20);  ^T\)b^-' 

••    T  •  T  -  •   :  J-  T 

3.  Contraction  takes  place, 

a.  Of  vowelless  T  or  ^  with  a  preceding  &,  as 

(1)  in  the  V'B  Nif'al  and  Hif'il  (§  83.),  and  the  "^'Q  ffif'il 
(§84.2); 


1  Deut.  1 :  44.  « Ezra  3  :  11. 

>  In  these  cases  a  helping is  inserted  (i  39.  m).  *  Deut.  1 :  17. 

» Ex.  3 ;  16.  ^      •  Deut.  4:7.  » Job  3  :  26. 


{  44j  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  69 

(2)  before  nJ  in  H*'/  Imperfects  and  Imv's,  and  before  ?J 
and  n  111  plural  of  nouns  (§  30.  5);  here  ay  gives  ^__  (^). 
5.  Of  final  T  or  *!  with  a  preceding  a,  in  forms  that  are  closely 
tied  to  the  following  word,  as 

(1)  in  the  Imperative  of  verbs  n"/  (§  85.  1./); 

(2)  in  the  Construct  plural  ending  ^__  {=ay)(%  111.  3.  6). 

c.  Of  1  or  ^  with  a  preceding  w  or  i  respectively,  when  a  con- 
sonant follows,  as  in  the  X'Q  Hoph'al  (§  83.  3.  c),  and  in  the  ^al  Impf. 
of  VB  and  ^''B  verbs. 

4.  Vocalization  qf)to)  takes  place, 

a.  At  the  beginning  of  a  word  in  the  case  of  the  conjunction  ) 
(§  49.  2). 

b.  At  the  end  of  a  word,  whenever  )  would  be  preceded  by  a 
consonant,  as 

(1)  in  the  case  of  r\'b  (or  Y^)  Segolates  (§  92.  2.  c); 

(2)  in  certain  short  forms  of  the  imperfect.     But 

c.  The  reverse  takes  place,  viz.,  change  of  )  to  ),  especially  in 
the  case  of  the  suflSx  J|n*  when  it  is  attached 

(1)  to  verbal  forms  ending  in  a  vowel,  and 

(2)  to  the  plural  ending  used  before  suffixes,  viz.,  *'.^,  of 
which,  however,  the  ^  is  lost  (being  only  orthographically 
retained),  and  the  a  rounded  to  ^  (§  111.)  as  an  assimila- 
tion to  the  ). 

5.  The  consonantal  force  of  ^  or  "^  is  retained, 

a.  When  as  radicals  they  stand  at  the  beginning  of  syllables. 

b.  When  a  heterogeneous  vowel,  except  a,  precedes. 

c.  When  they  would  receive  D&geS-forte  (§  83.),  and  in  a  few 
exceptional  cases. 


PART  SECOND-ETYMOLOGY 


VIII.    Inseparable  Particles 

45.     The  Article 

1.  D^ot^n  (1:1);  D^sn  (1:2);  ^E?'3^^  (i:9);  D1^^  (i:i4); 

•j-T-  'IT-  TT 

2.  T]2/nn  (1:4);  .THn  (1:21);  J^lnn  (2:12);  rj^HH  (2:14). 

3.  yn^jn  (1:1);  3;^p"]n  (1:7);  r^^^ri  (1:22). 

4.  inn';  pinn';  onnn';  ]\^n-* 


T    T     IV  •   T     IV  I     ^  IV 


Remark  i.-nn^:iDn'  for  rii^-W'  ^nJi<^^' ^n^nx^^. 

Remark  Z-yni^n   (1:1) /or  yn^StH;    "inH^or  ^(111;    D^H' 

/or  Dj;n. 

Remark  3.-nlJ<^    (1:5)    for    nlJ^H  +  b;      'T]a^n^    (1:5)    /or 

^nn  +  b- 


1.  The  usual  form  of  the  Article  is  (^  with  a  D^ges-forte  in  the 
following  letter ♦f^ 

2.  Before  the  strong  laryngeals    H  ^i^^l  H  which  may  be 
doubled  by  implication  (§  42.  1.  6),  it  is PI 

3.  Before  the  weak  laryngeal  ^  and  before  *^,  and  generally 
before  y,  which  cannot  be  doubled  (§  42.  1.  a),  -=-  is  rounded 

to  ~ r? 

4.  Before  T],  and  before  an  unaccented  H,  V,  the  -^^  is  de- 

T  T  't 

fleeted  to  -7-  (e)  for  the  sake  of  dissimilarity p| 

Remark  1. — ^The  D&ges-forte  of  the  Article  may  of  course  be 

omitted  from  vowelless  consonants  (§  14.  2). 

Remark  2. — ^The  words  for  earth,  mountain,  people  irregularly 

change  their  vowel  after  the  Article. 

Remark  3. — ^The  H  oi  the  Article  is  elided  after  the  prepositions 

3>  3>  /  (§  43.  2.  a)  and  the  vowel  is  given  to  the  preposition. 

1 1  Kgs.  8 :  65.  » Num.  13 :  18.  »  Gen.  7 :  19.  « 1  Sam,  25 :  24. 

•  Ex.  1  :  19.  •  Ex.  1 :  22.  »  Ex.  3  :  12.  «  Gen.  14  :  16. 

73 


74  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  47 

46.    He  Interrogative 

1-  n^DX---  Yi?n-|Dn  (3:ii);  id:«  ■'nK  -lofc^n  (4:9). 

2.  ■'e^"'H-nx  "qnnp.  cypn  (30:i5);  -rj^  "'nx'ipi  -^b^n 

T 

3.  n»xn';  nn\in';  nVr  hje^  nxD  pVn  a7:i7). 

-TV  T    :iT      V  ••    T  •  T    T  T    ••         )   V    :      - 

In  direct,  and  likewise  indirect,  interrogation,  a  particle  is  used 
called  He  Interrogative: 

1.  It  is  usually  written  with  H^tef  Pa^ah f| 

2.  Before  vowelless  consonants,  and  laryngeals,  it  is  written  H 

3.  Before  laryngeals  with  -t-,  it  is  written  (§  31.  2.  c) ^ 

while  rarely,  especially  with  letters  which  have  simple  S'wa,  it  is 

written  with  D§,ge§-f6rte  separative  (§  15.  4) *J^ 

Note. — Frequently  no  sign  of  interrogation  appears;  then  the 
context  must  be  depended  upon  to  reveal  the  interrogative  character 
of  the  statement. 

47.     The  Inseparable  Prepositions 

1-  n^£'«*1.3  (1:1);  "I^lna  (1:6);  iJip^  (1:11);  Hnn^  (1:14). 

2.  3;"'p13  (1:14);  ril'li^db  (1:15);  b^T2b  (1:18);    WniD13 

(1:26). 

3.  r\)tvb  (2:3);  -JDj;^  (2:5);  iO^^/or  "^mb  (1:22);  nnS-* 

^.,-  ^:  I-  ••  v:iv  •  t:  IT 

4.  -\'\i^b  (1:5);    •;]2^n^   (1:5);    J?">pn^   (1:7);    HE'i:!^   (1:10); 

Dl"?  (1:18). 

5.  D''6^  (1:6);  DD^  (1:29);  n^nV  (3:22). 

•  IT     T  V     T  "^  J-  T 

Remark  l.-^Jl^^b  (18:30,32);  D^^bx^  (3:5);  D^^!:>«b  (17:7, 

8). 
Remark  2. — nlH^  /  (4:3)  for  ''j'nX^;  proper  writing  niH^/- 

Three   prepositions,   3,   3,  7,  are  always  prefixed  to  the  words 


1  Ex.  2  :  7.  « Job  34  :  31.  » Joel  1:2.  *  Ex.  11 :  8. 


§  48]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  75 

which  they  govern.    Their  vowel  was,  originally,  -=-;  but  now  they 
are  found  written: 

1.  Ordinarily,  with  simple  S^wa  reduced  from  a -r 

2.  Before  consonants  having  simple  §*wa,  with  i  attenuated 
from  a -^ 

3.  Before  laryngeals  having  compound  S^wa,  with  the  corre- 
sponding short  vowel -^,  -v-,  -r-  (o) 

4.  Before  the  Article,  with  the  vowel  of  the  Article. .  .  .  ^  or  -?-  (S.) 

5.  Before  a  tone-syllable,  sometimes  with  tone-long t-  (^) 

Remark  1.— The  {<  of  "^  j^^  Lord  and  D^ibi<  God  loses  its 
consonantal  force  after  the  prepositions  (§  43.  1.  6). 

Remark  2. — ^The  word  niH^j  which  is  written  nlH^*  ^'  ^-f  ^^ 

T       : 

the  vowels  of  ^JHi*^,  rather  than  niH^   ^s  it  should  be  written, 
appears  with  the  preposition  as  nlil^?  (^o  be  pronounced  ^J^J^^). 

T  -  T  - 

Note  1. — ^The  original  -=-  of  the  prepositions  is  usually  reduced 
to  T",  or  rounded  to  -r-  (&) ;  it  is  retained  before  laryngeals  with  -=r, 
but  assimilated  to  -7-  before  -^,  and  to  -r-  (6)  before  -tt- 

Note  2. — ^For  prepositions  with  pronominal  suffixes,  see  §51.3, 4. 

48.     The  Preposition  VQ 

1.  Y1^0"1P  (^•^)'  r^nnp/^^  nnn-]p  (i:7);  Dnj?a  (2:8) 
for  Dnj^;|p. 

2.  Y^np  (6:14);  hVJ^  (1:7) /or  ^y_-|p;  £;>{<a  (2:23) /or  2;>«-|p. 

The  preposition  VQ  from,  is  really  the  construct  state  of  an  ancient 
noun  and  is  written  separately,  chiefly  before  the  Article;  elsewhere 
it  is  prefixed  and  appears: 

1.  Usually  with  its  J  assimilated  (§  39.  1) P 

2.  Before  pj.  rarely  with  D^ges-forte  implied  (§  42.  1.  I;) p 

but  before  other  laryngeals,  with  -r-  lowered  (§  36.  2.  6) p 

Note. — On  the  form  of  |^  before  pronominal  suffixes,  see  §  51.  5. 


76  EtEMBNTS  OF  HEBEEW  [|  49 

49.     Wdw  Coniunctive 

1.  n«i  (1:1);  yiKni  (i:2);  r^prib]  (1=5);  d"';i2^)  (1=14); 

D^DE^I  (2:4). 

•J-  T    : 

2.  p51  (1:4);    MfhD^  (1:22);    rj1i?D1  (1:26);    HIpP^I    (MO); 

n2pJ1  (1:27). 

t|"I 

3.  ne?:?!  (24:12);  n\-11  (12:2) /or  n%TI;  Dn"'E'jn';  "'JW  (6:17). 

4.  intn  (1:2);  E'D-ll  (1:24);  i}'])  (2:9);  1J1  (4:12). 

The  conjunction  and,  originally  \  is  now  found  written: 

1.  Ordinarily  with  simple  §«wa  (§  32.  2.  R.) ) 

2.  Before  3^  D»  D  (§  ^^'  4),  and  vowelless  consonants ^ 

3.  Before  laryngeals  having  compound  S^wa,  with  the  corre^ 
sponding  short  vowel -»-,  -7-,  -r-  (6) 

4.  Before  a  tone-syllable,  sometimes  with  tone-long -r-  (§31. 
l.c) (&) 

Note  1.— 1  with  \n^  gives  %n*>1  (1:6). 

Note  2. — On  ♦I,  the  strengthened  form  of  ),  which  is  called  WSw 
Conversive  and  is  used  with  the  Imperfect,  see  §  73. 

i  Deut.  4  :  6.  16.  23.  25. 


IX.    Pronouns 

50.    The  Personal  Pronoun 

1.  The  following  are  the  forms  of  the  Personal  Pronoun: 
He  Kin  They  (m.)  DH.  nSH 

She        i^^n  They  (f.)    |n,  nlh 

Thou(Ta.)r\m  Ye(,m.)  Qm 

Thou  a.)    m  Ye(t.)    |:?K,  mns 

2.  The  following  are  pausal  forms : 

•AT  -AT  T  AT  T    -  :at  -: 

3.  The  following  remarks  on  the  forms  of  the  Pronouns  are  to  be 
noted: 

^«  N^  n  *^^  ^^  written  {^^  j^  in  the  Pentateuch,  except  eleven  times. 

b.  r]P\a  ihou  (m.)  is  written  five  times  defectively  p\H* 

T     -  T     - 

c.  pj<  thou  (f.)  was  originally  ''Ht^  or    PRJ^;    seven  times 

.  -  .  -  I    .  _ 

5*^iv  has  ''nX*  which  would  be  pronounced  atti. 

^'  ^Ji^  ^  (c-)  is  more  common  than  the  longer  form  ^2 j{<» 

•   -:  'IT 

e.  njin  ihey  (f.)  is  more  common  than  JH*  ^^i^  latter  occurring 

TJ-  I    " 

only  with  prefixes. 

/•  \P\ii  y^  (f-)  occurs  but  once/  HJOi^j  but  four  times.^ 

g.  ^yny^  we  is  the  usual  form,  ^^Hi  occurring  but  six  times,' 

and  a  form  1J><  but  once> 

Note  1, — ^The  H —  which  appears  in  several  of  the  forms  was 
perhaps  originally  demonstrative,  but  has  lost  its  force. 

Note  2. — The  following  comparative  table  of  the  personal  Pro- 
nouns in  the  more  important  Semitic  languages  will  be  of  interest: 


»Ezek.  34:31.  « Gen.  31:6;  Ezek.  13:11,20;  34:17. 

•Gen.  42:11;  Ex.  16:7,8;  Num.  32:32;  2  Sam.  17:12;  Lam.  3:42. 
«Jer.42:6(e:*«iv). 

77 


78 


ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW 


[§51 


Arabic. 

Assyrian. 

Aramaic. 

Hebrew. 

huwa 

su 

><in 

n^n 

hiya 

U 

«\1 

«M 

anta 
anti 

atta 
atti 

m  or  nj>^ 

ana 

anaku 

wi< 

^DJX 

hum 

§unu      isn^  p3tit,  |ten 

nn.  nan 

hunna 

§ina 

r^«'  pjix 

)      •                     T  J" 

antum 
antunna 

attuna 
attina 

ym 

nahnu 

anini 

i^^n:^ 

ijn:«,  i:nj 

Note  3. — We  may  note  here  also  the  expression  ^J0^{<  ^J /S^ 
equivalent  to  a  certain  one,  and  used  as  an  indefinite  pronoun.^ 


51.    Pronominal  Suffixes 

Tabular  View 


Separate  Forms. 


2  3 

With  PN.        With  3  and  ^ 


4.  5. 

With  3.       With  ID. 


Singular 

3  m.  !in  ]m         13         iniD3  i-isp 

?]DP 

2f.   ^  ^nx        ^3 ^sp 

ic.  vor^i  ^nx         I?  ijip3  ^fpp 

Plural 


3  m.  onorD  Dnn^ii.Dnx  dhs,  d3  dhs.  DniD3  dhd 

3f.    jHorj  jnn^.jnx     "jns  '    n|n3  ]np 

2  m.  D3                 DDnX         DD3  D33,  D3l03  D3D 

2^-  p      — -     m  ■'—  pp 

ic-    1J              =ijn«        U3  !iJlD3  yoD 


>  C/.  Euth  4 ;  1;  2  Kgs.  6  :  8. 


§  51]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  79 

When  a  pronoun  is  to  be  governed  by  a  verb,  a  noun  or  a  preposition, 
a  shortened  form  must  be  used: 

1.  The  "  separate  forms,"  given  above,  are  the  fragments  of  the  pro- 
nouns which  are  thus  used.  They  are  attached  directly  to  nominal 
and  verbal  forms  ending  in  a  vowel,  but  a  so-called  connecting-vowel 
is  employed  with  forms  ending  in  a  consonant. 

a.  The  suffixes  Q^*  J?'  DH  and  JH  always  receive  the  accent 
and  are  termed  heavy;  all  others  are  light. 

h.  ^ is  used  with  nouns;  ^J  with  verbs. 

c.  Qn  and  JH  are  used  with  nouns  in  both  singular  and  plural, 
but  chiefly  with  the  plural;  Q  and  1  are  used  with  verbs  and  singular 
nouns. 

Note. — On  the  union  of  verbs  with  suffixes,  see  §  74.;  on  the 
union  of  nouns  with  suffixes,  see  §§  112,  113. 

2.  When  for  any  reason  it  is  impossible,  or  undesirable,  to  attach 
the  suffix  directly  to  a  governing  verb,  it  may  be  written  in  connec- 
tion with  J^{^,  the  sign  of  the  definite  accusative,  which,  however, 
except  before  Q^,  assumes  the  form  f^^  or  n1i<  i^o9). 

3.  The  prepositions  3  and  7  restore  and  round  their  original  -=- 
before  the  suffixes  (except  ^ and  Ti) ;  this  vowel 

a.  Contracts  with  IH  and  forms  )  (6),  the  H  falling  out  and  k 
contracting  with  H;  with  H  the  final  a  is  dropped,  the  a  of  the  preposi- 
tion is  rounded  to  &,  and  H  is  preserved  as  a  consonant  with  mappik, 
the  resulting  form  being  T^-r-;  but  elsewhere, 

b.  It  appears  as  k  either  before  or  under  the  tone. 

Note. — While  either  Q3  or  QHS  D^ay  be  used,  only  QH  /  is 

T  V      T  V    T 

found. 

4.  Between  the  preposition  3  and  the  suffixes,  there  is  generally 
found  an  inserted  syllable  )Q.  This  syllable  is  found  in  poetry  also 
after  2  and  7  (but  not  when  suffixes  are  added). 

5.  The  preposition  JQ  before  most  of  the  suffixes  takes  a  special 
form;  in  some  cases, 

a.  The  final  J  is  assimilated:  Tjpp  for  ^^BD;  ">^rpD  for 
"•JJBO;  1-1»D  {from  us)  for  !|33SO.  ^" 

•  :  At      •  4K       *  8  J  V      • 


80  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  53 

b.  The  consonant  of  the  suffix  is  assimilated  backwards  and  rep- 
resented in  y.    !|J|3D  (from  him)  for  )r\iDD',  HiirSD  M  nJ?3D. 

Note  1.— The  —  in  ^IJiaO,  etc.,  is  deflected  from  -r-  (§  29.  4). 

Note  2. — Many  variant  forms,  besides  those  given,  are  found, 
especially  in  poetry. 

52,    The  Demonstrative  Pronoun 

1.  n\  this  (m.)  I     n^t  this  (f.)  nb^  (^^t)  ^Ae^^  (m.  or  f.) 

1  nt  A)  this  (f.)       r  DH  or  rirpn  those  (m.) 

2.  i^)r\  that  (m.)        ^5^"-|  <Aa<  (f.)      I      fn  or  nVn  those  (f.) 

1.  a.  ni;  c/.  ^)  rounded  from  {>^t- 

T 

^-  ni<T  =z6'^,  for  za'^  (§  30.  6),  i.  e.,  ^]  with  feminine  ending 
f^,  c/.  the  shorter  forms  ]],  Ht- 

^'  n /X  has  Diges-forte  firmative;  y^  occurs  only  eight  times, 
and  then  always  in  the  Pentateuch  and  with  the  article. 

2.  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person  are  used  as  remote 
demonstratives. 

8.  The  forms  r\)vn  {masc),  -ll^n  ifem.),  and  t^H  (w(wc.  and 

VT       -  "       -  T      - 

fern.),  this,  represent  a  stronger  demonstrative,  appearing  only  in 
the  singular.  They  are  not  commonly  used, — the  first  occurring 
twice,^  the  second,  once,^  the  third  seven  times.' 

53.     The  Relative  Particle 

1-  *lty"N  '^ho,  which,  that, 
2.  f\^,  sometimes  *^, 

3.  )i 

1.  The  more  frequent  relative  was  originally  a  noun  in  the  con- 
struct state  meaning  place: 

a.  It  is  indeclinable. 

b.  It  is  really  a  mere  sign  of  relation,  indicating  the  presence  of 
some  kind  of  a  subordinate  clause,  the  precise  nature  of  which  is  in- 
dicated by  other  words,  or  by  the  general  context. 

»  Gen.  24  :  65:  37  :  19.  « Ezek.  36  :  35. 

» Judg.  6  :  20;  1  Sam.  14  :  1 ;  17  :  26;  2  Kgs.  4  :  25;  23  :  17;  Dan.  8  :  16;  Zech.  2  : 8. 


§  54]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  81 

2.  ♦£f,  or  ♦£?  is  in  no  way  connected  with  1Ef{<,  but  is  a  distinct 
pronoun.     It  is  found: 

a.  Exclusively  in  the  Song  of  Songs,  and  frequently  in  Ecclesiastes. 
h.  Occasionally  in  other  books,  as  Judges,  2  Kings,  1  Chronicles, 
Job,  and  the  later  Psalms. 

3.  1]  is  in  reality  a  demonstrative  {cf.  ^]);  but  its  chief  use  is  as  a 
relative  {cf.  the  similar  usage  of  the  English  that,  Greek  6s,  etc.).  It 
is  indeclinable. 

S4,     The  Interrogative  Pronoun 

1.  ^D  who?    no  y^^oif 

T 

2.  a.  >A'\!^''-r\^  (2 :  19);  ni^mO  (3 :  13);  lOE^-flO  (Ex.  3  :  13). 

h.  '>T\mn  np  (3i:36);  wn-H!?';  K\n-nD.' 
c.  rh^-nii';  Dn"'K"i  hd^  d^onin  na  (21:29). 
d-  n^E'v  no  (4:10);  inNcn-no  (20:9);  Hn-no-' 

1.  'JQ  refers  to  persons;  nO»  to  things. 

T 

2.  no  is  variously  pointed,  according 'to  the  character  of  the  con- 

T 

sonant  which  follows: 

a.  Before  consonants  which  can  be  doubled,  it  is ♦HD 

6.  Before  strong  laryngeals  (H  and  H)*  it  is HD 

c.  Before  weak  laryngeals  (J^,  U,  and  *^)  it  is HD 

d.  Before  laryngeals  with  -r-,  it  is j^Q 

Note  1. — ^The  D&geS-forte  following  HD  is  compensative  (§  15. 1), 
arising  from  the  assimilation  of  H  which  was  a  consonant. 

Note  2. — The  forms  HD  and  HQ  are  sometimes  found  before 

r 

other  letters  than  laryngeals. 

Note  3. — In  the  majority  of  cases  HD  is  connected  with  the  fol- 

T 

lowing  word  by  Makkef,  and  with  HT  often  forms  a  single  word,  H^D* 

V  - 

Note  4. — By  means  of  ^{<  {where  f)  prefixed  to  the  demonstra- 
tive ni  or  ni^t>  another  interrogative  is  formed.® 


» Num.  16  :  11.  t  Num.  13  :  18.  •  Zech.  1:9.  « Judg.  9  :  48. 

•  Ps.  39  :  6.  •  Cf.  Jer.  6  :  7;  Ecdes.  11:6;  1  Kgs.  13  :  12. 


X.    The  Verb 

55,    Roots 

1.  Xna  (1:1);  ^^"IDP  (1:6)  from  HS;    "^^Hnp  (3:8)  from 

")S-I;    "•nb-'pn   (9:17)  from  Qp;    ^2^  (2:3);    TDOn 
(2:5)  /rom  "ItJD;    njHjpBn  (3:7)  from  HpD- 

2.  X"12  (1:1)    he   created;   n2E^    (2:3)  he  rested;   np^    (2:22) 

T  T  -      T  I   ~  "^ 

he  took, 
rhn  (3:8)  he  walked;  yQ\j^  (3:17)  he  heard;   npS   (3:7)  A^ 
opened, 

3.  HID  (3:4)  to  die,  HO  ^^  <^^e<^;  D^^E^  (2:8)  to  put,  QE?  Ae  put. 

All  words  are  derived  from  so-called  roots;  concerning  these  it  may 
be  noted: 

1.  While  there  are  a  very  few  roots  of  four  letters,  most  Hebrew 
roots  consist  of  three  or  two  letters,  called  radicals. 

2.  The  root  is  generally  pronounced  with  the  vowels  of  the  third 
person  singular  masculine  of  the  Perfect  tense  (§  57.  3.  N.  1),  this 
being  the  simplest  of  all  verbal  forms. 

3.  Biliteral  roots  of  the  middle-vowel  classes  are  commonly  pro- 
nounced with  the  vowel  of  the  infinitive  construct. 

Note  1. — The  root  is  not  in  itself  a  word;  it  exists  solely  in  the 
mind  of  the  philologist.     i<12  is  a  root,  but  the  word  is  J5^2- 

T    T 

Note  2. — Many  of  the  roots  now  appearing  to  be  triliteral,  were 
once  biliterals;   their  triliteral  forms  are  a  later  development. 

Note  3. — ^For  many  words  there  has  as  yet  been  found  no  root. 

56.     Classes  of  Verbs 

1.  o.  natS^  (2:3);  p3"ri  (2:24);  ^E^D  (1:18);  ^12  (1:4);  ^ID 

(2:3). 

82 


§  57]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVB  METHOD  83 

b.  31^  (2:24);  Jin  (4:8);   r|n-1  (1:2);   J/ni  (1:11);   Tih^ 

(3:22). 

c.  mj  (1:17);  "la^  (2:7);  ^13  (1:1);  nJ3  (Lam.  3:5). 

|-T  -T  TT  TT 

2.  a.  330  (2:11);   b^n:(4:26);  pn  (33:5);  ^^^3  (29:3). 
6.  mo  (3:4);   p3';   Dip  (13:17);    D''fe'^.  (30:42). 

Verbal  roots  vary  in  inflection  according  to  the  number  and  nature 
of  the  consonants  of  which  they  are  composed.  They  are  therefore 
classified  as: 

1.  Triliteral,  when  composed  of  three  consonants.  These  again 
subdivide  into  three  classes: 

a.  Strong  verbs,  i.  e.,  those  containing  no  consonant  which  will 
in  any  way  affect  the  vowels  usually  employed  in  a  given  inflection. 

h.  Laryngeal  verbs,  i.  e.,  those  containing  one  or  more  laryngeals, 
which  involve  certain  variations  in  vocalization  from  the  so-called 
strong  verb. 

c.  Weak  verbs,  i.  e.,  those  containing  one  or  more  consonants 

which  may  suffer  assimilation  (J ),  contraction  and  elision  (1 and 

^ ),  or  quiescence  (^ ).     Such  changes   in   the   consonants,  of 

course,  affect  the  vowels  seriously. 

2.  Biliteralf  when  composed  of  two  consonants.  These  subdivide 
into  two  classes: 

a.  The  so-called  'dym-doubled  {))")))  verbs,  in  which  the  con- 
sonantal element  of  the  root  is  emphasized  in  inflection. 

h.  The  middle-vowel  verbs,  in  which  the  vowel-element  is  empha- 
sized. 

57.    Inflection 

1.  a.  Kn2  (1:1)  from  J^^D;    DS^  (18:33)  from  3E^;    20  (Deut. 

T   T  T 

2:3)  from  2D- 
h.  E^'-np^t  (2:3)  from  ^^p-,     np_^    (3:23)  from  Hp^;    ^^\ 
(4:26)  from  ^^^  33lD  (2:13)  from  3D- 


Prov.  23 : 1, 


84  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  58 

c.  J|npDi1  (3:5) /rom  HpD;  TCDOn  (2:5) /rom  ^CDD;  ^^1 
(4:26)  /rom  ^^H;  H^E^Ii  (Jer.  6:8)  /rom  3ef\ 

T   AT 

2.  nSE^''   (2:2)  he  mU  rest;    T^VDE^  (3:10)   I  heard;    ^^^"^^ 

:    •  •     :  J-    T  :  IT 

(1:21)    <^y    swarmed;     O^^J^     (3:11)     Aa«f    ^^w     ecrfenf 

T    ;    IT    T 

ninpSni  (3:7)  they  were  openM;  ^iQ"!  (17:12);  K2"'^  (4:3). 

3.  inilfl''  (4:8)  he  vnU  kiU  him;  Hi^DJ^P  (3: 17)  thouahalt  eatit. 

w      :  -  I*  Tjv  -;  • 

The  inflection  of  a  verb  includes  three  things: 

1.  The  formation  of  verb-stems,  of  which  there  are, 

a.  The  simple  verb-stem,  generally  identical  with  the  root. 
h.  Verb-stems  formed  by  strengthening  the  simple  root  in  vari- 
ous ways,  especially  by  doubling  or  repetition  of  one  or  more  radicals, 
c.  Verb-stems  formed  by  the  use  of  jprefixes. 

2.  The  addition  to  the  verb-stem  of  affixes  and  prefixes  for  the  in- 
dication of  tense  or  mood,  person,  number,  gender. 

3.  The  various  changes  of  the  verbal  forms,  which  take  place  when 
pronominal  suffixes  are  attached  as  objects. 

Note  1. — ^The  Hebrew  verb  has  for  each  stem  (1)  a  Perfect  tense, 
which  indicates  finished  or  completed  action,  (2)  an  Imperfect,  which 
indicates  unfinished  action,  (3)  an  Imperative  (except  in  Passive 
stems),  (4)  two  Infinitives,  and  (5)  a  Participle. 

Note  2. — ^The  Perfect  and  Imperfect,  which  may  be  called  tenses, 
are  inflected  to  distinguish  number,  person,  and  gender. 

Note  3. — The  Imperative  is  used  only  in  the  second  person, 
masculine  and  feminine,  singular  and  plural. 

S8,     The  Verb-Stems 

1-  TSy^  (2:3);  X-)-3  (1:1);  HD"^  (3:22);  2Ef«;  ^^  (11:9)- 

-T  TT  ]~         ^  T-T 

2.  6cDpJ];  n2Di^  JlDJ  (41:32);  3DJ^  n32i';  ^DE^J  y^oich 

one's  self;  tOB^f J  go  to  law  one  with  another. 


« Jer.  30  :  18.  » 2  Sam.  6  :  20.  » Num.  34  : 4.  « 1  Kgs.  6  :  7. 


§  58]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  86 

3.  6E)p];    na-l    (12:4);    {^jpO^    H^   (18:33);    rj-j2    (24:1); 
*1D7  learn;   H^^  ieocA;    Zf^ilJ  ^oo<;    E^*1E^  uproot, 

4.  6Dp];  1J5S';  xnp'i  "^130';  npj' *«'<"'^'-  n^b^ewas 

taken. 

5.  6''ppn];  Tpen  (39:5);  pMnn";  D''pn';  2pn-' 

6.  6Bpn];  ipsn';  "^^tpn';  n^n";  "s^^E^n" 

7.  62spnn];  ■^i'nnn  (6:9);  aa^jni  (6:6);  isnE^K." 
pieaj  (44: 16) /orphan:;  iK3T"/o'-i«3'nn^;  nnon" 

I      IT  -    :   •  I      IT  -    :  •  s     -  •  :     -   :    •  -:  it    • 

for  nnenn- 

~:  IT    :    • 

There  are  in  common  use  seven  verb-stems,  each  representing  a 
different  aspect  or  development  of  the  primary  meaning  of  the  verb. 

1.  The  simple  verb-stem  is  called  Kdl  (^p),  i.  e.,  light,  since  it 
presents  the  verb  in  its  simplest  form,  not  encumbered  with  the  addi- 
tions characteristic  of  the  other  stems. 

2.  a.  The  Passive  of  the  ^al  stem  is  called  Nifdl. 

Note. — In  all  stems  other  than  the  !^al,  the  stem  name  is  formed 
from  the  paradigm-verb  used  by  the  Arabic  and  the  Jewish  gram- 
marians, viz.,  7i^S;  thus  the  name  of  this  stem  =  /^^DJ- 

b.  The  formal  characteristic  of  this  stem  is  the  prefixed  J. 

c.  The  meaning  of  the  stem  is  usually  passive,  but  it  occurs  also 
with  its  original  reflexive  force,  and  sometimes  as  reciprocal. 

3.  a.  The  intensive  active  stem  is  called  Ptel  (triliteral)  or  Polel 
(biliteral). 

b.  The  formal  characteristic  of  this  stem  is  the  doubling  or  repe- 
tition of  the  second  radical  of  the  root. 

c.  The  stem  is  used  as  an  intensive  of  the  J^al,  and  expresses 
various  shades  of  meaning  such  as  (1)  intensity,  (2)  repetition,  (3) 

» Ex.  35  :  35.  «  Ex.  38  :  21.  » Isa.  48  :  8.  « Num.  22  :  6. 

•Judg.  7:8.  'Josh.  4:9.  »2Kgs.  16:18.  'Jer.  6:6. 

•  Dan.  9:1.  »  josh.  9  :  24.  »  Dan.  8 :  11.  »» Ps.  18 :  24. 

"Job  5: 4.  MEzr.  6:20. 


80  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§58 

causation,  and  (4)  a  privative  idea,  in  the  case  of  Pi'els  from  nominal 
forms. 

4.  a.  The  intensive  passive  stem  is  called  Pudl  (triliteral)   or 
Polal  (biliteral). 

6.  The  formal  characteristic  of  this  root  is  the  doubling  or  repe- 
tition of  the  second  radical,  with  u  or  6  under  the  first  radical. 

c.  The  regular  usage  of  this  stem  is  as  a  passive  of  the  Pi'el; 
but  sometimes  it  serves  as  passive  of  the  !^al. 

5.  o.  The  active  causative  stem  is  called  Hifil. 

b.  The  formal  characteristic  of  this  stem  is  the  prefix  H* 

which  undergoes  modification  in  inflection. 

c.  This  stem  serves  as  a  causative  of  the  J^al. 

6.  a.  The  passive  causative  stem  is  called  Hofdl. 

b.  The  formal  characteristic  is  the  prefix  n>  which  under- 
goes change  in  inflection. 

c.  The  usage  of  this  stem  is  as  a  passive  of  the  Hif'tl. 

7.  a.  The  intensive  reflexive  stem  is  called  HWpd^eL 

b.  The  formal  characteristic  of  this  stem  is  the  prefix  pj*], 

joined  to  the  Pi'el  stem. 

c.  This  stem  is  used  primarily  as  a  reflexive  of  the  Pi'el  stem; 
but  it  occurs  also  with  (1)  a  reciprocal,  (2)  a  passive  force,  and  (3) 
the  force  of  the  indirect  Greek  middle. 

Note. — ^The  n  ^^  ^^^  prefix  is  always  transposed  when  it  would 
stand  before  D>  £^  or  {jf;  it  is  transposed  and  partly  assimilated,  be- 
coming tD,  when  before  Jf;   and  it  is  completely  assimilated  before 


XL    The  Triliteral  Verb 

A.     THE  STRONG  VERB 

59,     General  View  of  the  Triliteral  Verb-Stems 

TABLE 


Original 
Form. 


Form  appearing 
in  the  Perfect. 


Name. 


Force.  Characteristics. 


1.     h^p, 

2.  ^!P|!5J 

3.  ^Bp 

4.  ^ISp 

7.  bsDnn 


bop 

b©p 

bsDnn 


l^al 


Nifal 


H-51 


Pu'al 


Hifil 


Hofal 


Hi^a'el 


Simple  Root 

None 

meaning 

Reflexive, 

Reciprocal, 

2 

Passive 

Intensive 
Active 

D&g5§.f6rte 
in  2d  radical 

f  Intensive 
\  Passive 

D&geS-forte 
and-T- 

Causative 
Active 

n  (n) 

Causative 
Passive 

r\  (0) 

Reflexive, 
Reciprocal 

nn  and 
D&ge§-f6rte 

REMARKS 

1.  An  original  penultimate  -=-  is  attenuated  to  -^,  in  Nif'al,  K'el, 
and  Hif'tl. 

2.  An  ultimate  -:-  is  lowered  to  -:r-,  in  some  Pi'el,  Hif 'il  and  Hl^pa'el 
forms. 

3.  An  ultimate  -r-  is  anomalously  lengthened  to  ^ ,  in  some 

Hif'il  forms. 

4.  An  original  penultimate  -s-  is  deflected  to  ~  (6)  in  the  HSf^. 

87 


88  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  60 

NOTES* 

1.  Only  6  verbs  out  of  about  1400  have  all  seven  stems,  viz.:  J?p3, 

nbh  nbn  i;^^  ^^^  nps. 

TT  TT  -T  "T  I"* 

2.  379  verbs  are  found  in  ^fSl  only;  40  in  Nif'al  only;  68  in  Pi'el 
only;  11  in  Pu'al  only;  58  in  Hif'il  only;  6  in  Hof'al  only;  19  in 
Hi^pa'el  only. 

3.  In  all,  1090  verbs  have  a  J^U  stem;  433,  a  Nif'Sl  stem;  405,  a 
Pi'el  stem;  188,  a  Pu'al  stem;  503,  a  Hif'il  stem;  104,  a  Hof'al  stem; 
177,  a  Hi^pa'el  stem. 

60.    The  J^&l  Perfect  {Active) 
TABULAR  VIEW 

1.  He  killed  ^COp  the  simple  verb-stem. 

-  I T 

2.  Shs  killed  H^Dp  ==  ^Kp  with  n_  (originally  H— ), 

T      :    |lT  -    |t  t 

the  usual  feminine  sign. 

3.  Thou  (m,)  killedst      P^JDp  =  7C0p  with    p\;    cf.     the    pronoun 

nnx  t^n  (m.). 

T      - 

4.  Thou  (f.)  kiUedst       n^DD  =  ^COP  with  p;  c/.  the  pronoun  pX 

:  :    -  I T  -  J  r  :  :    - 

thou  (f.). 

b.IMUed  "^nb^P  =  ^QP  with  "Jr^,   the  affix  of    1st 

person  in  all  Perfects. 

6.  They  killed  ibCDp  =  /Dp  with  J|,  the  usual  plural  sign 

with  verbs. 

7.  Ye  (m.)  H/e(f         DnbCOP  =  bCOP  with  Qpl;    c/.  the  pronoun 

V  :     -  J:  -   |r 

8.  Ye  {I)  killed  |n^Cp  ==  ^Dp  with   jp;    c/.   the  pronoun 
%  We  killed  IJ^IDp  =  ^tpp  with   JjJ;    c/.    the    pronoun 


Yoimg's  Introduction  to  Hebrew,  pp.  16,  17. 


§  61]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  89 

REMARKS 

1.  The  pronominal  elements  used  in  the  inflection  of  the  Perfect 
are  always  o/-fixed  to  the  stem. 

2.  The  inflection  of  the  verb  exhibits  distinctions  for  number,  per- 
son and  gender.  Special  forms  for  the  feminine  occur  in  the  2d  and 
3d  person  sing.,  and  in  the  2d  person  plur. 

3.  a.  The  original  vowels  of  the  ^al  Perfect  are  a — a  (?COp)- 

In  the  form  7C0D»  the  a  under  the  tone  remains  unchanged,  while 

-  h 
the  a  in  the  open  syllable  before  the  tone  is  rounded  to  a.    The  same 

vowel  change  takes  place  in  forms  3,  4,  5  and  9. 

h.  In  forms  2  and  6,  the  vowel-terminations  H {—she)  and 

!)  {—they)  draw  the  preceding  consonant  away  from  the  ultimate 
vowel  (a)  of  the  stem;  the  change  of  this  vowel  to  S'wa  follows  (§  36. 3) 
and  the  a  of  the  preceding  syl.  being  now  immediately  before  the 
tone-syl.  is  rounded  to  a. 

c.  The  heavy  terminations  QR  (=2/^  (m.))  and  |J][)  {—ye  (f.)) 
carry  the  tone;  the  a  in  the  final  syl.  of  the  stem  is  retained  unchanged 
in  the  closed  unaccented  syllable;  while  the  a  of  the  open  ante- 
penult is  reduced  to  §«wa  (§  36.  3.  N.  2). 

61,     The  K&l  Perfect  (Stative) 

[For  the  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  B.J 
TABULAR  VIEW 

3   m.  sg.  3  f.  sg.  3  c.  pi.  2  m.  pi.  1  c.  pi. 

Middle  A  ^ipp  r\b:2p^  ib^p^  ^^^^p.  iJ^5?i? 
Middle  E  ViDp  rhpp^  =ibDj;5  Dph^p  iJ^Dp 
Middle  o    hbp^     n^Dp,     i^Dp,     QJ!>)!?R     i^^^j? 

1.  p31  (2:24);  ))i'\^  (1:21);  UPW^^  (42:22);  inVOE^  (3:10). 

2.  ]pl  (18:12);   l^JpT  (18:13);    IDS  (12:10);    ni23  (18:20); 

maS';    lE^T";    nnX  (37:3),  btU  ^nX  (27:9);    i2nK 

T  I"     T  I"    T  -       T  I"      T  I       ••     -: 

(44:20). 
>  Judg.  20  :  34.  •  Joel  1:12. 


90  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  62 

3.  by  (32:26);  !)^DV;  in^^l  (30:8);  ""WbD  (32:11);  in^iEf 

T  AT  •:jT  •:J|T  'tWT 

(43:14). 

Certain  verbs  expressive  of  physical  or  mental  states  of  being  are 
called  stative  verbs.  They  show  some  characteristic  forms  in  inflec- 
tion. 

1.  Stative  verbs  with  ^-  under  the  second  radical  of  the  Jfal  stem 
are  inflected  in  the  manner  described  in  the  preceding  section  (§  60.). 

2.  Verbs  with  -^  (lowered  from  -r-)  under  the  second  radical,  do 
not  differ  from  those  with  -^  in  the  inflection  of  the  Perfect,  except 
that  the  -^  appears 

a.  in  the  Perfect  3  masc.  sing.,  and 

b.  when  restored  in  pause  (§  38.  1),  or  before  the  tone. 

3.  Verbs  with  -^  (lowered  from  -c-)  under  the  second  radical  re- 
tain the  o  whenever  the  tone  would  rest  upon  it,  and  in  pause. 

62,     The  Remaining  Perfects 

[For  the  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  B.] 
TABULAR  VIEW  OF  IMPORTANT  FORMS 

3  m.  sg.  3  f.  sg.  3  c.  pi,  2  m.  pi.  1  c.  pi. 

Piei     ^ipp2    rh^p     )b^p     DPi^Bp     )ibpp, 
ffi^aei  bspnn  n^cppnn  )b^pnn  on^ispnn  iJ^^pnn 
Hifii    ^ippn  rh-'^pn  )b''^pr\  DphQpn   iJ^Qj^n 

1.  a.  noi^'J';  <"nnpy;  inpDJ  (3:5);  DniDE^r;  ^^')2iy 

b.  -1^1  (4:26);  nib^  (24:15);  n^*"* -(6:1);  DmV"";  "TnH' 


»  Ex.  8  :  14.  » Or  h^^.  » 2  Sam.  20  :  10.  « Num.  5  :  13. 

•  Deut.  2:4.  •  Mai.  3  :  13.  » Jer.  22  :  26.  •  Jer.  20  :  14. 


§  63]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  91 

0.  ip^n';  niDH^  D^e^n';  nD^e^n*;  ^nnaE^n-' 

2.  a.  -15"!  (44:2);  nn31.  (39:19);  n21  (45:15);  Dni?!-' 

6-  -E^^pnn';  lE^'ipnn';  DriE^ipnn';  ^nb^annv" 
c.  -)''c?pn  (2:5);  nnnDH";  iiTian";  ''ripsi'"'"' 

Of  the  remaining  Perfects,  it  will  be  noticed  that 

1.  Three  follow  entirely  the  inflection  of  the  J^al  Perfect,  viz., 

a.  The  Nifal  (bW}  f^om  bW})- 

b.  The  Pu'al  (bw}- 

c.  The  Hofal  (^COpn*  also  sometimes  ^COpH). 

2.  Three  present  slight  variations  from  the  inflection  of  the  |f  al,  viz., 

a.  The    Pi'el    (^©H    and    ^©H,   from    blDp),  in  which  -— 
appears  in  the  ultima  before  terminations  beginning  with  a  consonant. 

b.  The  Hi^a'el  (/©pnH  <^^^  72Dpnn)>  in  which,  also,  a 
appears,  but  sometimes  i  is  retained. 

c.  The  Hif'il  (b^^^Dn,  anomalous  for  ^tDpH,  from  ^ppH), 
in  which, 

(1)  before  the  vowel-terminations  H^f"  and  ^,  the  anomalous 
i  is  retained  and  accented;  while 

(2)  before  terminations  beginning  with  a  consonant,  ^=-  every- 
where appears. 

63,     The  l^di  Imperfect  (Active) 
TABULAR  VIEW 

1.  He  will  kill  bbp^>  for    b^V\  (with  \). 

2.  She  will  kill  ^bpO^  for  /ppH'  R  ^^^  nsual  sign  of  the 

feminine,  here  prefixed. 

» Lev.  5  :  23.  »  Joel  1:9.  » Jer.  22  :  28.  <  Isa.  14  :  19. 

» Jer.  8  :  21.  «  Ex.  12  :  32.  '  Isa.  30  :  29.  »  Num.  11  :  18. 

•  Lev.  11  :  44.  "  Ezek.  38  :  23.  "  Lev.  26  :  22.  12  Deut,  25  :  1. 

"  Jer.  13  :  11.  "  1  Kgs.  3:7. 


92  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§63 

3.  Thm  (m.)  wilt  kill       ^bpFl^  for  ^^p^^  T\    being  a  pronom. 

root  of  2d  pers.,  c/. 
nn{<  thou  (m.). 

T       - 

4.  f Aow  (f.)  wilt  kill       ^hWT\y  for  ^^pn   (with   R   as  above), 

andV  (</.  5<^"l  «^«) 
used  as  a  sign  of  fern. ; 
cf.  "Jp^i  thou  (f.). 

5.  /  *W/  kill  hbV^.  for  ^CDPJ<,  with  {<;  cj.  'J^jj^  /. 

6.  They  {m.)  will  kill        1^p|T»  for    ^Cp^   (with  Vee above), and 

^,  the  usual  plur.  end- 
ing of  verbs. 

7.  They  (f.)  mW  H/     r\:hW7\^  for  ^CDpn   (with  n  as  above), 

and  nj;  c/.  n^n 
a^i/  (f-).' 

8.  Fe  (m.)  m7/  Hi  I^IppR^  for  ^^JpH   (with  p   as  above), 

and  \  the  usual  plur. 
ending  of  verbs. 

9.  Ye  (f.)  wUl  kill        T\^'WV\y  for  h^pT\   (with   H    as   above), 

'and  nj;  c/.  n^m 

10.  FF«  jrAaW  kill  ^bpl  for   i?EDpl  with  1  a  pronominal 

root;  cf.  ^jnJ  ^^• 

REMARKS 

1.  The  pronominal  elements  employed  in  the  inflection  of  the 
Imperfect  are  not  so  clearly  recognized  as  in  the  Perfect;  they  are 

a.  Pre-fixes:    \     R,     ^,     H,     ^,    \     p,     P,     p,    J,    in 
all  of  which  -=-  is  attenuated  to  -r-,  but  under  ^  is  deflected  to 

-(6). 

h.  ^/-fixes:     -,    -,    -,    1^    -;     \    n^,    \    n^,    — 

» >jiK  is  found  In  K«Mv  seven  times  for  nw  thou  (t). 


§  64]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  93 

2.  a.  The  stem  of  the  Imperfect  is  7JDp*  whence  comes  ^tOp 
through  the  influence  of  the]  tone.     C/.  Arabic  yaktvl. 

The  original  form  of  the  Impf .  stem  was  kutvl,  and  the  same  stem 
forms  the  basis  of  the  Imperative  and  Infinitive  Construct  forms. 
When  the  preformative  of  the  Impf.  was  added,  it  naturally  drew  to 
itself  a  secondary  tone,  and  so  the  u  of  the  following  syllable  was 
easily  lost  (c/.  business,  pronounced  biz-ness).  It  reappears  in  cer- 
tain forms  of  the  Infinitive  Construct  and  Imperative. 

b.  The  6  is  often  written  fully  {));  but  this  must  be  regarded 
as  an  error,  since  it  is  a  tone-long  vowel. 

c.  When  /bp^  and  similar  forms  are  connected  by  MSJ^fcef 
with  a  following  word,  thus  losing  the  tone,  the  original  ii  is  not 
lowered  to  5,  but  deflected  to  6  (j). 

3.  The  vowel-terminations  *> (seldom  V^ )  and  )  (seldom  ))) 

draw  the  preceding  consonant  away  from  the  ultimate  vowel,  which 
then  necessarily  passes  into  S*wd  (§  36.  3.  a). 

4.  The  termination  HJ  (seldom  1)  does  not  receive  the  tone. 

64.     The  J^&l  Imperfect  (Stative) 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  B.] 
TABULAR  VIEW  OF  IMPORTANT  FORMS 

3  m.  sg.  2  f.  sg.  3  m.  pi.  3  f.  pi. 

Impf.  with  0  bb\:>\  "'^Dpn  i^Djp";  nj^bjisn 
Impf.  with  a  biD^^,  ■'^cppn  I^Dj?^  '""^^^pJ? 
Impf.  withe     ^jpj:)"!      ""^Dpri      i^Dp"'.      n^^Dpn 

1.  niHE'l.    (2:2);    -|J|D''.   (2:21);    )\i'^\^)    (1:20);    nSH":    (3:7); 

1-133^7:18).       ' 

2.  22^\   (30:15)  from   232^;    ^1^.  (21:8)  from  ^3;    n3r. 

(7:18);    ^2^^  (27:45);    nOa""  (2:5);    ^tS""  (2:8);    nb^l 

-    :     V  AT    :    •  •"  -    .  -    :     • 

(3:22);  !)y3n  (3:3). 

3.  |n:  (1:17);  |rin  (3:6);  Tj^D  (3:14);  J<aM4:16). 


94  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  65 

1.  Stative  verbs  with  middle  A,  with  some  exceptions,  have  in  the 
Imperfect  the  form  ^bp^  {orig.  ya^-tul),  the  inflection  of  which  is 
given  in  §  63. 

2.  Verbs  middle  E  and  verbs  middle  O,  with  some  verbs  middle 
A,  have  in  the  Imperfect  a  stem  with  a  instead  of  6;  this  a  is  treated 
like  the  6. 

Remark. — ^The  Imperfect  stem  /COp»  instead  of  7bp>  is 
used  also  in  verbs,  whether  active  or  stative,  which  have  a  laryngeal 
for  the  second  or  third  radical. 

3.  Some  verbs  whose  first  radical  is  ),  and  the  verb  ^flJ  ^^  S^^*^^* 
have  for  the  Imperfect  stem  the  form  ^COp>  ^-  ^-i  e  instead  of  6  or 
a.    No  strong  verb  has  this  stem. 

Note  1. — There  were   three  Perfect  stems,    ^JOp,  bCOp>  and 

/top)  ^^^  so  there  are  three  Imperfect  stems,  ^\Qi^'*>,  ^^0*^,  and 
L  «  .  ...  .  ^'--h' 

7C0p^j  the  a  in  each  case  being  original,  while  the  e  and  6  have  come 

from  i  and  ii  respectively. 

Note  2. — It  will  be  seen  later  that  the  stem-vowel  of  the  Im- 
perative varies  with  that  of  the  Imperfect. 

65.     The  Remaining  Imperfects 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  B.] 
TABULAR  VIEW  OF  IMPORTANT  FORMS 

3  m.  sg.  2  f.  sg.  1  c.  sg.  3  f,  pi. 

Pi  el       ^©pi  ^bspn   ^©px    n:bBpn(^D) 

Hini     b''D|-5i('?!pj:5l)  ■'^"'Dpn  ^^Dj^x    n:^c?j?n 

1-  TIS";  (2:10);  -|nD}<  (4:14);  nilE'n  (6:11);  TQ^\  (8:2). 
2.  E'^p^  (2:3);  -13T  (8:15);  -)3nn  (31:24). 


§  65]  BY  AN   INDUCTIVE   METHOD  96 

3.  aai/n''  (6:6)  icDp^n"";  niDsnc'n-' 

4.  nsDi';  iBp)^n^  nsp^;  n^j:pn^  ^il^^- 

5.  t:;2|p:  (3:21);  pn^niz;n«;  in\32;n^  ^^t  (i:4);  piz^: 

(3:24);  T]^E:^n  (21:15). 

1.  a.  The  5<em  of  the  Nif'al  Imperfect  differs  from  that  of  the 
Nif'al  Perfect  in  two  particulars: 

(1)  the  first  radical  has  a  vowel, 

(2)  the  original  form  of  the  Imperfect  was  yanakdtU.  Emphasis 
upon  the  preformative  caused  the  elision  of  the  second  a, 
with  the  consequent  assimilation  of  the  n  to  the  following 
^  and  its  representation  by  dig.  forte  and  attenuation  of 
the  preformative  a  to  i. 

Note. — ^The  vowel  of  the  ultima,  generally  -^,  is  sometimes  ■^; 
cf.  the  interchange  of  these  vowels  in  the  Pi'el,  and  Hi^pa'el. 

b.  In  the  inflection  of  the  Nif'al  Imperfect,  there  is  to  be  noted, 

(1)  the  use  of  either  -=-  or  -^r-  before  H J ; 

T 

(2)  the  occurrence  of  —  sometimes  instead  of  -v-  under  the 
pref.  X.io 

2.  a.  The  stem  of  the  Pi'el  Imperfect  is  identical  with  that  of  the 
corresponding  Perfect,  except  that  the  original  penultimate  -^  is  now 
retained. 

b.  In  the  inflection  of  the  Pi'el  Imperfect,  there  is  to  be  noted, 

(1)  the  use  of  §«wa  under  the  preformatives,  just  as  also  in 
the  Pu'al  (compound  S'^wa  under  the  laryngeal  {^);  this 
reduction  of  the  preformative  vowel  in  Pi'el  and  Pu'al  is 
due  to  strong  stress  on  the  following  syllable. 

(2)  the  use  of  either  -^^  or  -^  (prevailingly  the  former)  before 

T 

3.  a.  The  stem  of  the  Hi^pa'el  Imperfect  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
corresponding  Perfect,  except  that  H  does  not  appear  in  the  pre- 
formative syllable. 

»Judg.  11:3.  «  Lam.  4:1.  »Isa.  27:9.  « Isa.  27  :  12. 

» Ps.  88  :  12.  •  Lev.  6  :  15.  ^  Ezek.  16  :  5.  »  Deut.  4  :  16. 

•  Ex.  12  :  15. 
M  Always  so  in  the  punctuation  system  of  the  Babylonian  Jews. 


96  ELEMENTS   OP  HEBREW  [§  66 

b.  In  the  inflection  of  the  Hi^pa'el  Imperfect,  there  is  likewise  to 
be  noted  the  use  of  either  -r:-  or  -^  (prevailingly  the  former)  before  H J» 

4.  The  stem  and  inflection  of  the  Pu'al  and  Hof 'al  present  no  new 
peculiarities. 

5.  a.  The  stem  of  the  Hif'il  Imperfect  is  identical  with  that  of  the 
corresponding  Perfect,  except  that  (1)  under  the  preformatives  the 
original  -^  is  retained,  and  (2)  the  causative  H  is  elided,  as  also  in 
the  Hof'al  Imperfect. 

b.  In  the  inflection  of  the  Hif'il  Imperfect,  there  is  to  be  noted, 

(1)  the  form  7C0p^>  used  as  a  Jussive  (§  69.),  and  with 
Wdw  Conversive  (§  70.),  the  -^  of  which  is  regulariy 
lowered  from  -^; 

(2)  the  retention  and  accentuation  of  the  stem-vowel  ^-r- 
before  the  vowel-additions  ^-r-,  J|; 

(3)  the  occurrence  of ,  rather  than  ^ ,  before  HJ* 

T 

Note  1. — ^The  following  table  will  be  found  serviceable: 

1.  Name  of  stem,  ?al,  Nif.,  Pi.,  Pu.,  Hif.,  Hof.,  Hi^a. 

2.  Preformative  with  vowel,    *»         ^         *!         ^.        ^        ^         01 

3.  First  radical  with  vowel,     p       p       p       p       p        p        p 

Note  2. — ^The  various  elements  used  as  preformatives  and  af- 
formatives  appear  from  the  following  table,  the  asterisks  represent- 
ing radicals: 

3  m.     He  will  ***"» 

3  f.       She  will  ***n 

2  m.      ThouwiU  ***n 

2  f.        Thou  wilt  •»***n 

1  c.       /  shall  ***X 

66,     The  Imperatives 
TABULAR  VIEW 

Impf.     Imv.  2  m.  sg.     Imv.  2  f.  sg.     Imv.  2  m.  pi.     Imv.  2  f.  pi. 

^aiwitho  ^b|T   ycDp     "i^Qp     )b^p     ^^Y^i^ 
?aiwitha  h^p^_   ^Dp     •'bDp     ^biDp,     nj^pp 

-  Jt  •  ••  Jt   •  •     :  Jit  •  :   Jit  •  t  :  <-  J  t  • 


They  will 

!)***^ 

They  will 

nr**n 

Ye  will 

r**n 

Ye  will 

nj***n 

We  shall 

***. 

§  66]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  97 

Pi-el        ^EDpi    b^p_     ib^p     !i^ipp     nj^Epj^ 
ffifii       ^ipp-i  bcppn    ''b'^ppn  i^^cpp).-!  n^bo^i^n 
mepa-ei     ^©pni  ^iDpnn  ^^Bpnn  6spnn  nj^^pnn 

1.  a.  ISr  (8:1),  -ibr;  Dhp^S  2h3';  3312'^  (30:l5),35i£;.« 

b.  "q^^i^y,  ^.^E^y,  ■^'?E^n';    d^se^'w,  dde?:  (20:8), 

c.  iDE^n  (24:6),  -laE^n'";  "ri^^E^r-  "^bp^"'  |P>nnn". 

2.  a.  !)J<^p  (1:22);  (rDE^^S  (1:28);  ^Sfe'ri-" 

1.  The  stem  of  the  Imperative  is  the  same  in  every  ease  as  that  of 
the  Imperfect;   it  will  be  noted  that,  like  the  Imperfect, 

a.  The  l^a\  has  two  forms,  one  (active)  with  6,  and  one  (stative) 
with  a. 

b.  The  Hif'il  corresponds  in  form  to  the  Jussive  Imperfect  in 
e  (§69.),  rather  than  to  the  usual  Imperfect,  which  has  i.  Both  fonns 
are  naturally  more  quickly  spoken  than  the  Indicative. 

c.  The  initial  H  which  is  always  absent  from  a  preformative  in 
the  Impf .,  appears  in  the  Imperative  of  the  Nif 'al,  Hif'il,  and  Hi^pa'el. 

Note. — ^The  pure  passives  Pii'al  and  Hof'al  have  no  Imperative. 

2.  In  the  inflection  of  the  Imperatives,  it  will  be  seen  that 

a.  Before  vowel-additions,  the  vowel  of  the  stem  disappears 
(except  in  the  Hif'il);  and  the  short  i  under  the  first  radical  of  the 
J^al  fern,  sg.,  and  masc.  pL,  stands  in  a  closed  syllable,  the  translit- 
eration being  kit-li,  kitlil. 

Note. — Occasional  forms  like   Oti^D^^   ^"D/D^^f  and  certain 

:      T  -IT 

forms  with  pronominal  suffixes  (§  71.  3.  6)  show  that  the  original  Imv. 


1  Deut.  9  :  7. 

a  Ex.  24  :  4. 

3  Ex.  17  :  14. 

*  2  Sam.  13  :  5. 

5  Isa.  2  :  20. 

«  Ex.  7  :  10. 

7  Ex.  7  :  9. 

8  Judg.  9  :  33. 

»  Ex.  8  :  16. 

M  Jndg.  13  :  13 

»  Deut.  7  :  3. 

"  1  Sam.  18  :  22. 

"  Isa.  47  :  2. 

"  Jer.  7  :  29. 

IS  Job  33  :  31. 

w  Ps.  5  :  3. 

"  Ezek.  32  :  20. 

"  Judg.  9  :  10. 

12  (?:«r6). 

98  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  67 

stem  was  probably  vocalized  ^COD-  Hence  the  i  of  fem.  sg.  and 
masc.  pi.  is  perhaps  thinned  from  u. 

b.  The  Hif 'il  Imv.  has  e  as  its  stem-vowel  in  the  masc.  sg.,  and 
fem.  pi.,  but  i  in  the  fem.  sg.  and  masc.  pi. 

Note  1. — ^The  stem  of  the  Imperative  receives  no  preformatives, 
and  its  afformatives  are  those  of  the  Imperfect. 

Note  2. — On  the  Imperative  with  H (cohortative)  see  §  69. 

67.     The  Infinitives 
TABULAR  VIEW 

K&i.  Nirai.  Pfei.        Pu'ai.        Hidpa*ei.  Hiru.        Hsrai. 


^top 


b'w  bwnn  ^copn    bwn 


bbp    bapn     b^p,  b^pnn  ^ippn 

1.  IW';  p^r\';  rjbpj  (3i:30);  121';  2il^,  (40:i5);  DSE^n*; 

b'^2r\.' 

"I    - 

2.  a.  btJr2  (1:18);    "SD^  (3:24);     but    2J^  (34:7);    niSH'; 
-131_  (17:22);  t£^j?3';  b'^l^ri  (1:18);  n23nn.» 

b.  n'2'\p\  nan"i'°;  nne^a-" 

T      ;Jt  t    :       t  t     :      t 

Each  stem  has  two  Infinitives,  called  Absolute  and  Construct; 
but  no  example  is  found  of  a  Pu'al  or  Hof'al  Infinitive  Construct. 

1.  The  Infinitive  Absolute  has  the  form  of  a  noun,  and  is  not  based 
upon  either  the  Perfect  or  Imperfect  stem. 

o.  In  the  penult,  an  original  a  becomes  k  in  the  J^slI  and  in  one 
form  of  the  Nif 'al,  i  in  the  other  Nif 'al,  and  remains  unchanged  in  the 
Pi'el,  Hi^a'el  and  Hif'il;  while  original  u  appears  in  the  Pu'al  and  is 
deflected  to  6  in  the  Hof'al. 


»  Deut.  5  :  12.  «  Jer.  32 :  4.  « Ex.  4  :  14.  <  1  Sam.  17  :  16. 

» Isa.  56  :  3.  •  Num.  15  :  31.  M  Sam.  10  :  2.  « Nah.  3  :  15. 

•  Ex.  36  :  2.  m  Ex.  30  :  18.  "  Ex.  29  :  29. 


§  68]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  99 

b.  In  the  ultima: 

(1)  6  (=a)  in  the  |fal,  Nif'al,  Pu'al,  and  sometimes  in  Pi  el. 

(2)  e  in  the  Hif  il,  H6f*al,  Hi^pa'el  and  usually  in  Pi'el. 
Remark.  1. — The  Nif'al  Infinitive  Absolute  has  two  forms,  one 

(7J3pJ)  following  the  analogy  of  the  Perfect;  the  other  (/bpH)* 
following  the  analogy  of  the  stem  appearing  in  the  Inf.  Construct 
and  Imperative. 

Remark  2. — ^The  6  in  the  Inf.  Abs.,  arising  always  from  a,  is 
seldom  written  fully.  Old  noun  forms  in  Arabic  likewise  show  long 
vowels  written  defectively. 

2.  a.  The  Infinitive  Construct  has,  in  each  case,  the  form  of  the 
stem  found  in  the  Imperfect  and  Imperative. 

Remark. — Stative  verbs,  which  have  a  in  the  Imperfect  and 
Imperative,  have,  nevertheless,  6  in  the  Infinitive  Construct.  The 
cases  of  an  Infinitive  Construct  with  a  are  very  few. 

h.  The  If  al  Inf.  Construct  not  infrequently  takes  a  form  with  H • 

This  form  is  found  especially  with  the  preposition  7. 

Note  1. — ^The  ultimate  vowel  of  the  various  Infinitives  Con- 
struct is  changeable,  while  that  of  the  Infinitives  Absolute  is  un- 
changeable. 

Note  2. — Only  to  the  Infinitives  ^Construct  may  prepositions 
be  prefixed,  or  suffixes  added. 


68,     The  Participles 

TABULAR  VIEW 

](f al  Active. 

?:al  Stative. 

^fal  Passive. 

Nifal. 

Piel. 
Impf.       ^©p'; 

Pu'al. 

~  1  ••  : 

Hlffl.           Hofal. 

Hi^a'el. 

Part.        ^Bpp 

b!Sj?D 

^^ippp     bippo 

b^^rp 

1.  a.  Erp-I  (1:26);   oVh  (41:1);   Tj^H  (2:14);   laj;  (4:2);   |m 
(9:12). 


100  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  69 

b.  IpT  (18:11);  -in3  (13:2);  ubp  (33:18);  ^3  (26:13). 

c.  ^n2  (9:26);  niHS';  ilE^ni^  "IHE?-' 

/  T  T  T  :  T 

2.  ino:';  -isE^:^;  iney;  csse^j-' 

3.  naip   (27:6);    ^^::r2  (37:16);    2/lpD«;    T]>>nnp   (3:8); 
HdD  (l:6);n^n2;D  (6:13);  TCDO  (7:4);  rh^^Q-' 

1.  The  Ifal  stem  has  two  participles;  the  remaining  stems,  one 
each: 

a.  The  l^al  active  is  7£0p  (sometimes  ^COlp)=kotel  for 
katil;  the  6  being  obscured  from  an  original  a,  the  e  lowered  from  i. 

b.  The  J^al  stative  participle  has  the  form  of  the  Perfect  3  masc. 
sg.,  7 Cod  (=katel);  it  is  not  so  uniformly  used,  however,  as  is  the 
!(fal  active, 

c.  In  the  Kal  passive  participle,  viz.,  7lC0p  (=kattil/or  kattil); 
the  t\  is  unchangeable,  but  the  a,  rounded  from  a,  is  changeable. 

2.  The  Nif'al  Participle  is  the  same  as  the  Nif'al  Perfect,  with  the 
vowel  of  the  ultima  rounded,  since  the  Participle  is  a  nominal  form 
(§  36.). 

3.  The  remaining  Participles  are  made  by  prefixing  Q  to  that 
form  of  their  respective  stems  which  is  used  in  the  Imperfect: — 

a.  This  Q  has  -r-  under  it  in  the  Pi'el  and  Pu'al,  while  in  the 
other  ^ems  it  takes  the  place  of  the  initial  H  of  the  stem. 

6.  The  ultimate  vowel,  if  not  long  in  the  stem,  is  changed  under 
the  tone,  the  participle  being  a  nominal  form. 

Note  1. — ^The  D  is  probably  related  to  the  pronouns  ^Q  and  HD- 

T 

Note  2. — ^For  feminine  forms  of  the  participle,  see  §  115. 

69.    Special  Forms  of  the  Imperfect  and  Imperative 

1.  ni>ni<  (27:41)  /  will  kill;   rh'!}'^^  (12:2)  /  will  make  great; 
rTl3nK^°^^W(=must)  speak;    nJ3^J   (11-3)  Let  us  make 


1  Deut.  28  :  61.  « Isa.  62  :  12.  « Lev.  22  :  22.  «  Ps.  19  :  7. 

«Isa.  61:1.  «Judg.  4:11.  »Jer.  2:35.  sEzek.  48:11. 

» 2  Sam.  20 :  21.  w  2  Sam.  14  :  15. 


§  69]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD'  ,       .  iOl 

brick;    nS*1E^J    (11:3)  Let  us  burn;    HmDi  (31:44)   Let  wt 

T      :  :     •  T      :  :    • 

cut  (a  covenant);  ni^StJ-^ 

T    •    :  - 

2.  6!pj:5\  cf.  ^^cppij;  r\-\yj-'  "inon';  nps^  (4i:34). 

3.  iT^ST*  rairaA;;  Ha^n'  OA  »atw;  nytl'Dn'  ^«enrf. 

t:t  t:-  tj«):- 

Remark.-t5J-TlSn  (13:9);  J^J-I^DE^';  N3"nQ^S« 
(19:20). 

Some  special  forms  of  the  Imperfect  and  Imperative  deserve  no- 
tice: 

1.  The  Cohortative  Imperfect: 

a.  This  is  characterized  by  the  ending  H »  before  which  a 

preceding  vowel,  unless  unchangeable,  becomes  o'wa.     It  is  found, 
with  few  exceptions,  only  in  the  first  person  singular  and  plural. 

b.  Its  special  signification  is  that  of  desire,  determination^  and, 
in  the  plural,  exhortation. 

2.  The  Jussive  Imperfect: 

a.  This  is,  wherever  possible,  a  shorter  form  than  the  regular 
Imperfect.  It  is  found  chiefly  in  the  2d  and  3d  persons;  and  in 
strong  verbs  only  in  the  Hif'il  stem  (viz.,  with  -^  instead  of  ^__>); 
but  in  all  stems  of  verbs  H"^  (§  82.)  and  Y'J?  (§  86.).  The  w^w- 
conversive  form  of  the  Imperfect  is  also  that  of  the  Jussive  (cf,  §  70.). 

b.  Its  special  signification  is  that  of  toish,  command;  with  a 
negative,  dissuasion,  prohibition. 

3.  The  Cohortative  Imperative;    this,  like  the  Cohortative  Imper- 
fect, is  characterized  by  the  ending  H >  ^^^  is  often  more  emphatic 

than  the  ordinary  form.    The  Hif .  Imv.  changes  -^  to  ^ before  H • 

Remarks. — ^The  modal  idea  in  each  of  these  three  forms  is  in- 
tensified or  enlivened  by  the  particle  J^J,  which  is  frequently  found 

T 

in  connection  with  them. 

Note  1. — ^The  regular  Imperfect  and  Imperative  forms  may 
without  change  convey  the  ideas  characteristic  of  the  forms  here 
discussed. 


*  Ct.  1 : 4.  s  Mai.  2  :  12.  « Ps.  27  :  9.  «  Neh.  5  :  19. 

•  Ps.  6  :  5.  •  Ps.  5:3.  » Judg.  13  :  14. 


10?  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  70 

Note  2. — ^The  shorter  form  of  the  Imperative  corresponding  to 
the  Jussive  is  confined  to  n"^  verbs,  e.  g.,  75  for  H  y^- 

70.     The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  with  W&w  Conversive 

1-  a.  . .-loii"!  (3). . .nn\-i  y-ixni  (2). . .xi3  rriK^xna  d^i) 

V         J  "■  T    :  IT      I      vjT   T    :  T  T  •  "  : 

.  •  x-)p  r^prh)  ■  ■  ■  x-ij:)'i  (5) . . .  ^^d^v  •  •  «i!i  (4) . . .  %-i^i 
.  .^TV  •  -Hn^v  •  -E^J?'.!  (7). .  .-lai^^i  (6). . .  .%Ti. . .  .^Tl 
•  •%Ti not^^i  (9) %Ti ^Tl xnp'i  (§) 

b D"ipi2^n  rp13  nhKD  ^T  [D\"l'^K  lO^^^lI  (1:14) 

• . •  -n'liJ^D^  rnv .  .-rimb  vn) 

:    •  T   :  :  t   : 

^m  ^?^i  D^'nn  y^o  d?  np^i  n^,  n^e?":  |s  (3:22) 

IT  : 

2.  a.  n3?^'.l  (2:2);  ^T|2'>1  (1:4);   nJUpSI  (2:21);   ^1^^)  (2:3); 

T)-1.3"ll  (1:22). 
6-  pDll  (2:24);  Hp^l  (3:22);  ^Kl  (3:22);  niD^^I  (24:14); 

j-t:  /-■':  -t;  t:it: 

n'?DX1  (3:18). 

jt   :  -    IT  : 

3.  a.  1TO-j,Tl  (4:8);    ^12^1   (1:7);    DS^-l'l  (14:15);     rp;2^] 

(1:22);  HnE^H'T  (15:6). 

nnn^l  (15:10);   1Dpe^«1   (18:16);   "laTI  (17:3);   niSE^'l 

(2:2). 
Remark.— £f2^;il,  6m<  DE^a^i)  (3:21). 

ft-^innoxi  (3:13);  noDxi  (3:i6);  inn^E^i  (3:20);  inn^i 

'(3:21)V^n^WU6:6)."' 

<•   ;    ~  IT  : 

The  use  of  the  Perfect  and  Imperfect  with  the  so-called  W&w 
Conversive^  is  one  of  the  most  marked  peculiarities  of  the  language. 

» These  cases  are  cited  from  Exodus. 

« The  form  is  usually  called  Waw  Consecutive;    but  this  name  claims  too  much  for 
the  form;  the  older  term  Conversive,  while  not  ideal,  is  less  objectionable. 


§  70]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  103 

Only  what  relates  to  the  forms  of  the  conjunction,  and  to  the  verbal 
forms  to  which  the  conjunction  is  joined,  will  here  be  noticed. 

1.  The  facts  in  the  case,  briefly  stated,  are  as  follows: 

a.  In  continued  narrations  of  the  past,  the  first  verb  is  in  the 
Perfect,  while  those  that  follow,  unless  they  are  separated  from  the  con- 
junction by  intervening  words,  are  in  the  Imperfect  and  connected  with 
the  preceding  Perfect  by  means  of  WHw  Conversive. 

b.  In  the  narration  of  actions  which  are  to  occur  in  the  future, 
or  which  can  only  be  conditionally  realized,  or  which  are  indefinite 
so  far  as  their  character  or  occurrence  is  concerned,  the  first  verb  is 
in  the  Imperfect  (or  Participle,  or  Imperative),  while  those  that  fol- 
low, unless  they  are  separated  from  the  conjunction  by  intervening  words, 
are  in  the  Perfect  and  connected  with  the  preceding  verb  by  means 
of  W&w  Conversive. 

Note. — ^This  more  common  usage  is  very  often  modified  in  vari- 
ous ways;  but  a  consideration  of  these  questions  belongs  to  Syntax, 
and  cannot  be  taken  up  here. 

2.  The  form  of  the  conjunction,  however,  is  not  the  same  in  both 
cases: 

a.  With  the  Imperfect,  the  conjunction  is  ),  but 

(1)  the  following  consonant  regularly  has  D^geS-forte; 

(2)  the  D§,ges-f6rte  may  be  omitted  from  a  consonant  which 

has  only  S*wa  under  it  (§  14.  2),  and 

(3)  before  {<,  in  the  first  person,  the  Dige§-f orte  being  omitted, 

the  preceding  -=-  becomes  -?-. 

b.  With  the  Perfect,  the  conjunction  is  the  same  as  the  ordinary 
W§,w  Conjunctive,  with  its  various  pointings  (§  49.). 

3.  With  reference  to  the  verbal  form  employed, 
a.  In  the  case  of  the  Imperfect,  there  is  used, 

(1)  in  the  first  person,  a  lengthened  form  exactly  similar  to 
that  of  the  Cohortative  (§  69.)' — a  usage  which  is  rare 
and  late; 

»  Cf.  nnWNj  (32  :  6);   npSna)  (41 :  11);   nnPifii)  (43  :  21);   njiiK)  (Num.  8  :  19);  also 
£z.  7  :  27-9  :  6,  in  which  there  are  seventeen  cases. 


104  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  71 

(2)  in  the  second  and  third  persons,  a  short  form  like  that  of 

the  Jussive  (§  69.)  and  found  in  many  weak  and  bi- 
literal  verbs  and  in  the  Hif'il  of  strong  verbs. 

(3)  a  form  with  accent  on  the  penult,  and  the  consequent 

vowel  changes;  but  the  penult  cannot  carry  the  accent 
unless  it  is  an  open  syllable,  and  the  final  syllable  has  a 
changeable  vowel.  This  form  cannot  occur  in  the  strong 
verb. 

(4)  the  ordinary  verbal  form  unchanged. 

Remark. — With  Waw  Conversive  the  Hif'il,  therefore,  has  e  in- 
stead of  i;  but  this  i  is  usually  restored,  though  written  defectively, 
before  suffixes. 

b.  In  the  case  of  the  Perfect,  the  usual  verbal  form  is  employed; 
but,  whenever  possible,  this  form  is  marked  by  a  change  of  accent,  the 
tone  passing  from  the  penult  to  the  ultima. 

Note. — As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  cases  in  which  there  is  no  change 
of  tone  are  as  numerous  as  those  in  which  there  does  occur  change. 
These  cases  are  grouped  by  Driver^  as  follows:  (1)  in  those  forms  of  the 
Perfect  (3  sg.,  2  f em.  sg.,  3  com.  pi.,  2  masc.  pi.,  2  f em.  pi.)  which  are  al- 
ready Milra;  (2)  when  the  Perfect  is  immediately  followed  by  a  mono- 
syllable, or  dissyllable  accented  on  the  penult;  (3)  when  the  Perfect 
is  in  pause;  (4)  in  the  1  pi.  of  all  conjugations,  and  in  3  fem.  sg.  and  3 
pi.  of  the  Hif'il;  (5)  in  the  |Cal  of  verbs  ^'\>  and  H''^;  (6)  frequently 
in  those  forms  of  ^"^  and  Middle-Vowel  ^^Is  and  Nif 'als  which  end 
in  !)  and  H  "^' 

71,     The  Verb  with  Suffixes 

[See  Paradigm  C  at  end  of  book.) 

1.  a.  rnbcop  for  rh^ph  innbx  (37:20);  i:nDDD'; 

-    T  J:  T     :   jiT  :  AT  T    -;  *     :  it    t    : 

"ijnDBi?^';  iJnjjvo';  r^n^Dp  m  ph^py,  ■'Jni^y; 

1Jn^^J?ri';  ^JniS^DJ  (31  =28);  i;n-)21  (40:14). 


»  Use  of  the  Tenses  in  Hebrew,*  S  HO. 

» Isa.  63  :  5.  •  Ps.  69  :  3.  *  Num.  20  :  14.  » Jer.  15  :  10. 

•  Judg.  11 :  35.     ^  Ezek.  16  :  19.     »  Zech.  7:5.  »  Nmn.  20  :  5. 


§  71]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  105 

6-  [I^Op  for   l^pp];   ?|l)lpj    (50:17)  for  T^^m,   DIpDl 
(33:13)  for  DIDSn- 

Remarks.HDn«    (44:20);    "-JinDE^';      "'JnE'X    (30:13); 

T]-|3DX^;  ?]^"'2i2'n  (50:6). 
c.  [^"^Dpl;  D-1DDE'';  in-J2^1T=  ^^.^9?  (^''•^^^• 

m-h^DV,  ijnj  (31:7)  /or  !in-:nj;  D-jnj>;  Tisnx'; 

T    T  |:  T  :  T    T  :  t    t  :  J  :   »••  -: 

?]-I3:y';  ?]nW';  TjOnT;  ^ib^S^  (32:18). 

[i:n^Dp,  "nn^Dp];  seeabove,l.a;  QmnX";  DH^DX-" 
Remark.-t-|n    (4:25)  for   !)nnn;    Vnyi"'    (18=19)   for 

^rvr\V'\^:  wn^^'Vor^nm^^  nvT(24:i6)/orn;?T; 

When  the  object  of  a  verb  is  a  pronoun,  it  is  often  expressed  by  the 
union  of  J^{^  and  the  pronominal  suffix.  More  often,  however,  the 
pronominal  suffix  is  joined  directly  to  the  verbal  form.  This  occa- 
sions certain  changes  of  termination  and  of  stem.  When  a  suffix  is 
added  to  a  verbal  form,  the  form  becomes  subject,  so  far  as  the  in- 
fluence of  the  tone  is  concerned,  to  the  laws  controlling  the  vocaliza- 
tion of  nouns. 

1.  In  the  case  of  the  Perfect  with  suffixes,  it  is  to  be  noted, 

a.  In  reference  to  termination-changes ,  that  the  older  endings 
are  in  many  cases  retained,  as 

(1)  the  older  J^ >  ^^r  the  later  H (3  sg.  fem.); 

(2)  the  older  ^p,  for  the  later  p  (2  sg.  fem.); 

(3)  the  older  ^p,  for  the  later  Df^  (2  pi.  masc),  perhaps 

after  the  analogy  of  ^  in  the  3d  plural. 
Remark. — J^  occurs  for  p  (2  m.  sg.),  often  before  ^J. 


» Jer.  2  :  32.  « Num.  22  :  17.  »  Deut.  25  : 1.  « 1  Chron.  13  : 3. 

» Josh.  10  :  19.  «  Deut.  15  :  16.  '  Deut.  15  :  12.  '1  Sam.  20  r  22. 

•  Deut.  13  :  18.  w  Ps.  48  :  7.  "  Hos.  2  :  14.  "  Ruth  4  :  15. 
"  Jer.  49  :  24. 


106  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  71 

b.  In  reference  to  stem-changes,  that,  in  the  !^fal, 

(1)  the  first  syllable,  being  no  longer  pretonic  when  a  suffix 

is  appended,  reduces  its  original  a  in  the  open  syllable 
to  §*wa;  while 

(2)  the  a  of  the  second  syllable,  which  has  been  reduced  be- 

fore personal  terminations  beginning  with  a  vowel,  is 
retained,   and,   in   the  open  syllable  before  the   tone, 
rounded  to  k. 
Remark  1. — The  -^  of  verbs  Middle  E  appears  before  suffixes. 

Remark  2. — ^The  Pi'el  and  Hi^pa'el  take  -7-  in  the  last  syllable 
before  ?],  Q3,  |3,  but  elsewhere  the  vowel  is  rejected;  while  the 
ultimate  t  of  the  Hif 'il  suffers  no  change. 

c.  In  reference  to  the  union  of  termination  and  suffix,  that 

(1)  to  a  verbal  form  ending  in  a  vowel,  the  suffix  is  attached 

directly; 

(2)  to  a  verbal  form  ending,  in  ordinary  usage,  with  a  con- 

sonant, the  suffix  is  attached  by  means  of  a  so-called 
connecting-vowel  which  is  generally  §,,  but  before  ?|, 
Q3,  and  |3,  is  S*wa,  and  before  71  is  e. 

(3)  to  the  3  sg.  fem.  termination  H »  suffixes  forming  a 

syllable  are  attached  without  a  connecting-vowel;  other 
suffixes  have  a  connecting-vowel,  viz.,  e  before  Tj)  but  a 
before  Q;   the  accent,  peculiarly,  in  every  case  stays  on 
the  feminine  ending  H— -• 
Note. — Certain    changes    are    quite   frequent:    (1)  ^H ^^  ]; 

(2)  inv  to  IV;  (3)  inp_  to  m-;  (4)  o-  to  nl;  O) 

np to  nO-^-     I^  the  third  and  fifth  of  these  cases,  the  d^g.  is, 

perhaps,  in  compensation  for  the  H-  I^  the  fifth,  the  H  of  the  pres- 
ent form  is  merely  a  vowel-letter.  In  the  fourth  case,  the  final 
vowel  was  dropped,  and  the  Mapptk  in  H  shows  it  to  be  a  genuine 
consonant,  rather  than  a  vowel-letter. 

2.  a.  [)b^pr\  for  nj^bpni;  ^J3E^nn';  "nn^Dln-' 

» Job.  19  :  15.  « Jer.  2  :  19. 


§  71]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  107 

b.  ["'J^Dpi];  "'JpeE^^';  ""PlSli^';  ^2/3B^  (32:18);  ?]"13|K'; 

[■':'?^p^];  ^:ip2b'';;  innsE^^  (40:23);  ^jnstc'n-' 
[^:)cpp^  ^^Qp^i:  inn^£^i  (3:23);  Dnsbn';  ?]■]»!«•' 

["':)''Pj:3"!];  D^2b\  (3:21);  inD^E^J  (37:20);  OTDl^K.' 

c.  "•riTaoy";  rnp''^pn";  inp"'^i2^n";   see  examples 

under  b. 

n-i)B)T];  iii2^"ii«  (9:5);  ^^')^m" 

3.  o.  [T|^Bp:    Tj^pX  (2:17);    DD^DX   (3:5);   DDnp«";    bvi 
?]n-]22  (35:1). 

[nbCDDl;  m2J?  (2:15);  mOE^  (2:15);  DnOX";  i:"I3i?." 


Remarks.-[?]^E)p];     '^P^^T'      D?"]?!";      n31."; 

i-  ["'j^Dpi;  '•j-iDr';  ""jine^^;  D'^^^''■.  i:"ny-" 
[ni^jpp];  "'jnij;";  DiE^Dn";  innay." 

[■iJ^Di!)];    i:j;pi2;  (23:11);    ■'JIJJIpE'  (23:8);   "'J^^'PEfn"; 

2.  In  the  case  of  the  Imperfect  with  suffixes,  it  is  to  be  noted, 
a.  In  reference  to  termination-changes,  that  HJ  (2  and  3  pi. 

T 

fern.)  always  yields  to  ).    Note  the  analogy  to  the  3d.  pers.  plur. 
in  J|,  as  also  appears  in  the  2d.  pers.  plur.  masc.  (see  above). 


» 1  Sam.  24  :  16.  » Ps.  137  :  6.  » Ps.  42  :  7.  <  1  Sam.  1  :  19. 

•  Job  29  :  14.  •  Ps.  13  :  2.  »  Deut.  6:31.  » Ps.  67  :  10. 

•  Deut.  9  :  14.  w  1  Sam.  23  :  11.  "  Ruth  2  :  16.  "  Ex.  1 :  22. 
"Ps.  8:5.  »«Jer.  23:38.  «Ps.  42:11.  m  Ex.  14  :  5. 

"  1  Kgs.  18  :  10.  "  Ex.  12  :  31.  "  Ex.  19  :  9.  «>  1  Sam.  27  : 1. 

»  Judg.  16  :  28.  22  Ps.  16:1.  *»  Prov.  4  :  21.  »*  Josh.  10  :  6. 

»  Josh.  10  :  4.  Ml  Kgs.  20  :  18.  27 1  sam.  7:3.  »  Ps.  143  :  8. 
»  Ex.  4  :  3. 


108  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  71 

b.  In  reference  to  stem-changes,  that  before  suffixes, 

(1)  the  u  (lowered  to  6)  of  J^al  forms  ending  in  a  consonant 

usually  becomes  -r,  but  6  before  ?],  Q^,  Y^f  the  §*wa 
preceding  the  suffix  being  vocal; 

(2)  the  a  of  J^sil  forms  ending  in  a  consonant  is  retained  and 

rounded  to  a; 

(3)  the  final  vowel  of  Pi'el  forms  ending  in  a  consonant  is 

ordinarily  reduced  to  -r,  but  is  deflected  to  e  before  71, 
WDf  15  5  while  the  i  of  Hif'il  forms  remains. 

c.  In  reference  to  the  union  of  termination  and  suffix,  that 

(1)  to  verbal  forms  ending  in  a  vowel  the  suffix  is  attached 

directly;  while 

(2)  to  verbal  forms  ending  in  a  consonant,  the  suffix  is  at- 

tached by  means  of  a  connecting-vowel,  which  is  gener- 
ally e,  but  -r  before  71,  QJ,  O;  and  e,  sometimes  I, 
before  Hj 

(3)  in  pausal  and  emphatic  forms,  suffixes  are  often  attached 

to  a  verbal  form  ending  in  an,  which  under  the  tone  be- 
comes en,  of  which  the  J  is  generally  assimilated. 
Note  1. — ^This   syllable,  ordinarily  treated  as  a  union-syllable 
and  called  Niln  Epenthetic  or  Demonstrative,  is  found  also  before 
suffixes  in  old  Aramaic.     It  is  probably  an  old  form  of  the  verb. 
Note  2. — In  the  endings  )^ (3  m.  sg.)  and  HJl—  (^  f-  sg.)*  the 

T     V 

D^geS-forte  in  J   perhaps  is  in  compensation  for  the   H  from  ^H 
and  n  respectively. 
3.  In  the  case  of  Infs.  and  Imvs.  with  suffixes,  it  is  to  be  noted  that, 
o.  The  5al  Infinitive  (construct)  takes 

(1)  before  7[,  D3,  |3,  generally,  the  form  ^JOp  (6);  but 

(2)  before  other  suffixes  the  form  p^T),  the  6,  in  both  cases, 

standing  in  a  closed  syllable. 

(3)  as  connecting-vowels,  those  used  in  the  inflection  of  nouns. 
Remark  1. — The  Pi'el  Infinitive  takes  -v-  before  ?|,  Q^^  JD- 

Remark  2. — ^The  Infinitive  may  take  either  the  verbal  suffix,  ''J, 
or  the  nominal  suffix  ">     . 


72] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


109 


6.  The  !tfal  Imperative,   taking  the  connecting-vowel  of  the 
Impf., 

(1)  in  the  2  masc.  sg.,  follows  the  analogy  of  the  Infinitive; 

(2)  in  the  2  masc.  pL,  suffers  no  change; 

(3)  in  the  2  fern.  pL,hastheform!|7j3J5  instead  of  njVCJD* 

:  J  •  T  :    J  J: 

just  as  in  the  corresponding  form  of  the  Imperf.  with 

suffixes. 
Remark  1. — ^The  Imperative  in  a  retains  and  rounds  the  a,  as 
does  the  Imperfect. 

Remark  2.— In  the  Hifil,  the  form   ^^pDH  is  used  instead 

of  b^^n- 

Note. — ^The  Participles,  before  suffixes,  undergo  the  same  vowel 
changes  as  regular  nouns  of  the  same  formation,  and  may  take  either 
the  nominal  or  the  verbal  suffixes. 

72.    General  View  of  the  Strong  Verb 


Mood  or 
Tense. 


1.  2.  3.  4.  5.  6.  7. 

]5:ai.      Nifai.      prei.      Hiffp&'ei.      pa-ai.      Hini.      Hsrai. 


Perfect 
(3  m.  sg.) 

Imperfect 
(3m.sg.) 

Imperative 


Infinitive 
Absolute 

Infinitive 
Construct 

Participle 
Active 

Participle 


^Dp'  ^E3j?;  bisp'  ^Dpnn'bEj^  b^^^nb^^n 


^bp  bcDpnbtDp  723pnn 
Vcpip         biDpo'pispnp 

ViDp  ^DPJ  ^25PD 


^'ppp 


^DPD 


»  C/.  also  the  Middle  E  and  Middle  O  forms,  Sbp.  VcDp. 

«iC/.  also  the  form  with  original  -::-  in  the  ultima,  Sep. 

»  Cf.  also  the  form  with  original  ~=~  in  the  ultima,  SB|5nn. 

«  Cf.  also  the  forms  with  ""^  and  ~^,  b^p\  Sopv 

»  Cf.  also  the  form  used  as  a  Jussive,  and  with  W&w  Conversive,  Vwpv 


110  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [{  73 

REMARKS 

1.  The  J^slI  is  the  sunple  verb-stem  (§  58.). 

2.  The  Nif'al  has  in  every  form  the  letter  J;  this  letter,  however,  is 
assimilated  and  represented  by  Diges-forte  in  the  Imperfect,  Im- 
perative, and  Infinitives  (§  58.). 

3.  The  Pi'el  has  everywhere  (1)  the  vowel  -^  under  the  first  radical 
(except  in  the  Perfect),  and  (2)  a  D^ge§-f6rte  characteristic  in  the 
second  radical  (§  58.). 

4.  The  Hi^a'el  is  the  same  as  the  Pi'el  (except  in  the  Perfect) 
with  the  syllable  J^ri  prefixed  (§  58.  5). 

5.  The  Pu'al  has  everywhere  (1)  the  vowel  -r  under  the  first  radi- 
cal, and  (2)  a  DSgeS-forte  characteristic  in  the  second  radical  (§  58.  3). 

6.  The  Hif 'il  has  in  all  forms  (except  the  Perfect)  the  vowel  -^ 
under  the  preformative  (§  58.  1). 

7.  The  Hof'al  has  in  all  forms  the  vowel  6  (or  ii)  under  the  pre- 
formative (§  58.  3). 

B.     THE  LARYNGEAL  VERB 
73.    Classes  of  Laryngeal  Verbs 

1.  2]]^  (2:24);  TjEin  (3:24);  ^5«';  HH  (18:11);  "ly^  (20:18). 

2.  nni  (1:2);  DHE^';  n"iy3';  W^';  bn2J-' 

I  -      T  -    T  T^:  IT  -   T  -    :   • 

3.  J;D1^  (3:8);  xh^  (3:22);  U^y-,  ^p2  (7:11);  nn|  (42:27); 

Remark.-T]nT1  (1:28);  nJDDin*;  ^nD"1p-' 

A  Laryngeal  Verb  is  one  the  root  of  which  contains  one  or  more 
laryngeal  radicals.    They  fall  into  three  classes,  viz. : 

1.  Pe  CB)  Laryngeal,  of  which  the  first  radical  is  a  laryngeal  (§  74.). 

2.  'Ayin  {')})  Laryngeal,  of  which  the  second  radical  is  a  laryngeal 
(§  75.). 


» Isa.  24  :  7.  « Jer.  39  :  6.  •  Num.  11:3.  « Judg.  5  :  26. 

» 1  Sam.  28 :  21.  » Ps.  28  :  7.  » Isa.  55  :  9.  « Ifla.  28  :  3. 

•  Isa.  46 :  13. 


§  74]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  111 

3.  Lamed  ('7)  Laryngeal,  of  which  the  third  radical  is  a  laryngeal 

(§  76.). 

Remark. — ^Verbs  with  *^  as  first  or  second  radical  show  some 
of  the  characteristics  of  laryngeal  verbs,  especially  in  the  refusal  of 
*^  to  take  D&ge§-f6rte. 

Note. — The  terms  Pe  Laryngeal,  etc.,  are  based  upon  the  order  of 
the  radicals  in  the  old  paradigm-verb,  ^J^S,  the  first  radical  being 
designated  by  g,  the  second  by  y,  and  the  third  by  7. 

74.     Verbs  'Q  Laryngeal 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  Dl 
TABULAR  VIEW 

Perf.  ^^^         ^^y^         ^Qj;j         ^^pj;n        b^Q^n 

impf.         bi^x}^       b^\}^       ^m*)         b"'lD]}"^         b^T 

imv.        "pb;;^      b^:}_      b^yirj     b^gvn       

inf.abs.    b'l^y     b'iay    P^^.^  1    biivn      b:2vn 

'    I  bbvn  J      ■• """ 

Inf.  const,    bhp         yco;y  ^Oi^H         ^"'PJ?'"! 

Part  act.       b^'V  ^CDJ?  b''^^J2 

Part.  pass,  b^^^j     b^^]}     "pQi?:  b^v^^ 

T  T  T      VIIV  T    *t:  it 

1-  6CDr];  n«ini  (1:9);  ><nn«  (3:10);  ^DX-i  (6:21);  TICT.' 

••      Tl"  V        T  I"     :  ••      T      I"  "       Tl"  I   ••       T  I" 

2.  a.  ibbTh  n'?^  (2:6);  -ja^n  (4:12);  -^lyi  (2:24);    iJE'r 
(3:7). 

6-  6c>|?^  ^pj?,j;  ^""pifn];  pim  (41:56);  "TjBnj^;  ^inn'; 

p"'!00*'  '^■'?J!D  (^^-2^^'  *"*  "'"•>■'?.  (^=29);  nirjl  (31:32); 
!"i  (29:22). 


■Ex.  14:5.  >Ei.  7:15.  'Ruth  1:18.  'Deut.  22:25. 


112  ELEMENTS  OF  BEBBEW  [§  74 

3.  a.  r\)Z;y,  (2:4);  i2j;^  (2:5);   Tj^DiJt    (2:17);    Him  (3:17); 
inn  (4:25);  .lE'i?  (6:14);   ibX  «'A<^ce  ibi^^  (1:22); 
bb^  (47:24);  P|b«-' 
i.  HE'W    (1:26);     r\fV}3i^    (2:18);     6CDj;n];     nam    (2:9); 

^^nn';  ^snj';  niinr;  O^E^n:  (i5:6). 

«•  ^iriJn.T  (4:8);  rfil2}r  (27:29);  n^J?;!  (37:28);  DSHl' 

rf.  mo;;.-!',  6"«  rnoynv;  nDK""  (29:22)  «.«<  !|SD«^« 

T     :j-^-:iv  wt     :  -  "^c  I-  :  |       v:iv  :    -i- 

Verbs,  whose  first  radical  is  a  laryngeal,  exhibit  the  following  pecu- 
liarities (§42. 1-3): 

1.  The  laryngeal  refuses  to  be  doubled;  hence  the  Diges-forte,  rep- 
resenting J,  in  the  Nif'al  Impf.,  Imv.,  and  Infs.,  is  rejected,  and  the 
preceding  -r-  becomes  -n-  (even  before  H)- 

2.  The  laryngeal  prefers  before  it  the  a-class  vowels;  hence 

a.  In  the  !l^al  Impf.  with  6,  and  in  the  Kal  Impf.  of  verbs  that 
are  also  H'^/  (§  Sl')>  the  original  a  of  the  preformative  is  retained; 
while 

b.  In  the  J^sA  Impf.  with  -^,  in  the  Nif'al  Perf.  and  Part.,  and  in 
the  Hif'tl  Perf.,  the  original  preformative  vowel  is  deflected  to  e,  for 
the  sake  of  euphony. 

Remark  1. — A  few  cases  occur  of  forms  like  ^\0V^  or  7J3i^*'- 
Remark  2. — In  n^H  ^^^  n^H  t^®  preformative  vowel  is  regu- 
larly attenuated  to  i  as  in  the  strong  verb. 

Remark  3. — In  the  Hif.  Pf.  3d  sg.  masc.  and  fem.  and  3d  pi., 
the  e  of  the  preformative  is  due  to  the  influence  of  the  other  six  forms 
in  which  a  is  the  stem-vowel  and  the  preformative  vowel  undergoes 
deflection  on  its  account. 

3.  The  laryngeal  prefers  compound  to  simple  S*wd;  hence 

o.  When  the  first  radical  is  initial  and,  according  to  the  inflec- 
tion of  the  strong  verb,  would  have  a  simple  S'wa,  it  takes  instead 
-=r»  or,  particularly  in  the  case  of  X>  ■■^• 

» Num.  21:16.  « Ruth  1:18.  » Ex.  7:15.  « Lev.  8:7. 

•  Kx.  7  :  17.  •  Ps.  31:9.  » Num.  3:6.  •  Ex.  4  :  29. 


§  75]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  113 

b.  When  the  first  radical  is  medial,  it  may  either,  according  to 
the  inflection  of  the  strong  verb,  have  under  it  a  silent  S*wa  or,  in 
order  to  facilitate  the  pronunciation,  it  may  receive  a  compound 
§*wa  as  a  helping-vowel,  which  always  corresponds  to  the  preceding 
vowel;  thus,  -=r  -=-,  -vt  -7-,  -tt  t-  (6). 

c.  When,  in  inflection,  a  compound  S'wa  would  come  to  stand 
before  a  simple  S*wa,  as  when  vowel-additions  are  made  to  a  word, 
the  compound  S*wa  gives  way  to  its  corresponding  short  vowel. 

d.  The  combination  -vt  "t-  very  frequently  becomes  -=r  -=-,  when, 
in  inflection,  the  tone  is  removed  to  a  greater  distance. 

Note. — ^The  H  and  H  of  H^ri  and  H^H  have  a  silent  §«wa 
according  to  b  (above),  when  medial  and  vowelless;  but  a  compound 
§*wa  (-vt),  when  initial  and  without  a  full  vowel. 

75.     Verbs  'y  Laryngeal 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  E] 
TABULAR  VIEW 

?:&i.     Nif&i.  prei(i).    Pti'ai(i).  prei(2).  Pti'ai(2).  m<>p&'ei. 

perf.  ^X)!?  ^xp:  bi<p,  bi<p  bnp  bnp  bv^pnn 
impf.  b^p^^  bi<p;,  b^p]  bi<p]  brip]  bnp]  bv^pn^, 
imv.       b^p  b^pnb^p  bnp  b^pnn 

inf.abs.    ^it^p^Kpj  b^p  bnp 

Inf.  const,  ^^^j-)  ^^^pn^*^  bnp  b^pr\n 

Part.  act.  b^p  bi^pD        bjipD         bi^p^D 

Part.  pass.  b)i<p  ^Xj^J  b^pD  bjlpD 

1.  «.  niSt3^;  )ib^^''>  CnJ>?p^;  hut  also  )b0';  n«^^;  yW'; 

•?jn3^Ul:22);  \!J-)^^){S:24);  111^^^(4:14);  T]n_3  (28:6); 

»  Deut.  1:5.  » Mai.  1:7.  «  Ex.  16  :  28.  « Ps.  109  :  10. 

»  Lam.  2:7.  •  Nimi.  16  :  30.  ^  2  Sam.  7  :  29. 


114  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBEEW  [§  75 

&.  nsrno(i:2);  •>nDnj(6:7);  nnc;(6:i/);  lonr;  ynT; 
)^mn';   nn^ni';   ^^ipj;?^;   nj;?^'    Dnnn^ 

(45:13);  nnpMl8:6). 

2.  a,  nnn^^  ^x^n«;  nj;3^^  ^x^^^  bxe^'";  n^^?t  (34:i9); 
6.  )::)np'';  ):^p'*;  lom^^;  •'pj;a^^  ^?^^.a^^';  ^Jnip^^ 

c.  ^^^E^^°;  ^Kil";  bx^";  HHiS^n  (6:ii);  n^/D^^;    ^HD^ 

(18:6). 
3.  "'Jlpi^S^;    iSn^J'^';    cf.  also  the  words  cited  under  2.  6. 

Verbs,  whose  second  radical  is  a  laryngeal,  exhibit  the  following 
peculiarities  (§  42.  1-3): 

1.  The  laryngeal  refuses  to  be  doubled;  but 

a.  While  in  the  case  of  J^  (generally),  and  of  "^  (always),  the 
preceding  vowel  is  changed  (a  to  ^,  i  to  e,  ii  to  6), 

b.  In  the  case  of  the  stronger  laryngeals,  viz.,  y  (prevailingly), 
n  and  n  (almost  always),  the  preceding  vowel  is  retained  short,  the 
doubling  being  implied  (§  42.  1.  b). 

Note  1. — Lowering  of  u  to  6  in  the  Pu'al  takes  place  frequently 
in  verbs  which  retain  the  i  or  a  of  the  Pi'el. 

Note  2. — In  a  few  verbs,  especially  those  with  {»(,  the  vowel 
is  changed  in  some  parts  of  the  inflection,  but  in  other  parts  retained. 

Note  3. — ^The  vowel  which  is  strengthened  on  account  of  the 
rejection  of  Diges-forte  is  unchangeable. 

2.  The  laryngeal  prefers  the  a-class  vowels;  this  is  seen 

a.  In  the  occurrence  of  a,  after  the  laryngeal,  in  the  ^Cal  Impf. 
and  Imv.,  rather  than  6,  even  in  Active  verbs;  and  sometimes  in  the 
Pi'el  Perf.,  rather  than  e. 


» Isa.  40  : 1.  2  Prov.  30  :  12.  »  Gen.  35  :  2.  «  Deut.  13  :  6. 

»  Deut.  32  :  21.  •  1  Kgs.  14  :  10.  '  Gen.  13 :  11.  »  Ruth  4  :  4. 

•  Ex.  3  :  3.  >o  Ruth  4  ;  6.  "  Deut.  4  :  32.  "  Mai.  3  :  19. 

"Ex.  12:21.  "Gen.  45:17.  Js  Isa.  40:1.  "Jer.  22:20. 

"  Nah.  3  :  14.  "  Isa.  47  :  2.  '» Jer.  48  :  19.  »  Josh.  16  :  18. 

«» Ruth  4:4.  22  Lev.  25  :  30.  23  Ex.  15  :  15. 


§76] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


115 


6.  In  the  occurrence  of  a,  before  the  laryngeal,  in  the  ^fal  Imv. 
fern.  sg.  and  masc.  plur.    But  it  is  to  be  noted  that 

c.  In  the  ^fal  Inf.  const.,  the  usual  o  remains;  and  likewise  the 
ultimate  e  in  the  Nif'al  and  Pi'el  Imperfects. 

Note. — As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  laryngeal  exerts  less  influence 
on  a  following  than  on  a  preceding  vowel. 

3.  The  laryngeal  prefers  compound  to  simple  S*wa;  this  is  seen  in 
the  almost  universal  occurrence  of  -=r  under  the  second  radical  in- 
stead of  -j-. 

76.     Verbs  'y  Laryngeal 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  F] 

TABULAR  VIEW 


]e:si. 

Nir&i. 

Pi'el. 

Hirn 

HWpi'el. 

Perf. 

npp 

nop; 

n©p 

n^ppn 

HEpnn 

Impf. 

niP|T 

n^i?^ 

nSjT^ 

n^p|T- 

nepn"; 

Imv. 

HDp 

nippn 

nsp 

nepn 

nspnn 

Jnf    aKo 

niDp 

nbj:)j 

D^p 

nopn 

Inf.  const. 

nbp 

HDj^n 

mp 

n^Dpn 

nppnn 

Part.  act. 

Wp 

DBp.D 

n^ppD 

nppnp 

Part.  pass. 

mcDp 

nop: 

1.  a.  npa":  (2:5);  HS";  (2:7);  i;^">  (2:8);  n^C/"!  (3:22);  T]b^ 

b.  y-\V  (41:31);  ;;212'>  (31:53);  HpVn^;  hW';  J/Sr  (12:17) 

rh^]  (8:7);   hW';    n^E;  [Inf.]  (8:10);   nOa^   (2:9) 

j;22/M50:25);  ^^^n';  yiliT;  mjn"!';  y-linn  (45:1) 

But  cf.:  J?-))  (1:29);  ^/T  (3:5);   mm';  yj.PlE^P';   a»<i 

nVE?'";  nns";  na^n";  :;22;^n";  n^ipn-" 


1  Ex.  4  :  4. 

2 1  Sam.  4  :  19. 

« Ex.  9  :  7. 

« Ex.  4  :  23. 

8  Jer.  31  :  7. 

«  Prov.  9  :  9. 

»  Dan.  11 :  40. 

» 1  Kgs.  3  :  3 

« 1  Sam.  21 :  15. 

w  Deut.  22  :  7. 

"  Isa.  58  :  6. 

"  Isa.  7  :  11. 

"  Ex.  13  :  19. 

"  Ezek.  16  :  4. 

116  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBBEW  [§  76 

c.  j^nio  (1:11);  n-ioan  (3:i8);  j;-iv;  mns';  nhs'; 
ri'pE^^  Vt'hty;  nhD^';  nbE;^';  n^"";  yots^""; 
yi?.?'";  nW'x-" 

[See  also  the  cases  cited  above,  in  fourth  and  fifth  lines 
under  6.] 

d.  ^■^T";  nnp^";  nnDE'";  nj/SETl";  nn^OH." 
2.  njnp5n(3:7);  inj?DE^  (3:10);  ipyT  (4:9);  nni?^(3:19). 
Tjn^E^";  ?)n)E^";  ^n)E^2'»;  ?)nWj  (26:29). 

Verbs  whose  third  radical  is  a  laryngeal  exhibit,  according  to  §  42. 
1-3,  the  following  peculiarities: 

1.  The  laryngeal  prefers  the  a-class  vowels;  this  is  seen 

a.  In  the  occurrence  of  a  before  the  laryngeal,  in  the  |fal  Impf. 
and  Imv.  (where  a  was  a  collateral  form),  rather  than  6,  even  in  Active 
verbs. 

b.  In  the  retention  of  the  original  stem-vowel  a  (§  59.)  in  all 
forms  where  in  the  strong  verb  it  becomes  e,  except  Infs.  abs.,  and 
Participles. 

c.  In  the  insertion  of  a  Pa^ah-furtive  (§  42.  2.  d)  under  a  final 
laryngeal  when  the  latter  is  preceded  by  a  heterogeneous  vowel,  viz. : 

(1)  by  a  naturally  long  vowel,  ^ ,  ^,  or  ),  or 

(2)  by  a  vowel  essential  to  the  form,  as  6  in  the  ^al  Inf. 

construct;  or 

(3)  by  the  tone-long  e,  which  is  retained  in  pause  and  also 

in  the  Infs.  abs.  and  Parts.,  because  they  are  really 
nominal  forms. 

d.  In  the  insertion  of  a  helping-vowel,  viz.,  Pa^at,  under  the 
laryngeal,  in  the  2  fem.  sg.  of  the  various  Perfects. 

2.  The  laryngeal  prefers  compound  to  simple  §«wa;   but  this  prefer- 
ence is  indicated  only  before  pronominal  sufiixes;    the  simple  S'wa 

1  Ps.  97  :  11.  « Num.  19  :  15.  » Deut.  15  :  8.  *  Num.  22  :  37. 

•.Esth.  3  :  13.  « Isa.  45 : 1.  » Ps.  106 :  5.  » Deut.  21 : 4. 

•  1  Sam.  1 :  13.  »« Job  28  :  10.  "  Ex.  5:2.  "1  Kgs.  2  :  15. 

«  Ezek.  22  :  12;  cf.  1  Kga.  14  :  3.  "  Isa.  17  :  10;  cf.  Jer.  13  :  25. 

w  Ezek.  27  :  33.         »» Ezek.  16 : 4.  "  Jer.  28 :  15.  "  1  Sam.  21 :  3. 

tt  Deut.  15 :  18. 


§  77]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  117 

being  retained  under  the  third  radical  wherever  in  ordinary  inflec- 
tion the  strong  verb  would  have  it. 

Note  l.~The  Nif'al  Inf.  abs.  is  nCOpi  following  the  analogy 
of  the  Perfect  stem,  rather  than  that  of  the  Imperfect  (§  67.). 

Note  2. — ^The  Pi'el  Inf.  abs.  and  Inf.  const,  are  the  same  (c/. 
the  '^  laryngeal  verb),  except  that  the  former,  being  treated  as  a 
noun,  changes  its  a  through  i  to  -^  and  takes  Pa^at-furtive. 

Note  3.-— Verbs  with  H  (i-  ^-y  H  with  Mappik)  as  their  third 
radical  are  '7  laryngeal,  and  are  carefully  to  be  distinguished  from 
verbs  with  the  vowel-letter  H  (§  82.).^ 

C.     THE  WEAK  VERB 
77.    Classes  of  Weak  Verbs 

1.  |nj  (1:17);  ^DJ  (2:8);  ^^2  (4:6);  E^j:  (33:7);  riDJ  (32:12). 

2.  -|P«  (1:3);   ^DX  (2:16);   SHX  (27:9);   tm  (25:26);   H^iJ 

(2i:5);  HDK  (40:1). 

T       T 

3.  2E^''  (4:16), /or  ^m  "1^  (2:8);  2/3"»  (8:14);  l^t  (4:18). 

-T  -T  "T  -T 

4.  3iD^^  (12:13);  ypl  (9:24);  pr(21:7);  -jE^i^  |pi  (13:10). 

5.  npE^  (2:6);    n:3  (11:5);    HCSJ  (33:19);    nbi  (35:7);    HE^j; 

(1:11). 

6.  «-|2(l:l);  Xnp(l:5);  J^iJD  (2:20);  J^^D(1:28);  «E'J(4:7); 

TT  tJt  tt  "T  tt 

XDC3  (34:5). 

Those  verbs  the  roots  of  which  contain  one  or  more  weak  conso- 
nants are  called  Weak  Verbs.  The  consonants  in  question  are  such 
as  either  easily  contract,  or  quiesce,  or  suffer  elision.  The  following 
classes  of  Weak  Verbs  are  recognized: 

1.  Pe  Ntln  (J"B),  in  which  the  first  radical  is  )  (§  78.). 

2.  Pe  'Alef  (^"B),  in  which  the  first  radical  is  {»5,  and  is  in  some 
forms  quiescent  (§  79.).     There  are  six  such  verbs. 

3.  Pe  Wiw  (V'5),  in  which  the  first  radical  is  )  and  is  sometimes 
contracted  and  sometimes  elided  (§  80.). 

» The  following  is  a  list  of  these  verbs:  n3ii  be  high;  n03  long  for;  nnn  (in  Hi^alpel) 
delay;  r\i}  shine;  npn  be  astonished. 
« Jer.  18:4.' 


118  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  78 

4.  Pe  Yod  (^"D),  in  which  the  first  radical  is  "^ and  is  contracted 

(§  81.). 

5.  L&med  He  (H'/  )»  ^  which  the  last  radical  ^  or  ^  is  often 
dropped.  Many  such  forms  close  with  the  vowel-letter  n>  whence 
the  verb  gets  its  name  (§  82.). 

6.  Limed  *Alef  (^"7),  in  which  the  last  radical  is  J^,  which  fre- 
quently quiesces  (§  83.). 

Note  1. — ^The  Weak  Verbs  were  in  all  probability  once  Bi-literal 
Verbs,  and  should  be  treated  in  Chapter  XII.  They  are  kept  here, 
however,  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  of  presentation  to  students  just 
entering  upon  the  study  of  the  language. 

Note  2. — A  single  verb  sometimes  contains  more  than  one 
weak  radical  and  so  combines  characteristics  of  more  than  one  class. 

75.     Verbs  Pe  NUn  (|"B) 

{For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  G,  p.  201.] 

TABULAR  VIEW 


?:ai. 

Impf.  w,  6. 

If&l.  Impf.  w 

.  &      Nif  ai. 

Hini. 

H6ral. 

Perf. 

b^; 

~      T 

b^: 

b^^n 

Impf. 

bb^. 

^D"! 

b^^] 

b^^ 

Imv. 

bt: 

b^ 

••     T       • 

b^n 

Inf.  abs. 

^1D3J 

T 

'b'm 

••     T       • 

b^n 

b^n 

Inf.  const. 

bb} 

: 

n^co 

••      T       • 

b^m 

b^r\ 

Part.  act. 

bt2 

^Bj 

b'^D 

Part.  pass. 

b)m 

T 

T 

b^: 

T 

1.  a.  nc^ii^ 

V    JV 

<  2  Sam.  14 :  10. 

•  Ecd.  3 :  2. 

<Nmi 

6). 

>  Ex.  34  :  30. 

1.  4 : 6. 

[§  78  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  119 

b.  E^a';  lE^a  (45:4);  -r\pt[})  (27:26);  ^2^^  i?a.» 

Remark.-y3^3*;  I'l:^';  ^iDJ?';  iaJ';  ynJ';  l^pi* 

2.  a.  HB"!  (2:7);  ^Qi  (2:8);  1i;an  (3:3);   inOm'(6:7);  b"'3«: 
(18:2). 

6.  Tan   (3:11);    ^''^ry   (3:13);    VS!!!   (2:21);    Dj5;^  (4:15); 
-iai(22:20). 

Remark  i.-Dna""";  iDW";  n^J""';  nn^";  qf.  ifc^ajn-" 

Remark  2.-np^     (2:22);     Hj?:    (2:15);     Hj?    (6:21);    Rp^J'^ 
nnp  (4ill). 

Remark  3.-innJ     (1=29);     |n^     (1:17);     -|n    (14:21);     pHJ 
(41:43);'nD  (4:12). 

Verbs  whose  first  radical  is  J  exhibit  the  following  peculiarities: 

1.  The  loss  of  J  takes  place  (§  40.  1)  when  initial  and  with  only  a 
S'wa  to  sustain  it: 

a.  Generally  in  the  ^fal  Inf.  Const,  of  verbs  whose  stem-vowel 
in  the  Impf.  and  Imv.  is  a;  in  this  case  the  ending  p  is  taken  on  in 
compensation  and  the  form  becomes  a  Segolate. 

h.  In  the  Jfal  Imv.  of  verbs  which  have  a  in  the  Imperfect. 

Remark. — The  ^fal  Infinitive  and  Imperative  of  verbs  with  o 
in  the  Imperfect  do  not  often  lose  the  initial  J. 

2.  The  assimilation  of  J  takes  place  (§  39.  1)  when,  having  under 
it  a  silent  §'wa,  it  closes  a  preformative  syllable, 

a.  In  the  l^al  Imperfect,  and  Nif'al  Perfect  and  Part. 

h.  Throughout  the  Hif'il  and  Hof'al. 

Note  1. — ^The  original  preformative  vowel  ii  appears  in  the 
Hof'al,  on  account  of  the  sharpened  syllable  (§  36.  6.  a). 

Note  2. — Care  must  be  taken  not  to  confuse  with  verbs  V'Q, 
(1)  those  verbs  V'B  which  assimilate  ^  (§  80.)  or  drop  it  (in  Inf. 
Const,  and  Imv.  %.sl) ;    (2)  those  so-called  )J*')J  forms  which  have  a 


1  2  Sam.  1 :  15.  » Ex.  3:5.  » Ps.  144  :  5.  « Isa.  34  :  4. 

s  Deut.  23  :  23.  "2  Sam.  3  :  34.  '  Ps.  34  :  14.  "  Ps.  58  :  7. 

« Hos.  10  :  8.  w  Isa.  5  :  29.  "  Jer.  23  :  31.  "  Lev.  20  :  10. 

"  Jer.  51 :  44.  "  Isa.  68 : 3.  «  Deut.  31 :  26. 


120  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§79 

DligeS-forte  (§  85.);  and  (3)  the  Middle  Vowel  Nif'al  Impf.  which 
also  has  Dages-forte. 

Remark  1. — ^The  ^  remains  ww-assimilated  in  verbs  'y  laryngeal, 
and  in  a  few  isolated  instances  besides. 

Remark  2. — The  verb  Pip 7  io,^^  treats  7  like  J  in  the  J^al  and 

Hof'al,  but  in  the  Nif'al  (np/J)  the  7  is  retained. 

Remark  3. — ^The  verb  |ni  is  peculiar  (1)  in  its  Inf.  Const.  J^O  (= 
nn=njri),  which  has  as  its  stem-vowel  i,  (2)  in  the  appearance 
of  the  same  vowel  1  changed  to  e,  in  the  Imv.  (JJ^)  and  Imperf.  (|n^), 
and  (3)  in  the  assimilation  of  the  third  radical  in  inflection. 

79.     Verbs  Pe  'Al^f  i"^'^) 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  H,  p.  202.] 

1.  "lai^'l  (1:3);    b'D^n  (2:16);    "pDJ^J   (3:2);    lO^ni   (3:2); 

J  -  I"  I"  V  J    - 

^D«  (3:12). 

2.  ^Pi^n  (2:16).  hut  ^Di^n  (3:6);   ^Di^J  {Z:2),hvt  "p^J^-i  (3:6); 

^■am  (1:3). 

Reinark.-?|^DX(2:17);  lO^^  (1:22), /or  IDJ^j':  '??^5;.  (6:21); 
*1DX1  (10:9). 

Of  the  verbs  having  ^  for  their  first  radical,  there  are  six  (see  §  77.) 
which  show  certain  peculiarities  in  the  |fal  Imperfect: 

1.  The  first  radical  {^  loses  its  consonantal  character,  and  the 
vowel  of  the  preformative,  orig.  a,  is  6  (rounded  from  a,  which  was 
lengthened  from  a  in  compensation  for  the  quiescence  of  {<).^ 

Note. — ^This  ^  is  retained  orthographically,  except  in  the  first 
sing.,  where  it  is  dropped  after  the  preformative  J>5  (=  /). 

2.  The  Imperfect  stem-vowel  is  e  (from  i)  in  pause;  but  elsewhere 
generally  a;  when  the  accent  recedes,  it  is  e. 

Remark. — Outside  of  the  ^fal  Imperfect,  these  verbs  are  treated 
as  verbs  'B  laryngeal  (§  74.). 

Note. — A  few  verbs  are  treated  sometimes  as  ^^^D,  some- 
times as  'S  laryngeal. 

>  Cf,  SxNM.for  SxNn  (Num.  11 :  25). 


§  80]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  121 


80.     Verbs  Pi 

J  wdw  (Yi 

D) 

[For  full  Inflection,  see 

1  Paradigm  I,  ] 

p.  203.1 

TABULAR  VIEW 

tfai.  Impf.  w.  e. 

If&l.  Impf.  w.  &. 

Nifai. 

HlfU. 

H6f&l. 

Perf.             ^Q*) 

%^ 

"^CDlJ 

^^Dln 

!?Din 

Impf.            ^Q-i 

^D^i 

^CDI^ 

^IQ^I 

bor 

Imv.              ^CD 

^^1 

bein 

bcDln 

Inf.  abs.       ^)^^ 

^to^ 

^tsln 

Inf.  const.    n^D 

bb^ 

biD)r\ 

b^Dln 

b&n 

Part.  act.      yl^^ 

b^'' 

^^DlO 

Part.  pass.    ^!|C3*» 

T 

T 

VdIj 

b&D 

T 

1.  yT"  (4:1) /or  j;-!!;  n^i   (4:18) /or  H^l;  H^t  (4:26). 

2.  a.  ^yi  (4:16);  2£''''l  (4:16);  'h^'\  (4:1). 

3E?n  (24:55);    n^n  (3:16);    1^«  (18:13);   i?T   (4:17); 

!|j;-|1  (3:7). 
NV  (8:16);  T|^  (12:1);  ^^^  (20:15);  ^T  (20:7);  nn^(4:2); 
nVT  (3:22). 
6.  |2^11  (2:21);  jC^i^';  IKT;'^;  E^n^^  (21:10);  pX^in-' 
Remark  l.-Hl^  (4:2);  HIZ^T;  n};^  (3:22);  HJ^T;  .Tl^.* 

i^T';  tr"T3';  -JD^^';  nE^3y(8:7);  n^py» 

Remark  i.-nD'?";  H^E^  (27:19);  HTl  (45:9);  n3n  (11:3). 

T   :  T    :  T    :  t  jt 

Remark  S.-np^    (11:31);     "^^    (26:16);     Tj^Jil    (12:4);     Tj|?n 
(3:15).  ' 

3.  a.  nlpp    (4:18);     IHr    (32:25);     EfllH   (45:11);     nDIH"; 

••     T  •  ••    T  ♦  "T     •  I    IT    • 

"hTO.  (21:5). 


» Ps.  13  :  4.  2  Gen.  20  :  8.  « Deut.  1 :  29.  « Lev.  20 :  24. 

*  Ex.  2  :  4.  « Isa.  37  :  3.  » Josh.  22  :  25.  •  Isa.  27  :  11. 

•  Isa.  51 :  16.  w  Deut.  9  :  28.  "  Num.  22 :  6.  "  Ps.  2 :  10. 


122  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  80 

h.  yni:';  -i^ij  (2i:3);  n^^in  (ii:27);  ]Tb)r\  (5:4);  n^i^i 

(5:3). 

c.  -i-)in(39:i);  nj^2in';  ^31^' 

-  T  :  J-  - 

4.  ;;^V^/;  j;^^'  p*^M28:i8);  ni^ns-  n^i?(T;  in\m« 

Verbs  whose  first  radical  was  originally  )  exhibit  the  following 
peculiarities: 

1.  The  original  )  passes  over  into  ^  (§  44.  1.  a)  whenever  it  would 
be  initial,  as  in  the  K!al,  Pi'el  and  Pu'al  Perfects  and  Inf.  Abs.,  the 
J^al  Part.,  and  the  strong  form  of  the  If al  Inf.  Const. ;  and  frequently 
also  after  the  prefix  pri  (§  44.  1.  b). 

2.  In  the  l^al  Imperfect,  Imperative  and  Inf.  Const.,  two  treat- 
ments exist,  according  as  the  radical  )  (or  ^)  is  rejected  or  retained: 

a.  In  those  verbs  which  reject  the  radical  ), 

(1)  the  Imperfect  has  for  its  stem-vowel  e  (from  i),  or  (before 

laryngeals)  a,  while  the  preformative  takes  unchangeable 
^  in  compensation  for  the  loss  of  ^. 

(2)  the  Imperative  has  the  same  vowel  as  the  Imperfect; 

(3)  the  Infinitive  construct,  taking  on  the  ending  J^  '^^  com- 

pensation {cf.  verbs  J"Sj  §  78.  a),  assumes  the  form  of 
an  a-class  Segolate  noun  H^D  ifoi'  H/COj  §  89.). 

6.  In  those  verbs  which  retain  the  radical  ),  the  Imperfect  has 
for  its  stem-vowel  a,  while  the  ),  changed  to  ^,  unites  with  the  vowel 
(i)  of  the  preformative  and  gives  i. 

Note. — Only  three  verbs®  retain  T  (^)  in  the  Imperative,  and  these 
are  verbs  which  have  no  third  radical. 

Remark  1. — The  Inf.  Const,  has  most  frequently  the  form 
H/CO  i—  r\/^)f  before  suffixes  R^CD;  several  cases,  however, 
occur  of  the  form  H/COj  the  form  ^Q*'  is  found  a  few  times,  while 
n /CD^  seldom  occurs. 

Remark  2. — Seemingly  for  compensation,  the  Imperative  often 
assumes  the  cohortative  ending  H (§  ^^O- 


»  Ex.  2  :  14.  2  Ps.  45  :  16.  » Isa.  18  :  7.  ♦  Isa.  58  :  5. 

•Isa.  14:11.  « Isa.  9:17.  ^jer.  11:16.  « Josh.  8:8. 

•  nnj,  Nn\  r\y,  cf.  also  the  pausal  form  rtfy_  (Deut.  33:23). 


81] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


123 


Remark  3. — ^The  verb  TOil  '^o,lk  forms  its  Kal  Imperf.,  Imv. 
and  Inf.  Const,  and  its  Hif .  Perf .  and  Imperf.  on  the  analogy  of  the 
Pe  WS,w  verb. 

Remark  4. — The  verb  HD?  ^«^^  follows  the  analogy  of  this 
class  of  verbs  in  its  Imperative  and  Inf.  Const,  ^fal  where  7  is 
dropped.  In  J^al  Imperf.  it  assimilates  7  as  some  Pe  Wlw  verbs 
treat  )  and  as  J  is  regularly  treated  in  Pe  Niin  verbs. 

3.  The  first  radical  {)),  when  medial,  remains;  but 

a.  It  appears  as  a  consonant  only  when  it  would  be  doubled,  as 
in  the  Nif'al  Imperf.,  Imv.  and  Inf.  Const.  (§44.  5  c). 

b.  It  unites  with  the  preformative  vowel  a,  and  forms  ]  (a+w= 
6),  in  the  Nif'Sl  Perfect  and  Participle,  and  throughout  the  Hif'il 
(§  44.  3.  a). 

c.  It  unites  with  the  preformative  vowel  u,  and  forms  )  throughout 
theHofal  (§44.  3.  e). 

Note. — ^The  form  7^^^  (from  73^  be  able)  is  regarded  by  some 

-  T 

as  a  regular  Hof'al  Imperf.;  by  others,  as  a  ^al  Passive  Imperf. 

4.  In  a  few  verbs  YQ,  the  ^  {  =  ))  is  assimilated,  just  as  J  of  verbs 
|"S  (§  78.)  was  assimilated. 

81,     Verbs  Pe  Y6d  (Vg) 
[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  I,  p.  202.1 


TABULAR  VIEW 

?:ai. 

Nirai. 

Hifii. 

H6fai. 

Perf. 

^^\ 

^^!p^^ 

Impf. 

^Q^'; 

No 

^'P^! 

No 

Imv. 

forms 

^ip'n 

forms 

Inf.  abs. 

b)^\ 

occur. 

^iP'D 

occur. 

Inf.  co^ist. 

b'^\ 

h^^^n 

Part. 

^qS 

^^CD^O 

124  *  ELEMENTS  OF  BEBBEW  [§  82 

1.  2B''":  02:13);  Y)T'5  (9=24) /or  ypl'];  HD"';!  (34:18);  Ip^n-' 

2.  3lpin   (12:16);    n|Trn   (21:7);    nnC^n^    D"'p"'n   (4:7); 

pm';  3^Q^K  (32:13);  ^TDH^  nn^C?^XU32:10);  213\n 
(32:13);  2^13^^^;  D^p^P^  HprO-' 

Verbs  whose  first  radical  was  originally  ^  exhibit  the  following  pe- 
culiarities: 

1.  In  the  !^al  Imperfect  the  radical  ^  unites  with  the  vowel  of  the 
preformative  (i)  and  gives  i  (§  30.  2.  o).  No  forms  of  an  Imperative 
occur. 

2.  In  the  Hif'il  the  radical  ^  unites  with  the  vowel  of  the  preforma- 
tive (a)  and  gives  6  (§  30.  4.  b). 

Note. — No  Nif'al  or  Hof'al  forms  occur. 

82,     Verbs  Y^  or  V'^,  called  H"^ 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  K,  p.  204  ] 

TABULAR  VIEW 

?:ai.        Nirai.        prei.        Pu'ai.        Hini.  mopa'ei. 

perf.  ni^p^  nopi  n^p   nep   n^pn  ntppnn 

impf.  nE})Tn!p|T    n^p]  n^p]  nD|T  ntppn"; 

imv.  nipp  njppn  n^p  nigpn  ntspnn 

inf.abs.  nbD^^^P^  nbp|__   ^^^^  


Inf.  const,  nmp  nlCDpn  ntep  niBp  nmpn  ntepnn 


Part. 
Part. 

act. 
pass. 

ntppD          HDpp 
nopj            ntppp 

nE)pnp 

1.  a. 

^^^  ( 

:2:10); 

np2;n  (2:6); 

s  Jar.  1 :  12. 
•  1  Sam.  16 :  17. 

nb  (18:33); 

T       • 

« Ex.  2  :  7. 
'  Ex.  2 : 7. 

T    :    • 

T    :   T 

« Isa.  66  :  11. 
sjer.  4:22. 
•  Esth.  2:6. 

« Isa.  23  :  16. 
•  1  Kgs.  6 :  7. 

§  82]  BY  AN  INDUCrrVB  METHOD  125 

b.  n\1"'  (1:29);    ,1^  (2  =  6);    r^Dii  (24:45);    n32N  (30:3); 

c.  HE'vd:");  nvi(4:2);  r^DD':  n3D';  nxne^D  (24:21). 

Reinark.-nfe^J?';  nf\  (4=2);  nJ3-' 

<i-  nDi";  .Tn  (18:18);  n'^jj;  Hip";  nain  (i5:i);  n3n-' 

e.  niE'i;   (2:3);     n1i<"1   (2:19);     n1:3n'°;     nl^nn    (6:19); 

ni-'onn-" 
/.  n^^j  (6:14);  mj/";  iTnH";  rh3";  ns.T^  nx-in-" 

Verbs  whose  third  radical  is  1  are  very  few,  the  )  in  nearly  every 
case  having  passed  over  into  ^.  Verbs  whose  third  radical  is  ^  pre- 
sent the  following  peculiarities: 

1.  When  the  third  radical  (^)  would  be  final,  it  appears  nowhere 
except  in  the  |fal  passive  Participle.  Its  place  is  generally  supplied 
by  the  vowel-letter  H*  ^^^  hence  these  verbs  are  commonly  termed 

n"?.     The  following  treatments  of  final  ^ occur: 

a.  It  is  wholly  rejected,  and  k,  rounded  from  a  (§  36.  2),  appears 
as  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  all  Perfects. 

h.  It  unites  with  the  stem-vowel,  and  ^,  contracted  from  ay 
(§  36.  2),  appears  as  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  all  Imperfects. 

c.  It  unites  with  the  stem-vowel,  and  e,  contracted  from  ay 
(§  36.  2),  appears  as  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  all  Participles, 
except  the  ^fal  passive. 

Remark. — In  the  construct  form  of  the  participle  ^ contracts 

with  the  preceding  vowel  (a),  yielding  the  form  e  (H     ). 

d.  It  is  lacking,  and  6  (rounded  from  a)  and  e,  the  usual  vowels, 
appear  as  the  stem-vowels  of  the  Infs.  absolute  (the  latter  (e)  in  Hif. 
Hof.,  and  sometimes  in  Pi'el  and  Nif.). 

e.  It  is  lacking,  and  6  (either  rounded  from  a,  or  contracted  from 
a  and  w)  with  the  ending  ^,  appears  as  the  ending  of  all  Infs.  Const. 


1  Ex.  21 :  20.  *  Job  9  :  22.  « Ex.  2  :  11.  «  Mai.  2: 17. 

BPs.  147:2.  «1  Sam.  1:10.  '  1  Sam.  2  :  27.  'Ps.  40:2. 

•  Deut.  13  :  16.  w  Hag.  1:2.  "2  Sam.  13  :  2.  «  Mic.  6  :  3. 

"  Josh.  9  :  20.  "  Ps.  59  :  14.  «  Ezek.  6 :  11.  "  1  Kga.  18 : 1. 


126  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  82 

/.  It  unites  with  the  preceding  vowel,  aSid  e  (written  ("] ), 

arising  from  the  contraction  of  ''__,  appears  in  all  Imvs.  (2  masc.  sg.)- 

2.  nT   (1:26)  for  inT;    ^b'D]   (2:1);    1"I|T.  (1:9);    ^I^H   (1:14); 

inn  (1:22);  ns  (1:22);  ron';  ]VT)V^;!;;  p"|33"i';  p^nn*; 
3.  a.  n"'DiJ';  n^nj';  n^>'n';  nn^ia  (45:i9);  n^^nn-"' 

T     J"      :  •  T    J"  :  I'  T   J"     •..  T    <••  ■..  r     J"      :  T 

b.  Dn"'^-l1    (3:5);     p^p}}    (3:14);     ip^Jp    (4:1);     n^BH"; 

n^inne'iT^;  but  c/.  n^b;?n"  ««i  n"'^i;n";  tids'^ 

T    J- -:  I-    :      •  T    J"  "v:iv  t    j-    "vriv  •  j-    • 

andi^VOy^;  iniia"  a»''''n""lV  (3:17). 

c.  r-inn  (41:36);  rpE?ni  (19:33);  nj^E^^^n"';  nrE'yn"; 


nj^n2.'° 


4.  nn^^(l:2);  nnc;v(27:iv);  nn«-i(38:i4);  nnxij(9:i4); 

T    :  IT  T  IT     T  T   -:    IT  T    ":     :  • 

nn:Dn";  nn^3";  nnpE^'n  (24:46). 

t::*  t:*  tJit:* 

2.  Before  vowel-additions,  the  radical  ^  is  usually  lacking,  together 
with  its  preceding  vowel;  it  appears,  however,  in  pausal  and  em- 
phatic forms. 

3.  Before  consonant-additions,  the  radical  ^  unites  with  the  pre- 
ceding stem-vowel,  always  a,  forming  the  diphthongal  ay,  which 
appears  as 

a.  e  (^__)  in  the  Perfects  of  the  passive  stems  (rarely  it  is  ^ ) ; 

6.  i  (^__),  thinned  from  e,  generally  in  the  Perfects  of  active 

stems,  though  Pi'el  and  Hif'il  stems  very  frequently  have  ^ ; 

c.  e  (''__.),  contracted  from  ay,  in  Imperfects  and  Imperatives. 

4.  The  Perfect  3  sg.  fem.  of  all  stems  lacks  the  third  radical  (^) 
and  takes  the  old  feminine  ending  fl^*  to  which  H is  added. 

Note. — This  H is  probably  the  usual  feminine  ending,  added 

after  the  analogy  of  other  verbs. 


»  Deut.  32  :  37.  « Isa.  41  :  5.  » Isa.  33  :  7.  « Isa.  21  :  12. 

6  Ex.  15  :  5.  «  Deut.  8  :  13.  ^  Ezek.  32  :  2.  »  Deut.  27  :  9. 

»  Isa.  14  :  10.  w  Ex.  26  :  30.  "  Ex.  17  :  5.  «  Deut.  4  :  19. 

"  Ex.  32  :  7.  h  Ex.  33  :  1.  is  Ezek.  31  :  15.  ^  Ps.  32  :  5. 

"  Deut.  3  :  21.  is  Deut.  1  :  44.  »  Lev.  4:2.  20  2  Sam.  1 :  24. 

M  Jer.  49  :  24.  2»  Hos.  11:6. 


§  82]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  127 

5.  a.  by  for  nby,  w  /<"•  nia;  nnn'  m  ann  m  na-in; 
p]*i.n'  /or  snn  /or  nsnn;  ^yn'  /or  n^jfn- 
6.  (1)  ns'i':  sipn-' 

(2)  HE/'I  (9:21);  >j|2»l  (27:38);  niZ^Jjtl  (24:46). 

(3)  |3;:l  (2:22);  3-;">  (1:22);  |B»r;  -1|TV;  jp^'.l  (33:19). 

(4)  jDnV";  jDill";  i^npll  (3:6);  anni  (43:34). 
i5)y^^X  (4:4);     nnni    (4:1);    IH'T    (4:5);     t^^i^    (1:7); 

E:r;;n  (22:12). 

(6)  ^3n'';  «n'1  (12:7);  J^n^V" 

T      •  Tj"-  T    ••  IT 

(7)  by)  (2:2);  )^^)  (2:16);  |pi1»;  )'^^y';  ^^m  (9:21). 

(8)  p2;>1  (29:10);  npi  (9:27);  |D^1.« 

5.  Forms  lacking  any  representation  of  the  third  radical  are  found 
as  follows : 

a.  Without  i^__  in  the  Pi'el,  Hif  il  and  Hi^pa'el  Imperatives; 
in  Hif'il  forms,  a  helping  -r-  or  ^^  is  often  inserted. 

b.  Without  n ill  the  Imperfect  when  used  as  a  Jussive,  or 

with  Wiw  Conversive  (§§  69.  6,  70.  <Z).     In  the  absence  of  the  H > 

(1)  the  verbal  form  may  stand  without  change;  or 

(2)  it  may  have  the  vowel  of  the  preformative  modified;  or 

(3)  it  may  receive  the  helping-vowel  -7-;  or 

(4)  it  may  receive  the  helping-vowel  -7-,  and  also  have  the 

vowel  of  the  preformative  modified; 

(5)  in  laryngeal  forms  -^  is  employed  as  the  helping-vowel; 

(6)  in  the  Nif'al  there  is  no  further  change; 

(7)  in  the  Pi'el  and  Hi^pa'el  there  is  naturally  the  absence 

of  the  characteristic  Dages-forte; 

(8)  in  the  Hif 'il  the  helping  vowel  -y  is  frequently  employed, 

in  which  case  the  -=-  of  the  preformative  is  deflected  to 
e  (§  36.  2). 


1  Ps.  119  :  18. 

2  Deut.  3  :  28. 

» Judg.  20  :  38. 

«  Deut.  9  :  14. 

»  Ex.  8  :  1. 

« Job  31  :  27. 

'  Num.  21 : 1. 

8  Ex.  2  :  12. 

»  Ruth  2  :  3. 

w  1  Kgs.  10  :  13. 

»  Deut.  2:1. 

»i  Isa.  47  :  3. 

w  Ex.  6  :  3. 

"Jon.  2:1. 

«  Deut.  3  :  18. 

«  Judg.  15  :  4. 

128 


ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW 


I§83 


83.     Verbs  L&mdd  *Alif  (H"^) 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  N.  p.  210.] 

TABULAR  VIEW 


^&i. 

mm. 

prei. 

Hrrn. 

HWp&'el. 

Perf. 

«!?P 

«DpJ 

i<EP 

K^ppn 

«Bpnn 

Impf. 

«!P)?^ 

«?p' 

«13p^ 

K^pp: 

«??pn^ 

Imv. 

m 

XDpn 

«t?p 

«2?pn 

xBpnn 

Inf.  abs. 

«lBp 

t^Dj!?: 

t^Bp 

^Pp'Ti 

Inf.  const. 

i<Bp 

«s?pn 

^??p 

x^ppn 

«C3pnn 

Part.  act. 

^^'p 

KBpO 

x^ppD 

xispnp 

Part.  pass. 

KICDj!? 

^m 

1-  «12  (1:1) /or  K-13;    ><yD(2:20);    «-|pJ';    XIDVor  XID; 
XE^-in  (1:11). 

2.  a.  !l«^p  (1:28);  !)J«^D"|  (25:24);  HJ^Tl  (2:22);  ''J>|inp''/ 

6.  ^^py->  ?)«a»^';  '^W''-''  "^^^P^V'  C?*?^"!?'"!i^-' 

3.  a.  nX-lp  (17:19);  -"nXna  (6:7);  UK^D  (26:32);   Dn^yO-' 

b.  n«^D';  "Tli^^D"';  "TlX-li  (3i:3i);  Dn^l""';  nUit"; 

T  J"       T  •  J"       T  •  J"T  V  ••:  T  J"     T 

c.  njxnpn  (2f.pi.y';  nj«npn  &  f.  plv-, 

T      jv    -     : 

Remark  l.-HXa    (24:11)  for    nXa:     nXE*  (36:7)    or   nXE^ 
(4:7)  /or  HKC;. 


20. 


»  Deut.  28  :  10. 
s  1  Kgs.  18  1 12. 
•  Job  36  :  17. 
"  Esth.  4  :  11. 
"  1  Sam.  19  :  2. 
"  Ex.  2  :  16. 


2  Isa.  58  :  12. 

•  Deut.  4  :  37. 
"Jer.  6:  11. 
"  Ex.  29  :  36. 


«  Ps.  89  :  27. 
» 1  Sam.  2  :  29. 
"  Deut.  5  :  5. 
"  Ezek.  5  :  11. 


»  Ruth  1 :  20,  21.         "  Ruth  4  :  17. 


« Deut.  1 :  31. 
•  Judg.  14  :  12. 
"  Ps.  5  :  6. 
"  Josh.  17  :  15. 
MRuth  1:20. 


§  83]  BT  AN  IKDUCTIVB  METHOD  129 

Remark  2.-!|j3'/ooj«3;  Dn3n:^;  TiDa';  r\iwr\-' 

JT  JT  •••••:-  •    J"      T  T.V 

Remark  3.-!lJ"»pBy;      -i^t^;     nD)i'   for  m^D^i      ^2)1'; 

Verbs  whose  third  radical  is  J^  exhibit  the  following  peculiarities: 

1.  Final  ^  always  quiesces  (§  43.  1);  this  does  not  affect  any  pre- 
ceding vowel  except  a,  which,  in  an  open  syllable,  then  becomes  §,, 
as  in  the  ^f al  Perf .,  Imperf .  and  Imv. ;  throughout  the  Pu'al  and  Hof 'al 
forms,  and  in  the  Nif'al  Perfect. 

Note. — The  ^fal  Imperf.  and  Imv.  have  ^  for  their  stem-vowel, 
after  the  analogy  of  verbs  '7  laryngeal  (§  76.). 

2.  Medial  {i^  is  treated  as  a  consonant  (larynge), 

a.  Before  all  vowel-additions. 

6.  Before  the  §«w^  which  precedes  the  suffixes  ?],  23,  p. 

3.  Medial  J^  quiesces  (i.  e.,  loses  its  consonantal  character)  before 
all  consonant-additions,  the  preceding  vowel  becoming 

o.  -r-,  rounded  from  a,  in  the  J^al  Perfect  (active). 

b.  -n-,  lowered  from  i,  in  the  J^al  Perfect  (stative),  and  in  the 
remaining  Perfects. 

Note. — This  use  of  e  in  the  Perfects  parallels  the  usage  in  n' / 
verbs  (§  82.). 

c.  -V-  (^),  after  the  analogy  of  the  H' /  verb,  in  the  Imperfects 
and  Imperatives. 

Remark  1. — In  addition  to  instances  indicated  under  3  (above), 
X  shows  a  tendency  to  become  silent  in  many  isolated  cases. 

Remark  2. — J^,  losing  its  consonantal  character,  is  frequently 
dropped. 

Remark  3. — There  are  numerous  examples  of  verbs  {^"7  with 
the  inflection  of  verbs  Pl' /  (§  S2.),  there  being  an  evident  confusion, 
in  many  cases,  of  the  one  class  with  the  other. 


1 1  Sam.  25  :  8.  2  Josh.  2:16.  »  Judg.  4  :  19.  «  Ruth  1  :  14. 

•Job  18:  3.  «Ps.  32:1.  ^  Ruth  2  :  9.  sps.  89:11. 

» Jer.  29 :  10. 


XII.    Bi-literal  Verbs 
84.    Classes  of  Bi-literal  Verbs 

1.  I^j?  (8:8);  )2p\  (8:1);  ;;T  (21:12);  bm  (29:20);  IH  (3:22). 

2.  n!)C^l    (3:15);    ^^2''    (38:11);     22^   (18:33);     n^E^n   (3:19); 

I  T  T  T  T 

The  Semitic  vocabulary  in  general  and  the  Hebrew  in  particular  are 
predominantly  tri-literal;  i.  e.,  words  are,  for  the  most  part,  made  upon 
the  basis  of  three  radical  consonants.  Hebrew  grammars  have  long 
taught  that  all  Hebrew  words  might  be  explained  upon  the  tri-literal 
basis;  and  many  still  so  teach.  But  it  now  appears  to  be  true  that 
originally,  not  only  in  the  Semitic  languages  as  a  whole,  but  also  in 
Hebrew,  there  were  two  kinds  of  words,  those  organized  as  tri-literals, 
and  those  organized  as  hi-literals.  But  the  tendency  of  the  lan- 
guage was  toward  tri-literality.  The  bi-literals  gradually  yielded  to 
this  influence  and  sought  in  various  ways  to  achieve  tri-literality,  or 
its  equivalent,  for  themselves.  Some  carry  the  marks  of  their  bi- 
literal  origin  more  plainly  visible  than  do  others.  It  is  probable 
indeed  that  all  of  the  Weak  Verbs  were  originally  of  the  bi-literal 
order;  but  for  the  sake  of  convenience  they  have  been  treated  here  as 
tri-literals.  But  there  are  two  classes  of  verbs  which  from  every 
point  of  view  are  best  treated  frankly  as  bi-literals.     These  are: 

1.  The  'Ay in-doubled  {^'')J)  verb,  the  main  characteristic  of 
which  is  the  doubling  of  the  second  radical. 

Note. — An  accurate  name  for  this  class  awaits  discovery. 
^Ayin  must  here  be  understood  as  designating  the  second  radical, 
rather  than  the  middle  radical,  since  these  roots  have  only  two  con- 
sonants. 

2.  The  Middle-Vowel  verbs,  commonly  called  'Ayin  W§,w  {X)J) 
and  'Ayin  Yod  (V'j;). 

Note. — ^The  name  "Middle-Vowel  verb"  is  chosen  here  rather 
for  convenience  than  for  accuracy. 

130 


§85] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


131 


85.     The  'Aytn-Doubied  Verb 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  L,  p.  206.1 
TABULAR  VIEW 


«:&i. 

Nirai. 

Hifll. 

Perf. 

(Dp 

JDDp 

m 
2p^ 

23pn 
opn 

Impf. 

Dpi. 

^iT, 

Imv. 

Dp 

Dpn 

^PO 

Inf.  abs. 

DiDp 

■  Dpn  ■ 
'  Dpn  ■ 

^pn 

Inf.  const. 

Dp 

C2pn 

^PO 

Part.  act. 

Dpp 

^po 

Part.  pass. 

DIDp 

C3pJ 

Hof'al:  Pf. 

DpIH; 

Impf.  Dpi"'; 

Part.  Dp=l» 

1.  a.  !|3E^"i  (8:1);  nSI  (18:20);  ISDJ  (19:4);  n^n.T;  •'3Dn'; 

J        T  T      AT  J-      T  T    J"      ••  •    J"      T 

n3DD';  30^^  3D:.' 
h.  Dl"!";  301';  n'3«';  DH^   (47:15);  ^ibs^';  npi  (24:26). 
Reinark.-3D:"';  DHl":  IH?!";  isn":  ri3^" 

2.  a.  ^b  (11:9);  pH  (33:5);  hb^  (29:3);  6^rf^;  miJ.'' 

h.  hh\\";  yah";  33to'';  1112/'°;  inE^-" 

c.  '?bl£'^^;  nlns^^^;  3bp^^^  DDH^";  DDE^n^';  33>>V" 


1  Judg.  20  :  40. 
6  Num.  34  :  4. 
»  Job  24  :  24. 
"  Ex.  23  :  21. 
»»  Deut.  21  :  20. 
«  Judg.  5  :  27. 
» Isa.  47  :  14. 


2  Cant.  6  :  5. 

«  Ps.  30  :  13. 
10  Ex.  13  :  18. 
"  Isa.  24  :  12. 
18  Prov.  30  :  27. 
22  Isa.  10  :  6. 
a>Mic.6:13. 


»Ex.  28:  11. 
T 1  Sam.  5  :  8. 
11  2  Kgs.  22  :  4. 
«  Ex.  15  :  10. 
i»  2  Kgs.  6  :  15. 
2»  Jer.  47  t  4. 
"  Job  H  :  12. 


« 1  Kgs.  7  :  15. 
8  Deut.  9  :  21. 
12  Deut.  1 :  44. 
M  Isa.  10  :  31. 
20  Mic.  2  :  4. 
M  Num.  21 : 4. 


132  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  85 

One  group  of  bi-literal  verbs  sought  to  approximate  tri-literality 
by  strengthening  the  consonantal  element  of  the  root.  As  a  rule, 
the  second  radical  was  therefore  doubled  whenever  possible.  The 
vowel  used  before  this  doubled  consonant  was  the  same  as  that  found 
as  characteristic  stem-vowel  in  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  tri- 
literal  strong  verb. 

1.  a.  The  second  radical  is  regularly  doubled,  except  when  final, 
throughout  the  J^ed,  Nif'al,  Hif'il  and  Hof'al  stems. 

b.  Some  verbs  double  the  first  instead  of  the  second  radical  in  the 
J^al  Imperf.  This  is  the  regular  form  in  Aramaic  for  these  verbs;  this 
form  of  the  Imperf.  therefore  is  commonly  called  the  Aramaic  Imperf. 

Remark. — Such  forms  occur  sporadically  in  the  Hif'il  and 
Hof'al. 

2.  Certain  forms  of  the  Jfal,  Nif'al,  Hif'il  and  Hof'al  become  fully 
tri-literal  by  writing  the  second  radical  twice  and  vocalizing  as  in 
the  tri-literal  strong  verb.     These  are: 

a.  The  K.al  Perfect  of  verbs  denoting  action  or  movement  in 
all  the  forms  of  the  3d  pers. 

b.  The  J^sd  Participles  and  Infin.  Absol.  The  naturally  long 
vowels  of  these  forms  made  any  other  method  of  strengthening  them 
impossible. 

c.  A  few  sporadic  forms. 

3.  a.  ini^'a';  ■'ni2p^;  nl3p';  Til^p:*;  nisE^n*;  ni2pn'; 
6-  n:i3Dn  (37:7);  n:"'^nni  (4i:54);  nj^'Van-' 

T    ^v    •..    :  T  wv    •     :  -  T  jv    •     : 

c.  Dnl3DV;  nl3p1D';  [DDtepi;  DHtepni. 
4.  o.  nJ^2Dn    (37:7);    iJ^D^'";  IpHS";  ^sn'';  iJ3Dn"; 

V    : 

6.  no'V^  i:n";  i^i"  (but  -tii)." 

tjt-  t  'T  *a 


» Josh.  5:9.  2  1  Sam.  22  :  22.  « Ex.  40  :  3.  « 2  Sam.  6 :  22. 

•  Job  16  :  7.  « 1  Kgs.  18  :  37.  » 1  Sam.  3:11.  •  Josh.  6  :  3. 

» Ezek.  41  :  24.  w  Ps.  49  :  6.  "  Pror.  8  :  27.  "  Jer.  27  :  8. 

"  Ps.  139  :  13.  "  Deut.  7:7.  »  Ruth  3  :  15.  w  Jer.  31 :  7. 

w  Isa.  54 : 1.  w  Isa.  12  :  6.  "  Ezek.  1:9.  »  Ezek.  22 :  26. 


§  85]  BT  AN  INDtrcTIVE  METHOD  133 

d.  ^nn     (6:1);     br\D';     3DD';     ^2Dn';     nlBE^H*; 

nr^nn  (41:54);  nj"'^an^  "pn"!  0:20)  ^nrw 

T     .V       •         :  T     JV       •        :  V  .T  -  V     iT    - 

3.  When  terminations  beginning  with  a  consonant  are  attached  to 
forms  containing  a  doubled  second  radical,  a  separating  vowel  is  in- 
serted to  make  it  possible  to  retain  the  doubling  of  the  radical. 

a.  The  forms  in  the  perfect  take  6  as  the  separating  vowel. 

b.  The  Imperfect  takes  6  0 )  before  the  termination  HJ* 

T 

c.  The  separating  vowels  regularly  carry  the  tone  except  before 
the  heavy  terminations  QH and  Jp . 

Note. — ^The  origin  of  these  separating  vowels  is  not  clear,  but 
the  probability  is  that  they  arose  after  the  analogy  of  the  H' /  verb 
forms. 

4.  The  following  variations  from  the  form  of  the  stem-vowel  as  it 
appears  in  corresponding  forms  of  the  tri-literal  strong  verb  are  found: 

a.  The  original  ii  regularly  appears  in  the  !^al  Imperf.,  Inf., 
and  Imperative,  whenever  the  tone  leaves  the  root-syllable  by  reason 
of  the  addition  of  affixes  or  suffixes. 

b.  The  original  u  is  deflected  to  6  in  the  J^al  Imperf.  when  the 
tone  recedes  to  the  preformative  upon  the  addition  of  Waw-conversive; 
and  frequently  also  in  cases  covered  by  4  a. 

c.  In  the  Nif'al  Imperf.  and  Imv.,  where  e  appears  in  the  strong 
verb,  the  original  a  is  retained  unchanged. 

d.  In  the  Hif 'il  stem  throughout,  the  attenuated  i  is  not  length- 
ened to  i  as  in  the  strong  verb,  but 

(1)  is  lowered  to  e  when  it  has  the  tone; 

(2)  is  retained  as  i  when  it  loses  the  tone  by  reason  of  the 

addition  of  affixes  or  suffixes,  and 

(3)  is  deflected  to  e  when  the  tone  recedes  on  account  of 

w&w-conversive. 
Note. — A  naturally  long  vowel  before  a  doubled  consonant  is 
contrary  to  usage  in  Hebrew,  being  rarely,  if  ever,  found. 


» Jer.  25  :  29.  » Jer.  21 : 4.  •  Cant.  6:5.  « Job  16  :  7. 

« 1  Sam.  3:11.  •  Judg.  13  :  25. 


134  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  85 

5.  a.  20"",   bnt  nr3Dn  (37:7);    ^DJ^   hid  U^C^:';    DDJ^ 

but  ij3p^V;  Dpn=;  'pnn.' 
6.  Dsn»;  2b"!';  n'^l"';  ''^2n  ilan";  plan  plan." 
c.  ^nn  (6:1);  bm'';  "•JnVpn";  n's2;n";  "'nisE^nv' 

Remark.-'?p^  (16:5);  0^"]^';  nHV" 
d.  ^mn  (4:26);  1^)^'^  nl2D1D." 

-  T  - 

5.  Certain  variations  occur  in  the  vowel  of  the  preformative  syllable 
from  the  vowel  forms  in  the  corresponding  places  in  the  strong  verb. 
These  are: 

a.  In  the  regular  ^al  Imperf.,  the  Nif  al  Perf.  and  Part.,  and  the 
Hif'il  Imperf.  and  Imv.,  the  original  a  of  the  preformative  syllable  is 
rounded  to  §,  when  pretonic,  but  is  reduced  to  S*wa  when  the  tone 
moves  farther  away. 

b.  In  the  Nif'al  Imperf.,  Imv.,  and  Infins.  and  in  the  so-called 
Aramaic  Imperf.  of  the  l^Sil,  the  a  of  the  preformative  is  attenuated  to 
i  in  the  unaccented  sharpened  syllable  and  remains  without  further 
change. 

c.  In  the  Hif'il  Perf.  and  Part,  the  original  a  of  the  preforma- 
tive is  attenuated  to  i  and  then  lowered  to  e  when  pretonic;  but  when 
the  tone  moves  away  original  a  is  reduced  to  compound  S'wa  (^r). 

Remark. — ^The  intransitive  Iff  al  Imperf.  with  a  as  stem-vowel  also 
has  e  in  the  preformative  syllable,  but  probably  here  it  arises  from 
an  original  i. 

d.  The  preformative  ii  of  the  Hof.  stem  regularly  lengthens  to 
il.  This  is  probably  due  to  the  influence  of  the  Middle-Vowel  verb 
(§  86.). 

Remark. — ^Frequently  forms  appear  with  u  unchanged  and  the 
first  radical  doubled;  e.  g.,  13 ^H-^" 


ilKgs.  7:15.  »  Num.  34:4.  «Mic.  2:4.  «2Chr.  14:6. 

« Ezek.  47  :  2.  «  2  Sam.  5  :  23.  '  Deut.  2  :  24.  » Ps.  68  :  3. 

» 1  Sam.  5:8.  w  Ps.  30  :  13.  "  Isa.  24  :  3.  "  Jer.  25  :  29. 

"  2  Sam.  19  :  44.  "  Job  16  :  7.  »  Num.  17  :  20.  "  Deut.  19  :  6. 

w  Isa.  7:8.  m  Hos.  10  :  14.  »  Ezek.  41 :  24.  m  Job  24  :  24. 


§  85]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  135 

6.  a.  ppno  (49:10);  ^|?ioy;  ^nooini';  laa-in^  (25:22); 

:        :  T      :  J- 

unononn  (43:10). 

:  AT    :     -     :     • 

<i.b^n";    ib^H";    ^>>|T";    ^^Sn^    (20:7);    riDSI"; 

7.  See  forms  cited  under  3  a,  b,  c,  4  a,  d,  5  a,  c. 

8.  'r\2b'', for  s^b;  'ipmy'jor  ipn3;  r^pm  (27:21),  for 

r^pm-,  l^-^^^Jorp^  1)^1",  for  lE^i;  y)-\\",for  y'T. 

6.  The  Intensive  Stems  assume  special  forms  in  these  verbs.    These 
are: 

a.  The  Polel  stem,  as  active  intensive,  with  its  reflexive  HWpoleL 
h.  The  Poldl  stem,  as  passive  of  the  Polel,  with  its  reflexive 
Hi^polal. 

c.  The  Pflpel  stem  appears  as  an  active  intensive  in  a  few  verbs. 
Note. — These  stems  serve  both  for  this  verb  and  for  the  Middle- 
Vowel  verb  (§86.).  In  the  Polel  and  Polal  forms,  the  double  writing 
of  the  2d  radical  gives  the  desired  tri-literality;  and  to  express  the 
intensive  idea,  the  vowel  of  the  penult  is  lengthened  (and  rounded) 
in  place  of  another  doubling  of  the  2d  radical.  In  the  Pilpel,  the 
entire  bi-literal  root  is  doubled. 

d,  A  few  verbs  write  the  2d  radical  twice  and  make  intensive 
stems  from  this  lengthened  root  exactly  as  in  the  tri-literal  verb  proper. 
These  are  forms  that  developed  late. 

7.  The  tone  generally  stays  upon  the  stem-syllable.    As  a  rule,  it 


» Ps.  90  :  6.  « Ps.  131 :  2.  » Judg.  10 :  8.  « Ps.  74 :  13. 

« Lam.  1 :  12.  •  Isa.  53  :  5,  » Isa.  24  :  19.  « Eccl.  10  :  10. 

•  Jer.  51 :  25.  w  Isa.  29  :  4.  "  Jer.  51 :  58.  "  2  Sam.  6  :  14. 

"  Ps.  10  :  3.  "  Ps.  104  :  35.  "  Lev.  20  :  9.  »« Isa.  1 :  6. 

"  Isa.  65 :  20.  "  Ecd.  9:1.  "  Prov.  8 :  29.  »  Prov.  29  :  6. 

M  Ps.  91 :  6.  M  Isa.  42  :  4. 


136 


ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW 


[§86 


leaves  that  syllable  only  when  the  separating  vowels  are  used  or 
when  pronominal  suffixes  are  added. 

8.  The  forms  of  this  verb  sometimes  exchange  with  similar  forms 
of  the  Middle-Vowel  verb  (§  86.). 


86 

.     The  Middle-Vowel  Verb 

[For  full  inflection,  see  Paradigm  M,  ] 

p.  208.1 

TABULAR  VIEW 

J^M.                                                Nif&l. 
Middle  H.           Middle  %. 

Hiru. 

H»f&l. 

Perf. 

i''P  1 

b^;         Mpj 

^'pO 

^pin 

Impf. 
Imv. 

bijT       by^       b^. 

bpv 

Inf.  abs. 

bsp        bp 

bspr\  1 
bsp^ 

■   "^pO 

Inf.  const. 

hp        b^p        bipn ' 

^^pn 

^pin 

Part.  act. 

s?    ■ 

l^P 

^'po 

Part.  pass. 

b^p 

^'p 
l^'P 

bipj 

^pio 

1.  a.  ne?  (18:33);  nnp';  ""nnE^';  Dmo';  no*;  na-i=^; 

T  dT  T 

Remark.-nn  (42:38);  ^IX  (44:3);  ^^^2^  DlCD^;  inp(7:22). 
h.  ^^S^^  (17:12);   ^ll^H  (17:10);    pDJ  (41:32);    ^jlDJ  (41:33); 

ly'Dj  (10:18);  Dnb*pJ^^•  "TiiiDJ";  ^r\m:^>' 


»  2  Sam.  12  :  21. 
» 1  Sam.  2  :  1. 
»  Deut.  5  :  30. 


«  Zech.  1 :  16. 
•  Ruth  1  :  15. 
w  Ezek.  20  :  43. 


» Mai.  2  :  8. 
» 1  Chr.  21  :  20. 
"  Isa.  50  :  5. 


«  Deut.  9  :  12. 
« Jer.  48  :  39. 
12  Ps.  38  :  9. 


§  86]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  137 

c.  NiT  (32:9);  Ef^3y;    -^^X^^;    in^:';    DlW  (34:15). 

d.  Kinn  (4:4);  ^-itJ^H  (14:16);  T^^H  (1:17);    QlpX  (17:21); 

2112^1  (50:15);    D''pD  (9=9);   D'^pH^^     "'OPpn  (^^^^^J 
i:tl"'E'n    (44:8);     DpH    (38:8);    ^E^H    (50:15);     ^fi^n 

(24:8);    «D^    (4:3);     nJ3tS'n';    DD'V;     nopHV; 

nb^nr;  n«3n  (20:9);  ^nxnni  (27:12). 

e.  nD]  (38:11);    D^E^n  (3:19);    Dip  (13:17);    y\^  (31:3); 

niD  (19:2);  HID:  (42:2);  HJap':  HJ^e'-"' 

J  T  T      I     f   ^  T      :       J 

Remark.-D'-|y';  DE^^';  IJn";  Ypn";  Dp_''U4:8);  Y^l  (18:2); 
D2;'1  (26:18);  n:!'!  (20:1);  D^l  (39:12);  nJ^t^nV" 

T    JT-  TJT-  T  .T-  T      :       J  T    - 

/.  D"'E'M30:42);    n^2/{<(  (3:15);    pT  (49:16);    |1^^  (24:23); 
Remark.-n^";     ^:|12»;    D2'"'";     DE''!   (2:8);    HE^'I   (30:40); 

g.  22;'';  31^;  nop";  D^Dp'«;  D«p";  QX^-^' 

T  T  T   I   T  •     |t  Jt  T 

The  Middle-Vowel  verb  is  a  bi-literal  verb  which  seeks  to  approxi- 
mate tri-literality,  mainly  by  emphasizing  the  characteristic  stem- 
vowel.     Hence 

1.  Wherever  the  stem-vowel  is  characteristic  of  the  form,  it  be- 
comes naturally  long,  if  the  consonantal  environment  permits. 

a.  The  a  of  the  |f al  Perf .  becomes  a,  except  before  terminations 
beginning  with  a  consonant. 

Remark. — Stative  verbs  have  e  or  6  in  the  ^al  Perf. 


» Isa.  29  :  22. 

«  2  Sam.  2  :  32. 

»  2  Kgs.  12  :  9. 

« Num.  7:1. 

» Job  20  :  10. 

•  Judg.  2  :  16. 

»  Ex.  26  :  30. 

« Num.  31 :  28. 

» Isa.  32  :  9. 

w  Ruth  1  :  8. 

"  Nmn.  24  :  7. 

"  Judg.  7  :  3. 

»•  Jer.  16  :  5. 

"Prov.  3:11. 

«  1  Sam.  7  :  14. 

»•  Ps.  19  :  13. 

"  Ps.  5  :  2. 

18  Prov.  23  :  1. 

i»Jer.  9:11. 

»Ps  13:6. 

«  1  Sam.  22  :  15. 

"  1  Sam.  3  :  8. 

«  Jer.  30  :  18. 

M  Jer.  49  :  9. 

»» MIc.  7  :  6. 

M  2  Sam.  18  :  31. 

«  Hos.  10  :  14. 

«  Judg.  4  :  21. 

138  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  86 

b.  The  original  a  of  all  Nif 'al  forms  is  lengthened  to  &  and  rounded 
too. 

Note. — This  6  gives  way  to  il  in  some  forms  of  the  Perf.,  for 
the  sake  of  euphony. 

c.  The  same  change  to  6  takes  place  in  certain  verbs  having  a 
as  the  original  stem-vowel  of  the  l^al  Imperf. 

d.  The  original  a  of  the  Hif 'il  attenuates  to  i,  which  lengthens  to 
i  in  all  forms  except  the  Inf.  Abs.,  the  Imv.  2d  sing,  masc,  the  Jus- 
sive form  of  the  Imperf.,  the  Imperf.  with  W&w-conversive,  sometimes 
in  the  Imperf.  before  the  ending  H J >  ^^^  '^^  some  exceptional  forms. 

T 

Note. — The  i  in  Hif'il  of  the  tri-literal  strong  verb  is  probably 
due  to  the  influence  of  this  i  in  the  Middle-Vowel  verb. 

e.  An  original  ii  is  lengthened  to  <i  in  the  J^al  Imperf.  and  Infin. 
Const.,  and  in  the  Imv.  except  in  the  2d  fem.  pL,  where  ii  is  lowered 
to  o  before  the  affix  HJ • 

T 

Remark. — In  the  Jussive  form  of  the  ^al  Imperf.,  u  is  merely 
lowered  to  6;  and  in  the  form  with  Wiw-conversive,  u  is  deflected  to 
6,  except  where  it  carries  the  tone  and  becomes  6. 

/.  An  original  i  lengthens  to  i  in  the  ^f al  Imperf.,  Imv.  and  Infin. 
Const,  of  the  Middle  i  verb. 

Remark. — In  the  Jussive  this  i  becomes  e;  and  with  w&w- 
conversive  i  is  deflected  to  e. 

g.  The  J^al  Active  Part,  takes  a  (sometimes  with  {^  as  vowel- 
letter),  the  vowel  so  characteristic  of  the  penult  of  this  Part,  in  the 
tri-literal  verb,  though  in  its  rounded  form  6;  here  it  remains  as  &. 
The  Ifal  Infin.  Absol.  rounds  its  a  into  6,  as  in  the  characteristic  syl- 
lable of  the  corresponding  tri-literal  form. 

2.  a.  nb^pn  (6:18);  ^nb^H  (14:22);  ^na^pH^;  ^jn'^E^n 

(44:8);  ^nJID^^  ^pJISJ';  ^0^31^ 

h.  nr^iDn^;   nrpi;;n^   nrpi^'n^   '^^riioi?'» 


1  Ps.  139  :  18.  « Isa.  60  :  5.  » Ps.  38  :  9.  « Isa.  10  :  13. 

» Isa.  54  :  10.  •  Isa.  60  :  8.  »  Ezek.  16  :  66.  •  Ex.  13  :  19. 

•  Lev.  7  :  30.  w  Mic.  2  :  12. 


§  86]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  139 

2.  Forms  which  lengthen  the  stem-vowel,  as  indicated  above,  take 
certain  separating  vowels  before  terminations  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant. These  make  it  possible  to  retain  the  lengthened  stem-vowel 
and,  in  addition,  give  a  longer  form. 

a.  In  the  Nif'al  and  Hif'il  Perfects  the  separating  vowel  is  6  {)), 

b.  In  the  J^al  Imperf.  and  rarely  in  the  Hif'il  Imperf.  the 
separating  vowel  I  0—J)  is  used. 

c.  These  separating  vowels  regularly  carry  the  tone,  except 
before  the  heavy  terminations  Qf^ and  |p . 

Note. — ^Just  as  in  the  J/"y  verb,  the  separating  vowels  are 
perhaps  due  to  the  analogy  of  the  H"/  verb. 

3.  a.  niD^,  (38:11);  TjDIE^i  (3:15);  niOJ  (42:2);  ^y\p]  (8:3); 
n^«n  (1:17);  SE^n  (50:15);  D^X  (17:21)'; '^^E^^ 
(50:15);  !|abj  (10:18);  ^JDJ';  ni^E^n^;  ^^0^: 
^nilDJ';  Dp'1  (4:8);  \\2^  (41:33);  D^JlDl' 

6.  ^1DM17:26);    ^^Bl  (17:12);    ^^SH  (17:10);    p3n«;    !|^bl 
(34:24);  UIVh.' 

c.  N">2n    (4:4);      y^^n   (14:16);      D"")?!?    (9:9);      D^pn'; 

P]^Jn';    ^nppn(6:18);    inbin  (14:22);    T)1K12n"'; 

d.  See  examples  cited  under  1  c  above. 

3.  The  vowel  of  the  preformative  syllable,  when  the  latter  is  open, 
necessarily  imdergoes  change: 

a.  The  original  a  rounds  to  &  when  pretonic,  and  is  reduced  to 
S*«;d  when  ante-pretonic,  in  the  |fal  Imperf.,  Nif'al  Perf.  and  Part., 
Hif'il  Imperf.,  Imv.,  and  Infinitives. 

6.  The  original  a  attenuates  to  i  in  the  Nif'al  Imperf.,  Imv.,  and 
Infinitives,  and  remains  without  further  change  in  the  sharpened 
syllable,  just  as  in  the  tri-literal  strong  verb  in  the  corresponding  forms. 


» Isa.  42  :  17.  « Job  20  :  10.  » Isa.  50  :  5.  «  Ps.  38  :  9. 

»  Deut.  1 :  13.  •  Ezek.  38  :  7.  ?  Ex.  16  :  7.  •  Josh.  4  :  9. 

•  Lev.  14  :  12.  "  Ezek.  27  :  26.  »  2  Chr.  15  :  16. 


140  ELEMENTS   OP  HEBREW  [§  86 

c.  The  original  a  of  the  Hif  il  Perf.  and  Part,  is  attenuated  to 
1  and  lowered  to  e  when  pretonic,  but  is  reduced  to  S'wd  when  ante- 
pretonic. 

d.  In  the  preformative  of  the  J^al  Imperf .,  with  a  as  stem-vowel 
(1  c  above)  of  some  intransitive  verbs  original  i  imdergoes  the  same 
changes  as  the  attenuated  i  of  the  preformative  of  the  Hif'il  Perfect. 

4.  2E^in  (42:28);    plH';    DpI.T:  r\DV';  ny-.    3E^=lSn 

(43:12);  ^^W.  "IDID-' 

5.  a.  r|Dli?i  (1:20);  pl3';  nJJlD';  ptt^';  |Jl3nN." 

b.  1JJ13";  nbVin'^;  lE'E'an^  (2:24);  n1^n^" 

IT  T  :  IT  IT  :  •  |»T  :  • 

c.  ^5^D^  (47:12);     ^H^^bl   (45:11);    b^?";    I^D^S": 

4.  The  Hof'al  stem,  having  its  characteristic  vowel  in  the  pre- 
formative syllable,  naturally  strengthens  that  vowel  rather  than  the 
stem-vowel.  Consequently  u  is  lengthened  to  ii  ()),  which  is  of 
course  without  further  change.  The  inflection  is  otherwise  as  in 
the  strong  verb. 

5.  The  Middle-Vowel  verb,  having  no  middle  radical  to  double, 
forms  its  intensive  stems  in  a  different  way. 

a.  The  intensive  actives,  corresponding  to  the  Pi'el  and  Hi^pa'el 
of  tri-literal  verbs,  are  known  as  the  Polel  and  Hidpolel. 

b.  The  corresponding  intensive  passive  is  known  as  the  Poldl. 

Note. — ^For  an  explanation  of  the  origin  of  these  forms,  see  §  85. 

c.  Some  Middle-Vowel  verbs  make  an  intensive  stem  by  simply 
doubling  the  bi-Hteral  root  as  a  whole  and  vocalizing  the  resulting 
form  like  a  regular  tri-literal  Pi'el,  etc.  These  forms  are  known  as  the 
PUpelf  PUpdl,  and  Htdpdlpel. 


1  Isa.  30  :  33.  « Ex.  40  :  17.  » Num.  15  :  35.      «  Lev.  4  :  10. 

»  Ex.  10  :  8.  « Isa.  17:1.  »  Ps.  9:8.  •  Ps.  99  :  4. 

•  Isa.  62  :  7.  "  Job  23  :  15.  »» Ps.  67  :  23.  "  Job  15  :  7. 

"  Prov.  24  :  3.  "  Jer.  20  :  9.  w  1  Kgs.  20  :  27.  «  Esth.  4  :  4. 

"  Isa.  22  :  17.  m  Esth.  9  :  31.  "  Esth.  9  :  27.  »  Ps.  119  :  106. 

"Ps.  119:28.  *«Buth4:7. 


§  86]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  141 

d.  PVel  forms  of  Middle-Vowel  verbs  are  found  only  in  the  later 
literature.  These  were  probably  made  after  the  analogy  of  genuine 
Middle-W&w  verbs,  such  as  jy\V>  b))}>  HIV'  ^^^• 

6.  QEf')  (8:3);    ^^3  (7:9);   ^r\D  (7:22);    !|aDi  (10:18);    J|Vb^ 

(34:24);     "•n'Opn    (6:18);     ""nblH   (14:22);     HrilE'ri'; 

7.  pi  (49:16);     D''E'"»,  (30:42);    n"'l£^K  (3:15);    p^^  (24:23); 

Remark.-!!:^';  ^ni:^2';  nl2n.' 

8.  13"  (from  1)2;  as  if  from  ^2);  -)aj"  (for  nlD3,  from  1!)D; 

-  T  IT     T  T 

as  if  from  •-no);  iSlT/' (from  QH;  asif  from  QO'l);  yO]^* 
(fromi^lD). 

6.  The  tendency  of  the  Middle-Vowel  verb  being  to  stress  the 
stem-vowel,  the  tone  naturally  stays  upon  this  strengthened  vowel 

wherever  possible.    It  loses  the  tone  only  when  (a)  the  endings  QJ<^ 

and  |p are  added,  which  carry  the  tone;   or  (6)  the  separating 

vowels  6  or  6  are  used,  which  always  carry  the  tone  themselves  ex- 
cept before  Qfl and  jfj ;  or  (c)  in  forms  with  Wi,w-conversive, 

etc.,  in  which  the  stem-vowel  was  never  strengthened. 

7.  Middle-e  verbs  differ  from  Middle-il  only  in  the  !lg^al  Imperf., 
Imv.  and  Inf.  Const.,  and  sometimes  in  the  5al  Passive  Part.,  in 
all  of  which  i  appears  instead  of  u. 

Remark. — ^A  few  Middle-^  verbs  seem  to  show  a  characteristic 
form  of  the  ^al  Perf.  with  i  instead  of  a.  But  these  forms  are  per- 
haps better  considered  as  Hiftb  with  the  preformative  dropped. 

8.  Since  the  Middle-Vowel  verb  and  the  so-called  'Ayin-doubled 
verb  are  fundamentally  the  same,  it  is  natural  that  the  two  should 
often  interchange  forms.     As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  same  root  some- 

»  Ezek.  16  :  55.  « Isa.  60  :  8.  « Ezek.  20  :  43.  <  Ps.  6  :  2. 

•Prov.  23:1.  'Ps.  2:11.  »Jer.  16:16.  » Dan.  9 : 2. 

•  Job  33  :  13.  w  Zech.  4  :  10.  "  Jer.  48 :  11.  »« Ezek.  10 :  15,  17. 
M  Mic.  2  :  6. 


142 


ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW 


t§87 


times  develops  two  sets  of  forms,  one  with  strengthening  of  con- 
sonants, the  other  with  strengthening  of  vowels,  e.  g.,  ]J)2    and  ^3; 

-    T 

•^^ly  and  *l*iy,  etc.     More  often,  only  sporadic  forms  of  a  second 

-  T 

development  appear. 


87,    A.  Comparative  View  of  the  Verb  Forms 
1.     THE   KAL  perfect  AND  IMPERFECT 


Perfect. 


Impf.  with  6.     Impf.  with  &,     Impf.  with  e. 


Active 

Stative 

'B  laryng. 
y  laryng. 
'7  laryng. 

I'D 
TD 

n'b 

I'M 


[  ^'■^P 
nop 

-     T 
-        T 

-     T 

Dipp 

tap 
Nisp 


bp  (4) 


[ya^tul]         [yafetal] 


btvy 


Dp: 

by. 


13 


-  v:  IV 

npp^ 

b^^_ 

biD^'' 

25p'. 

(6)  yp! 


[ya^tii] 


bbf}]      ^Dpi      (bop:) 


^(T 


1  Or  Soy: ;  also  Vo];.''.. 

» Jussive  and  with  Waw-convers.  io  pause. 
<  Also  Vap>. 


« Only  in  verbs  y^o  and  'y  laryng, 
» Only  in  jnv 


5871 


BY  AN  INDITCTIVE  METHOD 


143 


2.    THE  p!'EL  and  PC*AL  PERFECTS  AND  IMPERFECTS 

Pi' el  Perfect. 

Pii'&l  Perfect. 

Prsi  Impf. 

Ptt'&l  Impf. 

[Ifattal])            [tuttai] 
Strong        b^p.  b^p'  b^p 
'D  laryng.  b^lJ              b^:} 

'j; laryng.  b^p.bnp  b^p,  ^nj!) 

[yksttsi] 

^«pr 

[ytuttai] 

'^laryng.  HDp' 

I'D        b^: 

niDp 
bis: 
b^^ 

-  \ 

nep^/ 

i^'b      mp 

mp 

«c?p^ 

mp\ 

r\"b      mp 

mp 

n^pl 

^^p\ 

V'v      c:e?p 

CDBp 

COEppi 

^^p\ 

V"V       COEpIp' 

CJDip 

23ip1p' 

CODlp^ 

v')3     ^p:^p' 

COpPp^ 

xy        bY 
TV      bpbp' 

^^1p 

1 ,  •  I  • 
?'p^ 

^^ip^ 

3.    THE  HlF'lL  AND  h6F'AL  PERFECTS  AND  IMPERFECTS 


Hif'U  Perf. 

H6f&l  Perf. 

Hlfil  Impf. 

HOfai  Impf. 

Strong 
'D  laryng. 
')}  laryng. 
'7  laryng. 

[hattai] 

b^ppn 

^'«pn 
n^ppn 

[hulftai] 

b^pn  en)" 

7«pn 
nepn 

[ya^tai] 
^'Ppl 

n^Bp: 

[yu^tai] 

bm 
^*?p'i 

n!?p^ 

» Forms  with  a  under  the  second  radical  are  quite  frequent. 

*  In  pause  n^p.  » P6*el.  *  Pflpel.  » Rare. 

•  P61el.  1  Also  Vnpv  'In  pause  nt3p>.  •  Also  Snp\ 
w  Also  S^B^n.                                               »i  There  are  a  few  forms  like  Sttpn. 
"  Also  Sbj7"^«                                              "  Also  S>b;>^ 


144 


ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW 


[§87 


Hlf'U  Perf. 

H6f'&l  Perf. 

Hlf -n  Imperf. 

H6f'&l  Imperf. 

YD 

[haktal] 

b^m 
b^^'in 

[huktal] 

b^n 

[yaijtai] 

[yaktai] 

b^^ 

-   \ 

b^v 

YQ 

b^iD^n 



^ipii 

K"^ 

N^ppn 

NDpn 

T  J:   T 

«^P)?- 

^Wr 

n'b 

nippn 

n^pn 

n^j?! 

^Wr 

CDpin 
bp'in 

2:pv 
^pv 

4.    THE  NIF'AL  ANDHIGPA'EL  PERFECTS  AND  IMPERFECTS 


mtU  Perf. 

Nlf- &1  Impf. 

1              HI»p&.  Perf. 

Hiep&.  Impf. 

[nattai] 

[yiWfat&i] 

[hid^attal] 

[yieksttau 

Strong       blDpl 

^!?P^.' 

^cspnn 

^C3pn"' 

'Slaryng.^Djjr 

^i?^: 

^23;?nn 

^?3^n^ 

'i;laryng.  ^^pj 

^^p;. 

bapnn' 

••  1  T    :    • 

^5!!ipnT* 

'^laryng.nippj 

nDp"" 

nispnn 

nepni 

I'D        ^2d: 

-  |t- 

TD        bc:lJ 

^Dr 

^"^      K9p: 

«2?p^ 

XDpnn 

^E?pr"! 

n"^      nippj 

nipp^. 

HBpnn 

J?";;       CDpj 

^p^_ 

BBpnn 

CDCDpn^. 

j?"y 

DQipnn 

DDipn^ 

rj;       ^ipj 

b)B^ 

^Vipnn 

^^ipn^ 

1   *^ 

1  • 

^p^pnn 

"^pkp-^'. 

1  Rarely  b^\ 


» Also  h\QPi. 


» Also  Snpnn. 


« Also  Vnpn^. 


§87] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


145 


5.    THE  VARIOUS  INFINITIVES  CONSTRUCT 


^§1. 


Nifai. 


PI'el. 


Hif'il. 


H6f'&l. 


Strong 
'B  laryng. 


[k'tul] 


'^  laryng.     njOj? 

bbi 


P 


re 


-.'B 

•pQ-t 

«"^ 

^^E:p 

.T^ 

nicj? 

jrj; 

Bp 

ry 

■"P 

I'j; 

^T 

■KardySo, 

?. 

[hikUtal] 


'y  laryng.      ^^p  ^XpH 


[m&]        [haktal] 


n^p    n^ppn 


[huktai] 

-  •t:it 

HDDn 


^C3J      b^^n 


••     T     •  ••      -  •                                                        — 

^ipin  

niDpn  ntep  ntopn  ntopn 

copn  Dipip  Dpn  

Vipn  b^lp  b^pn  


XIII.    Nouns 

88,     The  Inflection  of  Nouns 

1.  ^t2i<  Saying,  horn  '-)J2i^;    ^21  Word,  tvom^^^;    HIO  Death, 

from  niD- 

2.  n'n  (1:24);   n^E^XI.  (1:1);   D^-Q^S''.  (1:22);   nlK-DhK 

(1:14);  D^r^f  (3:6). 
3-  J/"'p"1-V"'p1  (1:14);  nJ1-ni1   (1:26);    D"'JS-"'JS   (1:2); 

ynN-lnin  (1:24);  pia-">3^p  (14:18). 
4.  nMl^.  (^=22);     piJ-DD^r^   (3:5);     E^l«-':jEflK   (3:16); 

nJini<(20:l);  mOa  (13:14). 

T       :j-  r  J    t 

The  inflection  of  nouns  includes, 

1.  The  fonnation  of  the  noun-stems  from  the  root,  or  from  other 
nouns; 

2.  The  addition  of  affixes  for  gender  and  number; 

3.  The  changes  of  stem  and  termination  in  the  formation  of  the 
construct  state; 

4.  The  addition  of  pronominal  suffixes  and  affixes. 

89,    Nouns  with  One,  Originally  Short,  Formative  Votvel 

1.  a.  ibWM  katl];    y*]J<  Earth;    :3*li;  Evening;    pX  Stone; 

VIK^  Swarm, 
&.  ibWJorWh  "nty^^Sferb;  "^^pBook;  ^)yHelp;  11)} Eden. 

C'  i/^P  f^^  k^t^;    IpiS   Morning;    TIE^'H   Darkness;    ^p{< 
Saying. 

2.  a.  VI)  Seed;  naj  Perpetuity;  nii<  Path;  ^m  Youth;  nnH 

Under. 
6.  P]K  (=^3^5)  W-  ^SK  =  ^SJX)  Nose;  tj;  (  =  Uj;)  (?oa<. 

c.  ^"^B  Frm*^*  inn  Desolation;  !|n3  Waste;  HD?  Weeping. 

146 


§  89]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  147 

3.  2/2^  Hmtey;  ^^J^Q  A  little;  ^^"2  Stench;  ^{^13  Well. 

4.  a.  nS^O  Queen;  n"nW  Maiden;  HI^E^  Rest. 

ft.  mnO  C'otJer^;  nnOK^  GMn^s;  rnOK  Sai/iny;  nHio 

t:'  t:«  t:-  t:« 

Gift. 
o-  n^DK  Food;  nODn  WiKfom. 

T      :       T  T      ;       T 

1.  These  nouns,  called  Se^olates,  had,  originally,  one  short  vowel 
(a,  i  or  u),  which,  generally,  stood  with  the  first  radical.  A  helping- 
vowel  was  then  inserted  under  the  second  radical,  and  the  formative 
vowel  was  then  changed:  a  to  e;  i  to  e;  ii  to  5. 

2.  When  the  root  contains  one  or  more  weak  radicals,  certain 
changes  occur: 

a.  In  'y  or  '7  laryngeal  steins,  a  is  the  helping-vowel,  instead 
of  e;  and,  in  '^  laryngeal  a-class  stems,  the  original  formative  a 
stands  unchanged.^ 

b.  In  Y^  stems,  J  is  assimilated,  represented  in  the  following 
consonant  by  D&ge§-f6rte,  and  then  rejected  from  this  consonant 
whenever  it  is  not  followed  by  a  vowel. 

c.  In  n"  /  stems  occur  formations  ending  in  ^ ,  )  and  H . 

Note.— For  so-caJled  ^y,  Y^J  and  V'j;  Segolates,  see  §  §  100. 
and  109. 

3.  In  a  small  number  of  nouns,  the  formative  vowel  stands  under 
the  second  radical,  instead  of  under  the  first;  in  these,  a  suffers  no 
change;  but  i  and  ii,  under  the  tone,  become  e  and  6;  no  helping-vowel 
is  needed. 

4.  Many  feminine  nouns  are  formed  from  Sejolate  stems;  the 
feminine  ending  being  added  to  the  primary  form  O^D»  /CDp> 
7Qp)5  ^^*  an  original  ii  is  generally  deflected  to  6. 

Note  1.— The  ?al  Infinitive  Const,  (kutiil  =  k'tul  and  feutl)  is 
with  some  suflSxes  treated  like  a  Segolate  noun;  while  the  Inf.  Const, 
of  verbs  ^B  and  V'B  (H^D  =  Ph^)  is  a  Segolate  formation. 


» Cf.,  however,  on"?  bread,  onn  toomb. 


148  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  90 

Note  2. — Segolates  in  the  plural  form  look  like  two-vowel  nouns. 
Whether  this  is  a  survival  of  an  original  two-vowel  form  in  these 
nouns  or  is  a  later  development  of  a  one-vowel  form  by  analogy  b 
not  clear, 

90.    Nouns  with  Two,  Originally  Short,  Formative  Vowels 

1.  o.  6EDp/orkatal];  Ul^  Man;  DDH  Wise;  ^21  Word;  ^^"^ 

tJt  tttt  tt  »» 

Upnght;    ^{if3  Fksh;    ^QJl  Camel;    )y^   Com;    DOn 

TT  TT  JT*  ''       ^ 

Violence, 
m^  (=saday)  Field;  nD*^  BeaiUifid;  n^lH  Pregnant 

T  T  V     T  V  T 

h.  6C?J?  for  katn];   |pj  Old  man;   133  Hea^;   |0{<  Trtity; 
ipj;  jy^e^;  n*)^  Weary;  )\^^^  Fat;  •^011  Deficient, 

c.  [y^D  /o^  t^atiil];    y^j;  Round;   p\2^  Deep;   IhJ  -Spo«e(f; 

□'•^i;  iV^aA:g<i;  fcD  (cf.  D^'IQp)  Small;  D^J<  B«(f. 

<^.  [^^CDD/o'-kital];  23^£rmr^;   V^J^  ^*'^;  10)1  ^i^wmm. 

T    J  ••  *  T    ■•  ^  T     ••  -r     ~ 

2.  [fl^CDD];  r\Dl)iRw^^eomness;  r\Qlii  Gnmnd;  rhiV  Chariot; 

ttJ:  Itt:  tt-;  tt^: 

t    ••  J  :  t    ••    :  T    %.  J  :  t  %.  -; 

A  second  class  includes  nouns  which  are  formed  by  the  employ- 
ment of  two,  originally  short,  vowels,  a — a,  a — ^i,  a — ii,  i — a.  These 
nouns  are,  for  the  most  part,  adjectives  or  participles: 

1.  o.  Original  a — a,  in  strong  stems,  are  rounded  to  ^ — I;  in  n*'? 
stems,  the  second  a  is  deflected,  after  the  loss  of  1  or  ^,  to  e;  in  a 
few  cases  of  H"?  stems,  the  final  H is  lacking. 

6.  Original  a — i,  in  strong  stems,  are  changed  to  k — e. 

c.  Original  a — u  are  changed  to  §, — 6;  the  latter  (o),  however, 
goes  back  to  u  before  additions  for  gender  and  number,  a  DIges-f ortS 
being  inserted  in  the  final  consonant. 

d.  Original  i — a  are  changed  to  e — h. 

2.  The  feminines  of  these  stems  are  made  by  the  addition  of  H J 

this  addition  requiring  a  change  of  tone,  the  vowel  of  the  first  radical 
is  reduced  to  §^a. 


§  91]  BY  AN  INDTJCTIVE  METHOD  14d 

iL  91,    Nouns  with  One  Short  and  One  Long  Formative  Vowel 

\     1.  a.  6lC0j:j  =  ^ipj:5fori:atdl];   ^Ti^  Great;    ^]np^  Holy ;   nl23 

Honor;    Dl^E^  Peace;   pH^  Lord;  nlHiD  P^re;   plriD 
Sweet. 
&•  [^''Pp  /o»-  katil];   'nipX  Capft^e;   pQ^  litVAf  hand;   ^'»2^2 
Prince;  fT^E^D  Anointed;   {<^2i  Prophet;   T^DB  Overseer; 

c-  [7ICDD  /^^  l^aWU;   TnX  Cursed,  and  all  ^al  pass,  parts.; 
I'  ' 

maj|;  Sfron^;  Q^n^  Cunning;  JIDIZf  TTeeA;;  'injl?  G^^o^^; 
7122^  Bereaved. 

T 

<i.  6ipj5or  ^toj?^rkitai];   3112  ^nh'rz^;  2^^  TTar;   H^j; 
^^'■^'  ri'^N  Goci;  E^1JJ$  Maw;  ^lon  ^ss;  Ql^n  ^reaw; 

^.  [^•'QD  /o?*  Wil  or  4:util];    ^^3  ^^'^Z    ^'^DS  J^ooZ;    3*)^^ 
Column;  7*^08  -^<^^;  T'lH  Swine. 

/.   6lEDp /or  ytiil  or  kiitm];   ^133  i^««;   £^13^5  ^re^*/  ^103 
5me^<;   t^llj;  Strength;  3^3  Chervb;  E^DT  Property. 

[    2.  n^na   G^^^o^  a);     nj<*'3^    Prophetess;    mn«  C'w''^^^  (f.); 

T  :  T       -:  T       •  I  T  VI 

A  third  class  includes  nouns  which  are  formed  by  the  employment 
of  an  originally  short  vowel  in  the  penult,  and  an  originally  long  vowel 
in  the  ultima.  These  nouns  are,  for  the  most  part,  abstract  sub- 
stantives, neuter  adjectives,  or  passive  participles: 

1.  a.  Original  a — a.  become  k — 6,  the  first  vowel  being  rounded  to 

§.,  the  second  to  6;   this  formation  is  to  be  distinguished  from  that 

with  6,  described  in  §  90.     Here  belongs  the  5^al  Infinitive  absolute. 

b.  Original  a — i  become  k — ^i;  here  belong  many  nouns  with  a 

passive,  and  a  few  with  an  active  signification. 


160  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  92 

c.  Original  a — d  become  §l — ti;  here  belong  all  J^al  passive  parti- 
ciples. 

d.  Original  i — a  become  * — ^a  or  * — 6,  the  first  vowel  being  re- 
duced, the  second  (a)  being  sometimes  retained,  but  more  frequently 
rounded  to  6. 

e.  Original  i — i  or  ii — i  become  * — i,  the  first  vowel  being  re- 
duced. 

/.  Original  i — ti  or  ii — il  become  ' — ti,  the  first  vowel  being  re- 
duced. 

2.  The  feminines  of  these  stems  are  generally  made  by  the  addi- 
tion of  n >  the  vowel  of  the  first  radical  becoming  §*wa. 

92.    Nouns  with  One  Long  and  One  Short  Formative  Vowel 

1.  6ip1p /or  Utal];    nb)}J  Eternity;   ^a^^  Treasury;   np^}  (for 

'osay)  Making;  HE^DI  (/<w  02^01*1)  Creeping, 

2.  lb^)pforkm];   y^)i<  Enemy;  b^)n  Pilot;   "^H^  Priest;  ^y'^ 

Going  forth;  fc^IDI  Creeping;  Tj^H  Walking,  etc. 

3.  lbtD)p  for  i-mi];  2i1V  ^^^^^'  0^9^'^'    b^^^  Pox. 

Remark.— [^to^'p    M    Wt^l];     ^to'»p    Smoke;     ^)n^\^  Nile; 
E'lO'^p  Nettle. 

A  fourth  class  includes  nouns  with  a  naturally  long  vowel  in  the 
penultima,  and  an  originally  short  vowel  in  the  ultima. 

1.  Original  d — a  become  6 — §,;  here  belong,  besides  some  substan- 
tives, all  n*'?  ?al  active  participles,  and  also  the  ^fal  act.  part.  fem. 

(in  n or  n  _  )  of  strong  forms.    The  vowels  do  not  change  before 

a/-fixes  of  gender  and  number. 

2.  Original  k — ^i  become  6 — e;  here  belong  a  few  substantives,  and 
all  strong  J^U  participles;  also  those  feminines  of  the  form  H/pp- 

3.  Original  il — ^a  become  ii — L 

Remark. — ^There  are  a  few  nouns  with  an  originally  long  vowel 
in  both  penult  and  ultima;  the  former,  however,  is  probably  long  in 
compensation  for  an  omitted  D^ge§-f6rte  (§  30.  2.  c). 


§  93]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  161 

93.    Nouns  with  the  Second  Radical  Reduplicated 

1.  [bCDp  for  Pttal];    ^''X  ^o^rt;    n3£^  Sahhath;    ^3D  Burd^; 

tJ-  t-  t-  t- 

nE^3%  ne^a*'  'Dry  land;  r\^^T\  Sin;  n'llJ*  Magnificence. 

T       T     -  V    jr    -  T     T        -  VJV    ~ 

Remark.— 3j;i  Thief;  n2CD  C'oo/fc;  E^'in  AHificer;  ^^T)  Jealous, 

T-  T-  TT  tJ- 

2.  [^Epp/or  kattil];  ^j^Q  SAoo<,  roc?;  tjf'^n  To  consecrate. 

Perverse;     Hi^S    Clear-^ghted;      ^SPI  -M^cwf;     H/IK  Fo%; 
nilt^  Blindness. 

4.  a.  [^CSp  =  kattil];  see  examples  under  1.  R.  above. 

b.  [^CDp  =  kittal /rom  lj:att41];  *^3{<  Husbandman;  1.  R.  above. 

T     ).  T       • 

c.  [!:>tep  =  ytt61];  ^\21^  Hero;  ^"O^  Drunkard;  llBa  Sjpar^ 

row. 

5.  [^^EDp];  n^li?  Great;  y^JjaJJ  Sfron^;   p^J^^  Righteous;   "^Q^ 

Fettered. 

6.  6lCDp];  TID^;  Pillar;  b)2^  Childless;  V\in  Merciful. 

7.  [^^JSp];  T)J3/  Learner;  D^DHJ  Consolation. 

Remark.— yj|p£?  Abomination;    ^)^^  Idol;    n^y  Pi'War;    ^!|aB 

Unclean  Thing. 

A  fifth  class  includes  nouns  whose  second  radical  is  reduplicated. 
This  doubling  intensifies  the  root-idea,  giving  it  greater  force  or 
greater  firmness: 

1.  Formations  like  1|:  a  1 1  &  1  are  frequent,  but  with  no  special 
significance. 

Remark. — ^It  is  a  question  whether  nouns  of  this  form  indicative 
of  occupation  have  S  or  a  (see  4.  a  below) ;  the  corresponding  Arabic 
have  a,  yet  some  of  these  have  a  in  the  Construct  state. 

2.  Formations  like  (^attel  are  rare,  except  as  Pi'el  Infinitives 
Construct. 


152  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  95 

3.  Formations  like  k  1 1 1  e  1  are,  mostly,  adjectives  designating  de- 
formities and  faults,  physical  or  moral. 

4.  a.  Formations  like  t  a  1 1  a  1  are,  properly,  nouns  indicative  of 
occupation;  but  see  1.  R.  above. 

h.  The  form  k  1 1 1  a  1  is  the  same  as  i:  a  1 1  d  1  with  the  penulti- 
mate a  attenuated  to  i. 

c.  The  form  k  1 1 1 6 1  is  the  same  as  ^  1 1 1  a  1  with  d  rounded 
to  6. 

5.  Formations  like  J:  a  1 1 1 1  are  adjectives  expressing  a  personal 
quality. 

6.  Formations  like  k  a  1 1  u  1  are  descriptive  epithets  of  persons  or 
things. 

7.  Formations  like  k  i  1 1  u  1  are,  for  the  most  part,  abstracts,  and 
are  often  used  in  the  plural. 

Remark. — ^This  is  a  fovorite  formation  for  terms  designating  or 
characterizing  idolatrous  objects  and  ideas. 

94.    Nouns  with  the  Third  Radical  Reduplicated 

1.  \:^^^  Tranquil;    m^  Grem;    HIX:!  (=^1«J)  Comety;    ^^QJ^ 

Faint;    ^TV^^    Splendor;     y^^T]  Dark;    '?7nJ  Pasture; 

:    -  •    :    -  -II- 

D^DID^^J  Adulteries. 
_. ,_ 

2.  !?h^nD  Full  of  twists;   TJSpSjn  Full  of  turns;   D^P1{<  Od- 

dish; "in^^Jlp  Blackish;  r\)OQO^  Rabble ;  ^r)^0^  Crooked. 

A  sixth  class,  closely  related  to  the  fifth  class,  includes: 

1.  Noun-formations  with  the  third  radical  reduplicated,  the  signifi- 
cation being,  in  general,  the  same  as  when  the  second  radical  is  doubled. 

2.  A  few  words  in  which  the  second  and  third  radicals  are  redupli- 
cated, the  signification  being  that  of  intensity,  or  repetition;  in  the 
case  of  adjectives  of  color,  there  is  a  diminutive  force. 

95.    Nouns  with  ^  and  "1  Prefixed 

1-  i}2^^  Finger;  H^^i^  Fist;  JH^'X  LaMing;  ^TDi<  Violent. 

2.  ina*'  Oil;    E:1p^'»  Pouch;  cf.  the  proper  names  Ori^l^^  nOS^ 


§  96]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  153 

A  seventh  class  includes  nouns  formed  by  prefixing  ^,  or  ^ : 

1.  A  few  nouns  are  formed  by  means  of  a  prosthetic  ^;  this  K  is 
merely  euphonic  and  has  no  significance. 

2,  Nouns  with  a  prefixed  "^  occur  rarely  as  appellatives;   but  fre- 
quently as  proper  names,  where  however  they  are  really  verbal  forms. 


96,    Nouns  with  Q  Preyed 

1-  [b^pDfoT^QpDhbDi^'OFood;  riD^DQ Kingdom ;r\bDii,Q 
Knife;  ?na  (=?n:D)  Gift;  «5fl0  (=t<aiD)  EtU;  hnid 

It-  Jtj-  t  t:-  ,»:- 

(=^^^1D)  Appearance, 

2.  6ipjpp   for  ^Dpp];    jSE^P  DweOing-place;    '^^ID  Desert; 

CODE^D  Judgment;    nDH^O  War;  nnOE^D  WcUeh;  nJDD 
(=^Jpp)  Property, 

3.  l^QpD  for  ^ppl?];    p2nO  Stall;   nnDO  i^ey;   J^|p  Flesh- 

hook;  npmD  Plough;    HD^O  Srrdting;   Efp^Q  (=E^j?10) 
Snare. 

4.  6C?J?P  /or  ^DJ?P];  n3]P  ^ftar. 

6.  6bpo  /or  bc:pD];  ny^No  F»el- 

6.  6topO,  ^topP  /or  ^Dp!?];  niDnp  Wam;  r\)pbD  Booty; 

^iDtD  (Son^;  ^lE^'pp  Stumhling-block. 

7.  6^ppp,  ^^Dpp];   ^nn??  />^^^^^m(7;  "l^'ODD  i^aimV 

8.  iblDDpPl;  C^Q^P  (7an7im^-  ^!|;;jp  5oft;  DHKO  Granary. 

An  eighth  class  includes  nouns  formed  by  prefixing  Q,  the  same 
element  which  is  used  in  the  formation  of  participles.  So  far  as 
concerns  the  vowels  employed  the  following  combinations  may  be 
noted: 

1.  a — h,  the  latter  of  which  is  rounded  from  a.    Feminines  in  H 

and  H-^r-  occur.     In  yQ  stems,  3  is  assimilated;  in  V'g)  stems,  aw 


154  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBBEW  [{  97 

becomes  6;  in  H*'!?  forms,  the  second  a  becomes  ^  (probably  a  con- 
traction of  ay). 

2.  i — k,  the  former  of  which  is  attenuated,  the  latter  rounded  from 
an  original  a;  the  usual  vowel  changes  take  place  in  weak  stems. 

3.  a — e,  the  latter  of  which  is  lowered  from  i;    the  usual  vowel 
changes  take  place  in  weak  stems. 

4.  i — e,  the  i  of  which  is  the  attenuation  of  a  (c/.  3.). 

5.  a — 5,  the  6  of  which  is  lowered  from  an  original  ii. 

6.  a — 6,  i — 6,  of  which  6  is  rounded  from  &,  while  !  is  attenuated 
from  a. 

7.  a — t,  used  only  in  the  formation  of  Hif'tl  participles  (m.). 

8.  a — ti,  not  used  to  any  great  extent. 

For  0-formations  from  bi-literal  roots,  see  §  100. 

97.     The  Signification  of  Nouns  with  Q  Prefixed 

1.  n^HE^D   Destroyer;    ^^32^D   A   didactic   poem   (=  instructor); 

Y^iyD  ^^  ^^  inspires  terror;    ^BO  What  faUs  off,  chaff; 
nQ3Q  Covering. 

2.  bD^D  Food;  n^pbD  Booty;  |np  Gift;  ^)^]J2  Psdm;  '^y^^Q 

That  which  is  small;  DH^ID  ^^^  which  is  remote. 

3.  n^pXp  Knife;  HnDD  Key;  nO^Q  Goad. 

4.  QE^P  Dwelling-place;  13"ip  Desert;  HBID  Altar. 

S*  nDilD  Smiting;  tXl^D  Sickness;  *^2f^D  Straightness ;  nDH/D 

T"-  v:-  T"  tt:- 

War. 
The  letter  D  is  from  ^D  (who)  or  HD  (what),  and  b  used  in  the 

T 

formation  of  nouns: 

1.  To  denote  the  subject  of  an  action;   cf.  its  use  denoting  agency 
in  Pi'el,  Hif'tl  and  Hi^a'el  participles. 

2.  To  denote  the  object  of  an  action,  or  the  subject  of  a  quality; 
cf.  its  use  in  Pii'al  and  Hof'al  participles. 

3.  The  instrument  by  which  an  action  is  performed. 

4.  The  place  (or  time)  in  which  an  action  is  performed. 

5.  The  action  or  quality  which  is  contained  in  the  root. 


§  99]  BY  AN  mDUCTIVE  METHOD  165 

98,    Nouns  Formed  by  Prefixing  J^ 

1. 6Bpn  for  "pepni;  Donn  (?);  3E^in  Tenant;  nnDln 

Reproof;  |0*»pl  5ow<A;  nnlR  Thanks;  rTllH  -^a'"^- 

t):-  -Js'  t:«  tt:-  »!:• 

Hope. 

3.  [^tpj^n  /or  ^pjpni;  yats^n  cA.cA:er.(i  cM;  np^nn  ^^^p 

sleep. 

4.  [^'^ppni;  n^pj^n  i>^>cip/.;  "^npn  ^^oaA:,-  n^^pn  comp/e^e- 

5.  [^^IQpn];    D'^K^nn  Diseases;    D^JPl  Consolation;    n^^^H 

Drought;  HlDVi^.J?  -^^^^^• 
Remark. — 110*1*10  ^^^P  */e^2);    nWE^'n  Deliverance;    11*1X30 

Glory, 

A  ninth  class  of  nouns  includes  those  with  the  prefix  Jl.  This  pre- 
fix is  the  same  as  that  used  in  the  Impf.  3  fem.  It  is  used  in  a  neuter 
sense,  and  is  employed  in  the  formation  of  abstract  nouns,  but  rarely 
of  concrete  nouns.  The  cases  cited  above  exhibit  the  various  forms 
assumed  by  nouns  of  this  class,  as  well  as  the  vowel  changes  which 
take  place  in  formations  from  weak  stems. 

Remark. — Nouns  with  p  prefixed  have  also,  in  the  majority  of 
instances,  the  feminine  ending  H • 

99,    Nouns  Formed  by  means  of  Affixes 

1-  !?D*13  Garden;   ^n3  Iron;    ^t;2;i  Cup  of  a  flower;    ^b*1p 
Ankle;  QtOin  0)  Sacred  scribe. 
f   2.  a.  ))'^r\^Last;  ))^i^'^  First ;  |l*iD{<  Poor;  )]^^^  Most  high. 
h.  r^^p  Gain;  |n^E^*  Table;  n'lp  Offering;  pDi*  Destruction, 


156  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBBEW  [§  100 

c,  )\^t\B  Interpretation;  |^*)£^3  Success;  )*r^)y  Blindness; 
?1n!S2  Confidence;  ))'^2]  Memorial;  |*i2!^J?  Pain;  ))H^ 
Majesty. 

A  tenth  class  of  nouns  includes  those  with  affixes,  7,  Q  and  J: 

1.  Nouns  formed  by  the  addition  of  7  and  Q  are  few,  and  have 
no  special  significance;  they  should  perhaps  be  regarded  as  quadri- 
literals  and  may  reflect  some  foreign  influence. 

2.  Nouns  formed  by  the  addition  of  J  are  numerous,  including 

a.  Adjectives  formed  either  from  a  noun-stem  or  from  a  root. 

b.  Abstract  substantives  ending  in  hn. 

c.  Abstract  substantives  ending  in  on,  rounded  from  &n. 

100.    Nouns  from  Bi-Literal  Roots 

1.  a.  21  Great;  TT)  Tender;  ^^  Weak;  "^Ip  Bitter;  Qpi  Complete; 

1*1/2  Bride;  n^D  Unleavened  bread;  □^B2  Hf^nds, 
D^  Mother;  ^p  Mound;  2^  Heart;  |£f  Tooth;  ^^  Shadow; 
n'lD  Measurement;  H^D  Word;  11^2  Swamp;  n-12  Spoil; 

T    •  T        •  T      •  T    • 

^B{J  His  mother. 

□n  Completeness;  73  All;  pH  Statute;  3"^  -B^ar;  2"^  Mul- 
titude; nSn  Integrity;  nSH  Statute;  D^2  AU  of  them. 

&.  Dp;  D*);  |2;  ?al  act.  ptcp.  of  )"y  and  V'j;  verbs. 
yb  CAaJf;  nin  ^i^ni;  ^lE^'  Ox;  p)^  Leg. 
*^j|  Stranger;  *)J  Lamp;  J^Q  Dead;  y'^  Noise. 
on;  Dip;  niil;  TOD;  M.  Const,  of  ^i;  verbs. 
ni'^S  Understanding;  ^^^  Judgment;  2"'*!  Strife;  ^^^,  H/^Jl 
Joy;  pp  SoH;  H^p  ^^V. 

2.  !?3^^   Wheel;    nnHD  Frightful;    1212  Rvby;   Ipl^  Crown 

of  head;   Th'h\  Skull;     p12p2  Flask;   bpbv    Worthless; 
U"^yr\yp\  Scorn. 


§  100]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  157 

3.  a.  "nOD  Cover;  ^DD  Circle;  ^yo  Evil;  •^yp  Distress;  HSIJ^O 

Desolation;  \yQ  Shield;  H/iD  Itoll;  HilllD  Covering; 
nSlD  Purpose;  n?DD  Highway;  nnriQ  T^^rror;  2DD 
Divan;  n2DD  Covering;  n3£^D  Hedge. 

&•  IlKD  Luminary;  Dl^lQ  ZTetVA^;  DipD  P/oc^;  ^I^D  ferror; 

T  It 

i^l29  Entrance;  nlJ!p  i^^«^;  DlJO  P%^^*  rTllJP  J^a^P- 
5ton(i;  nnlJO  T^^rror;  H^lHO  2>anciny;  p!|aQ  Pillar; 
Hi^l'np    Running;     nDIE^D    Apostasy;     nniJD    ^2e«^- 

nDDo^^^i^*^^;  D\':)Oi^a*^*^^;  n^no^^Kf^;  nno 

Promnce. 
c-  2D1D  Surrounding  (?);  'HDID  Coverer  (?);  1D1D  Removed, 
d'  D*nD  Soundness;  TT^O  Weakness. 

4.  a.  n^nn   Praw^;    n^nH  Beginning;  fliinn  Pawr;   H^DR 

T*:  T«:  T*:  t*: 

Prayer. 
^'  nyQV\  Understanding;  n01"*)n  Offering;  nJlOO  Likeness; 

T  :  T  :  T  : 

nniDR    Z>ea<A;      n^lOn    Exchange;     nOI^H    ^^in; 

T  :  T  :  T  : 

T  : 

5.  nSJn   TFamnsr;    nnJH  P^«^-    r\mr\  cessation;    ^^Xn   T'o 

T  T  -:  T   T  -:  T  -:  •    t 

shine;  Qnn  ^^  raw^;  ^DH  2^^  cat*^^  to  turn. 

6.  |1D1  nJtoJ  Established;  rWpp^  Desolated. 
7-  Dlp^  Being;  3*'*1^  Adversary. 

8.  D^D  i^arf^r;  D^!|t<  PorcA;  Q'^l'JV  iVaA;e(i;  D^J/  A^aM. 

T       \  T  "  T 

9.  DDR  Melting;  HSH  Contempt. 

Under  this  head  are  treated  those  nouns  which  are  formed  upon 
the  foundation  of  two  radicals  and  have  not  progressed  to  complete 
tri-literality  by  actually  writing  one  of  those  radicals  twice  and  vocal- 
izing the  resultant  form  as  a  tri-literal  noun,  e.  g.  7^730.  There 
is  a  relatively  wide  range  of  forms  in  bi-literal  nouns. 


158  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§  100 

1.  Monosyllabic  nouns  of  various  forms: 

o.  Those  with  one  of  the  original  short-vowels  as  the  primary 
form.  The  vowels  i  and  u,  and  occasionally  a,  change  under  the  tone 
to  e,  6  and  h  respectively.  When  affixes  are  added,  the  second  radical 
takes  D&ges-f orte  and  the  stem-vowel  remains  short.  These  all  come 
from  so-called  ^^^  roots. 

6.  Those  with  an  unchangeable  vowel,  which  of  course  is  un- 
affected by  the  addition  of  affixes;  but  a  regularly  is  rounded  to  6, 
except  in  the  ^fal  act.  ptcp.  These  all  come  from  ^Middle-Vowel 
roots. 

2.  Nouns  made  by  reduplication  of  the  bi-literal  stem. 

3.  Nouns  with  the  prefix  Q.    These  assume  several  forms: 

o.  Those  which  in  the  primary  form  have  the  prefix  ma  with  a 
short  stem-vowel.  These  (1)  regularly  change  both  vowels,  mal^al 
becoming  mal^M;  ma^il  becoming  m^kel;  and  makiil  becoming 
m§,kol;  (2)  when  affixes  are  added,  the  second  radical  of  the  stem 
receives  D&ges-f  orte,  the  original  stem-vowel  remains  unchanged,  and 
the  a  of  the  preformative  syl.  is  reduced  to  §»wa  (-r) ;  (3)  those  hav- 
ing a  as  the  original  stem-vowel  generally  retain  it  without  change, 
but  the  preformative  syllable  has  e,  probably  from  an  original  i. 
This  formation  occurs  only  in  the  so-called  y"^  roots. 

b.  Those  which  in  the  primary  form  have  the  prefix  ma  and  a 
naturally  long  stem-vowel.  The  preformative  a  becomes  h  in  the 
absolute  singular  form,  but  is  reduced  to  S'wa  whenever  affixes  are 
added.     This  formation  is  characteristic  of  Middle-Vowel  roots. 

(1)  The  stem-vowel  may  be  either  6  {)),  u  ()),  or  i  (^ ). 

(2)  With  the  stem-vowel  i  (^__),  the  preformative  vowel  be- 
comes e,  either  by  assimilation  to  the  stem-vowel,  or  after  the  analogy 
of  the  Hifll  perfect.  This  is  the  form  of  the  Hif'il  ptcp.  of  V'J? 
and  *^'^y  verbs. 

c.  Those  having  the  prefix  mA,  with  the  stem-vowel  a,  which  is 
rounded  to  a.  This  is  the  form  of  the  Hof'al  participle  of  bi-literal 
verbs. 

d.  A  few  exceptional  forms. 

4.  Nouns  with  the  prefix  p-    These  nearly  all  have  the  feminine 
ending  and  fall  into  two  classes: 


f  102]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  159 

a.  Those  having  i  as  stem-vowel  followed  by  D&geS-forte  in  the 
second  radical  of  the  stem.  The  preformative  vowel  is  reduced  to 
§«wa  upon  the  addition  of  the  feminine  aflfix. 

h.  Those  having  li  as  stem-vowel,  without  a  following  D^ge§- 
forte,  but  with  the  same  reduction  of  the  preformative  a  to  S*wa 
upon  the  addition  of  the  feminine  affix. 

5.  Nouns  with  the  prefix  H.  These  are  few,  aside  from  the  Infini- 
tives of  the  Hif'il,  Hof'al  and  Nif'al  of  bi-literal  verbs  and  are  prac- 
tically all  verbal  nouns. 

6.  Nouns  with  the  prefix  na.  These  are  practically  confined  to  the 
Nif'al  participle  and  Infin.  of  bi-literal  verbs,  in  which  the  a  of  the 
prefix  regularly  is  rounded  to  H  before  the  tone  and  is  reduced  to  §*wa 
when  not  pretonic. 

7.  A  few  nouns  are  made  with  the  prefix  y  (^). 

8.  A  few  bi-literal  nouns  with  affixes  occur,  viz.  (a)  the  affix  am; 
(6)  the  affix  iim.  There  is  room  for  doubt  as  to  the  origin  of  these 
nouns. 

9.  A  few  isolated  formations  appear. 

101.    Nouns  Having  Four  or  Five  Radicals 

1-  yyp^  Scorjnon;  '^2]:\  Treasurer ;  \^^^ri  Sickle;  ^12 ^11  Frost; 

E^'^'P^n  Flint;     E^'ji^S   Concubine;     ^^^^^  Bat. 
2.  \\2in^  Purple;  1^lD}}%^  ^  ^rid  of  cloth;  "Hi^pT]^  Mule. 

1.  Nouns  with  four  radicals  are  comparatively  few;  they  have  no 
special  classification  or  signification. 

2.  Nouns  with  five  or  more  radicals  are  still  fewer,  and,  for  the 
most  part,  of  foreign  origin. 

102.     Compound  Nouns 

1-  riDWD  Anything;  ^V^^2  Worthlessness ;  ^^DO^^  Formerly. 
2.  pny"^37D  King  of  righteousness;  ^H^t2\!J^  ^^^  hears. 

1.  Compound  words,  as  common  nouns,  are  few  and  doubtful. 

2.  Compound  words,  as  proper  names,  are  very  numerous. 


160  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  104 

103,    Nouns  Formed  from  Other  Nouns 

1.  "^^i;  Porter  (cf.  ^^_^  Gate);  D*)3  Vine-dresser  {cf.  D*;)3  Vine- 

yard). 

2.  rj;!5  Place  of  the  fountain  {cf.  pj;  Fountain);   Hl^i'll?  P^oc^  of 

feet  {cf.^:^'^  Foot). 

3.  Vnr\i<  Last  {cf.  *nn{^  After);  1)^1^  Blindness  {cf  y\^  Blind), 

]Ty)b  Coiled,   serpent  {cf.    r\^)^  Wreath);   ^t^ZfT}^  Brazen  {cf. 
HE^rU  Bronze). 

V     J    : 

4.  a.  ">\i;^bp  Third  {cf.  £^^£0;  ''E^^'pn  Fiflh;  etc. 

&.  '^'2i<)D  Moabite ;  "^^^i^  Aramcean ;  'f^^'^^Gershonite;  'J*^^!/ 
Hebrew. 
"^JlDy  Northerner;  ^*^3J  Foreigner;  ''IIS  Villager. 

5.  n^E^t^^l  Beginning;  HID/D  Kingdom;  fllJO^X  Widowhood. 

Nouns  formed  from  other  nouns,  and  not  directly  from  the  root, 
are  termed  denominatives.    The  most  common  formations  are: 

1.  Nouns  with  the  form  of  the  |fal  active  participle,  indicating 
agency. 

2.  Nouns  with  the  prefix  D,  indicating  the  place  where  a  thing  is 
found. 

3.  Adjectives  and  nouns  formed  by  the  affix  J^  or  J (seldom  V\). 

4.  Adjectives  formed  by  the  affix  ^ ;  these  are, 

a.  Ordinals  formed  from  cardinals; 

b.  Gentilics  and  patronymics;  and  a  few  others. 

5.  Nouns  formed  by  the  affixes  J^^ and  ni>  designating  abstract 

ideas. 

104.    The  Formation  of  Noun-Stems 

From  §§  88-103.  it  has  been  seen  that  noun-stems  are  formed, 
1.  Directly  from  the  root: 

o.  By  means  of  vowels  given  to  the  root;   as  in  the  case  of 
(1)  nouns  with  one,  originally  short,  vowel  (§§  89,  100.); 


§  105]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  161 

(2)  nouns  with  one  Originally  long  vowel  (§  100.); 

(3)  nouns  with  two  (originally)  short  vowels  (§  90.); 

(4)  nouns  with  one  (originally)  short  and  one  long  vowel 

(§91.); 

(5)  nouns  with  one  long  and  one  (originally)  short  vowel 
(§  92.); 

h.  By  a  reduplication  of  one  or  more  of  the  consonants  of  the 
root;  as  in  the  case  of 

(1)  nouns  with  the  second  radical  doubled  (§  93.); 

(2)  nouns  with  the  third,  or  the  second  and  third  radicals 
doubled  (§94.); 

(3)  nouns  with  the  entire  root  doubled  (§  100.); 

c.  By  prefixing  vowels  and  consonants  to  the  root;    as  in  the 
case  of 

(1)  nouns  with  X,  H  or  *)  prefixed  (§§95,  100.); 

(2)  nouns  with  Q  prefixed  (§§96,  97,  100.); 

(3)  nouns  with  H  prefixed  (§§98,  100.); 

d.  By  affixing  vowels  and  consonants  to  the  root;  as  in  the  case  of 

(1)  nouns  with  7,  D  or  J  aflSxed,  with  a  vowel  (§§99,  100.); 

(2)  nouns  with  four  or  five  radicals  (§  101.); 

(3)  nouns  compounded  of  two  distinct  words  (§  102.). 

2.  From  other  nouns  (and  called  denominatives),  by  the  various 
means  indicated  above  (§  103.). 

105.     The  Formation  of  Cases 

1.  inO  in  hi<\^)nD  (4:18);    ?|D2;  in  bi<)D\lJ';   UB  in  ^WJS 

(32:32). 
Remark.-YnX-1n"!n  (1:24);   -|j?D  lJ2^    "IBS  ^^2';    IJ^^O 

2.  a.  njsa  (13:14);  Hs''  (13:14);  2 jjin  naix  (20:1);  rhmH 

T     J       T  T.T  VjV    -  T  :j-  T      v:       I      T 

(18:6). 
^.  D'D)^';  D"jn  (29:15);  Q-^Cf^Ef  (31:2) /or SilSam. 


»1  Sam.  1:20  « Num.  24:3,  15.  «  Num.  23:18.  «Ps.  114:8. 

•Ex.  13:21. 


162  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  106 

Very  slight  evidence  of  case-endings  is  found  in  Hebrew: 

1.  The  only  possible  case  of  a  nominative  ending  is  the  {1  in  the 
first  part  of  a  few  proper  names;  as  in  the  examples  cited  above, 
)r\D  =  ^^^  o/;  )12^  =  name  of;  )}Q  =  face  of.  This  is  open  to 
serious  doubt  since  the  words  to  which  ti  is  attached  do  not  function 
as  nominatives  in  these  cases. 

Remark. — An  old  ending  )=d,  appears  in  a  few  forms,  but  its 
origin  and  significance  are  unknown. 

2.  The  accusative  had  the  ending  a  and  appears  only 
a.  In  the  so-called  He  directive  (H ),  which 

(1)  is  used  to  denote  direction  or  motion;  but 

(2)  is  often  used  in  a  weaker  sense  to  designate  the  place 
where,  and 

(3)  in  many  cases  seems  to  be  entirely  without  force. 

h.  In  the  syllables  am  and  6m  (the  latter  by  the  rounding  of  d), 
which  are  found  in  certain  adverbs. 

3.  No  genitive  ending  appears  in  our  texts. 

106,    Affixes  for  Gender  and  Number 

1.  n1«  (1:3);  31Q  (1:4);  Q^i  (1:5);  -l(-?3  (1:5);  j;ipn  (1:6). 

2.  a.  trnOK  (4:23);  1nE^«  (2:24);  Ipima  (4:5). 

T  :     •  :      •  T    :    • 

n'n    (n^n)  (1:25);   in^n  (1:24);   in2Ji  (31:39);    nj"i 
(nrO  (1:26);  nOt^J  (HDE?:)  (2:7).'   " 

T    T  -    :     •  T    T    : 

h.  n"'E'«n  (1:1);    niDl  (1:26);     HDnnO  (1:2);    nE'D"! 
.  (1:21)'.' 

nDSnnp   (3:24);    n^f'TpD   (1:16);     mh   (4:2);    TST}. 
(2:9); 'nnp  (4:11). 

c.   HE'a"'  (1:9);    r\'Qr\2  (1:24);    .TH  (1:24);    nDHX  (2:5); 

TT-  T":  T-  TT-: 

HE'K  (3:4). 

T 

3.  nn«  (1:14);  nijn  (3:7);  nn^ln  (2:4). 

4.  a.  D^i'?X  (1:1);  WTST'  (1:22);  D''D''  (1:14);  DnylO  (1:14); 

v:  •    -  •    T  •   -:     t 

D"':E^(1:14). 


§  107]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  163 

h.  ^:^  (1:2);  ^y^S  (3:5);  ^^^  (4:23);  ^^2  (6:4);  ^^^^  (6:4). 
5.  D"^^^,  whence  "i^^  (1:16);  D^T}3,  (3:6),  but  ''Jlj;  (3:7). 

The  Hebrew  has  two  genders, — masculine  and  feminine;  and  three 
numbers, — singular,  dual  and  plural. 

1.  The  masculine  singular  has  no  particular  indication. 

2.  The  sign  of  the  feminine  singular  is  H-^-    This  feminine  sign 
has  a  threefold  treatment: 

a.  It  is  retained,  with  such  change  of  its  vowel  as  may  be  neces- 
sary, whenever  the  noun  of  which  it  is  a  part  is  in  close  connection 
with  what  follows;  as  when  it  (the  feminine-sign,  p)  stands 

(1)  before  a  pronominal  suffix  (§  108  ); 

(2)  at  the  end  of  a  noun  in  the  Construct  state  (§  107.). 

b.  It  appears  as  ]n (with  laryngeals  J^ )>  ^^  the  formation 

and  inflection  of  many  nouns,  participles  and  infinitives. 

c.  n  gives  way  to  n>  which  then  ceases  to  be  pronounced, 
but  is  retained  orthographically  as  a  mere  symbol  of  final  i,  rounded 
from  a.     This  form  is  the  more  usual  indication  of  the  feminine  gender. 

3.  The  feminine  plural  is  indicated  by  the  ending  p^  {6d  for  ad), 
which  is  unchangeable. 

4.  The  masculine  plural  is  indicated  by  the  endings, 
o.  D^_^  (infi)  in  the  Absolute  state  (§  107.). 

b.  ^^  (^)  in  the  Construct  state  (§  107.). 
Note. — Many  masculine  nouns  have  plurals  in  6^,  and  many 
feminine  nouns  have  plurals  in  im. 

5.  The  dual,  used  chiefly  of  objects  which  go  in  pairs,  is  indicated 
by  the  endings, 

a.  Q^ (ayim)  in  the  Absolute  state. 

b.  ^___  (e)  in  the  Construct  state. 

107.    The  Absolute  and  Construct  States 

1.  n^rib^  (1:1);    D^.pe^n   (1:1);    \^m    (1:1);    nlXn   (1:3); 

j;^pn(l:6). 

2.  Dinn  ^^B  {1:2)  faces^f  abyss;  D^i^^f  Hn  (1:2)  (the)  spirit- 

of  God;  D^OtS^n  y^D*n3  (1:14)  in'{the)-expanse-of  the  heavens. 


164  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  107 

Of  two  nouns  closely  related,  the  second,  in  Latin  or  Greek,  is  in 
the  genitive,  e.  g.,  dominus  domirwrum.  The  same  relation  is  indicated 
in  Hebrew  by  pronouncing  the  second  noun  in  close  connection  with 
the  first.  The  effort  thus  to  unite  the  two  words  in  pronunciation 
as  one  phrase  results  invariably  in  a  shortening  of  the  first  word, 
because  the  tone  hastens  on  to  the  second,  but  involves  also  a  re- 
tention of  some  old  endings  which  hold  their  place  in  the  phrase. 

1.  A  noun  which  is  not  thus  dependent  upon  a  following  substan- 
tive or  pronoun  is  said  to  be  in  the  Absolute  state. 

2.  A  noun  which  is  thus  dependent  on  a  following  substantive  or 
pronoun  is  said  to  be  in  the  Construct  state. 

Note. — It  is  the  first  of  two  nouns,  therefore,  and  not  the  second, 
which  suffers  change. 

3.  n:;h  (4:2),  c/.  n;;h;  nipp  (i:io),  c/.  nij:pp;  n^j;  (3:7),  c/. 
rhv/,  ^n  (42:15),  cf,  ^n;  m/  of.  ny  ' 

4.  n^n  (1:25)  instead  of  H^ri;  Hill  (1:26)  instead  of  flil. 

—  T  -  -      :  T     T 

5.  in^n  (1:24);    ^HDJi   (31:39);    iJ3';    l^i/D^    ^J3  (49:11); 

6.  1JD  (1:2),  c/.  D^^iS;    ^Q^   (3:17),  cf.   D^D^^;    ^OT   (4:11),  cf. 

D^m-,  ^^p  (1:16),  cf.'n^:^p;  ^rj;  (3:7),  cf.  D^rj;. 

Remark.— ^65.,  ^"^Q  (1:11),  Con^^.,  i^ 5  (1:29);  Ahs.,i^'2)i,'^  Const., 
NDa';  Abs.,  H^^  (32:12),  Con^t,  J^-)^  (22:12);  Ms.,  TI^Q 

•T  ••:  |v  .... 

(14:17),  Co7W<.,T]7p   (14:1);  Abs.,  "^^Q,^  Const.,  "^^Q  (5:1); 
Abs.,'^^:^  (37:2),  Con^t.,'^^^^ 

So  far  as  concerns  endings  or  affixes,  the  Construct  state  differs 
from  the  Absolute  in  the  following  particulars: 

3.  Final  n__  (i.  e.,  e  =  ay)  gives  place  to  n_.  (i.  e.,  e  =  ay). 
Note. — Compare  with  this  the  fact  that  in     H' /  verbs,  the 

Imperfect  ends  in  H (^)»  but  the  Imperative  in  H (e). 

» Josh.  15  :  8.  «  Num.  21  :  20.  »  Num.  23  :  18.  «  Ps.  114  :  8. 

»Deut.  33:16.  «Zech.  11:17.  ^  Num.  1 :  3.  »  Deut.  4  :  19. 

» 2  Kgs.  5:5.  w  x  s^m,  2  :  13. 


lOS] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


165 


4.  The  original  form  of  the  feminine  affix  H >  preserved  by  its 

close  connection  with  what  follows,  appears  instead  of  the  later  H • 

5.  The  endings  6  {))  and  i  (^__)  appear  occasionally  in  Construct 
forms,  serving  as  connecting  vowels  binding  the  Construct  to  its  genitive. 

6.  The  affix  ^__  (=ay)  appears  instead  of  the  ordinary  plural  and 

dual  endings  Q^ and  Q^ . 

•  '  j~ 

Remark  1. — ^The  feminine  plural  affix  6^  is  the  same  in  Absolute 
and  Construct. 

Remark  2. — Final  vowels,  other  than  those  just  mentioned,  as 
well  as  final  k  when  followed  by  {^,  and  Segolates  in  the  singular 
(strong  and  laryngeal)  do  not  suffer  change  in  the  Construct  state. 

Remark  3. — ^The  Construct  form  may  best  be  explained  by 
understanding  that  it  is  really  a  constituent  element  of  a  phrase 
which  tends  somewhat  toward  becoming  a  compound  word.  The 
Construct  itself,  therefore  has  no  primary  tone,  the  tone  having 
passed  on  to  the  next  word. 


108, 

The  Pronominal  Suffixes 

[See  Paradigms  A.  and  OJ 
TABULAR  VIEW 

Masc.  sg. 

Masc.  plur. 

Pern.  sg. 

Fern.  plur. 

Absolute 

DID 

D^pID 

HDID 

niDiD 

Construct 

DID 

ipID 

npiD 

niDiD 

Sing.  1  c. 

ipiD 

npiD 

^noiD 

•      T           1 

^ntoiD 

2  m. 
2f. 

3  m. 

?]p1p 

"^PID 

1D1D 

?]^p1D 

T):piD 

VD1D 

T 

TjnpiD 

Tjnpip 

inoiD 

T            1 

?)^ntoip 
•:]^ntoip 
vnlDiD 

3f. 

riDID 

T 

n^DiD 

T        JV 

nnDiD 

T      T            1 

nTitoiD 

T         JV                      1 

Plur.  1  c. 

IJpID 

ilJipID 

i:nDiD 

irntoiD 

2  m. 

DDD1D 

V    :        • 

DD^DID 

DDHDID 

DD^ntoiD 

2f. 
•    3  m. 

DD1D 

IP^pIp 
Dn^DID 

1 

ipnpip 
DnoiD 

T     T            1 

DH^nlDID 

3f. 

'DID 

lO^pip 

jnpip 

jn^ntoiD 

166  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  108 

1.  a.  iro^  (1:11) /or  iin-rD"?;  It  (3:22)  for^r\-T;  i:>^a 

(4:4). 

nrn^  (1:24) /or  riTD^;  nE^"l><  (3:6) /or  ,-!-£'■■'«;  r^^] 
(3:15). 

D-^1p';  Q-anX';  D-S-j-n';  Q-Dl^^;  p^lp';  pa^-' 

TjVp  (3:10);  ^^m  (3:14);  ?]J|-]]  (3:15);  DD^D^  (3:5). 

6-  in-nE'  (23:9);   "n-Jin  (3:16);    ■n-E'"»«  (3:16);   U'D^S 
-"^  ;    I    ••      •  -••  :  - 

(1:26). 
rai*  (2:24);  T|">nX  (4:9);  VHX  (4:8);  HIB  (4:11). 

2.  nnpx  bvi  ""n-iDx  (4:23);  nnsn  *«<  ""nnan  (4:23); 

{npit2^n(4:7)'' 

The  relation  existing  between  a  noun  and  its  pronominal  suffix  is 
really  the  Construct  relation.  The  form  of  the  noun,  however,  is  not 
always  identical  with  that  of  the  Construct,  but  varies  with  the 
position  of  the  tone.  In  this  section  only  the  endings  of  the  noun, 
as  affected  by  the  suffix,  are  treated. 

1.  Masculine  nouns  in  the  singular  take, 

a.  A  connecting  vowel  a 

(1)  in  the  form  of  §l,  before  ^H,  H,  Q  and  J,  the  suffixes  of 
the  3d  person; 

(2)  in  the  form  of  -r,  before  Tj,  Qp,  |p. 

b.  A  connecting  vowel  i 

(1)  in  the  form  of  e  before  ^H  (i^  H'/  stems  and  a  few 
poetical  forms),  T]>  M- 

(2)  in  the  form  of  i  before  all  suffixes  in  the  words  2^^  father, 

T 

nX  brother,  HSD  T^rwuth. 

T 

Remark  1. — Certain  changes  take  place,  viz.,  ^H to  \  H 

to  n f  the  final  vowel  of  the  latter  form  having  been  dropped. 

Remark  2. — Before  T],  QD,  ]D  a  is  deflected  to  e  in  pause. 


» Niun  14  : 1.  «  Deut.  4  :  38.  » 1  Kgs.  2:4.  « Jer.  15  :  9. 

•Ruth  1:9.  "Ex.  35:26. 


§  108]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD  167 

2.  Feminine  nouns  in  the  singular  preserve  before  suffixes  the 
earlier  form  of  the  feminine  affix,  which  is  Il-^j  but  the  ___  when 
standing  in  an  open  syllable  is  rounded. 

Note. — The  feminine  affix  is  followed  by  the  same  connecting 
vowels  as  those  which  occur  with  masculine  nouns  (see  above,  1.  a,  b). 

3.  a.  "iDa;?  (2:23);  lDn"T;  "TJ-M';  rPiQ';  r['>Q12.* 

b.  D.TJB^  (2:25);    DDTi?  (3:5);    )n2^n'  (4:4);   DHrO^' 

(1:21). 

c.  TJtin  (3:14);  ?]tBi?(3:19);  TJIJB  (4:6);  H^JS-' 

d.  VBX  (2:7);  VDIT;  VIB  (4:5);  T'SJ3.» 

r    ~  tt:  tt  tt: 

4.  vriyb'n  (2:21);  vHi'i  (6:9);  ^nh'x';  iJ^niDi^'";  ^ni:3 

(31:26);  irn1J3  (34:9);  rpn'^T';  "^j^niS  (19:12). 
Remark.-Qnl2«^'  and  Dn^nlDt^l^^;  c/.  also  UViW  (25:16); 

3.  The  masculine  plural  has  before  all  suffixes  the  ending  ay,  which, 
in  the  Construct,  appears  in  the  form  of  e.  But  certain  modifications 
in  the  form  of  this  ending  take  place,  due  to  the  character  of  the 
following  consonants: 

a.  The  form  ay  (^__)  appears  unchanged 

(1)  in  the  1  c.  sg.  ^ ,  the  *>  of  the  suffix  having  been  absorbed 

by  the  final  ^  of  the  ending. 

(2)  in  the  2  f .  sg.  T]^_^_,  Tl  being  joined  by  the  helping-vowel  __. 

b.  The  form  ay  (^ )  is  contracted  to  e  (^_J  before  all  plural 

suffixes. 

c.  The  form  ay  0_J)  is  contracted  to  ^^^  (e)  before  71  and  H. 

d.  The  original  form  ay  {'^_^)  loses  ^  and  rounds  a  to  &  before 
(in  changed  according  to  §  44.  4.  c.  to)  ),  the  ^  being  generally  re- 
tained orthographically. 


» Isa.  68  :  2.  *  Jer.  2  :  33.  •  1  Sam.  25  :  35.  « Jer.  2  :  34. 

•  With  -vr-  written  defectively,  instead  of  '>-^.  •  1  Sam.  1  :  18. 

»  Deut.  10  :  12.  «  Deut.  32  :  11.  •  Ex.  7  :  3.  w  Ps.  74  :  9. 

"  Ezek.  16  :  20.  "  Ex.  4:5.  "1  Chron.  4  :  38.  "  Ps.  74  :  4. 


168  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  109 

4.  The  feminine  plural  with  suffixes  has  (1)  J^^,  the  usual  affix  of 
the  fem.  plur.,  (2)  the  masculine  plural  ending  ^ ,  which  is  modi- 
fied in  the  manner  just  described  (see  above,  3.  a-d) ;  and  then  (3) 
the  same  suffixes  as  were  used  with  the  masc.  plur. 

Remark. — Very  frequently  the  suffix  is  attached  directly  to 
l^);  this  is  done  probably  in  order  to  obtain  a  shorter  form. 

109.    Stem- Changes  in  the  Inflection  of  Nouns 

1.  obe^'  but  nD^E'';  iii^D'  but  n'-ij<D';  '2'2b'  but  ninab^ 

■plia'  bvt  n'pina'  and  D''bn3';  n^s'  but  w^i'd-"' 

T  T  :  •  :  (t  T  'j-  T    : 

mr  but  mhii";  -\t2''  but  i-iE^a";  iJt''  but  hide;.'* 

|t  ):•:  TT  't:  tt  tt; 

-QT'  but  "t-131";  |pT»  but  vjpT^";  nyn"  but  nnan.'» 

2.  -in^"  but  1-131^';  Ipr'  ^"'  ■'^pr';  i^n^'  &«<  ninyn.^' 
-QT"  6««  Dnnn^'^  ipi"  but  dd^jdi";  2d'?*  &«« 

3.  nD"n"  fc"*  "inn'";  IP)"  6m<  ip]'';  DH^'  6««  2nv* 

DD^^^  6w<  D3D5^'^  ^pT'hut  Dpn^3.^ 

Remark  1.— T|D2^^5  and  rnt^2,^^  hut  Dpp2^*^  a^<^  D3*lfe^3-*^ 

Remark  2.-npn3  (12:2)  fromri^2;  (1)  nl3n3'^  (2)  11*13^3 
(49:25U3)  n3n3  (28:4). 

Remark  3.— ^^3^8  but  D'^JHS'^  {<!ib''  ^^<  ''Xyb";  DD£^'^'  ^w< 

»  Gen.  15  :  16.       «  Deut.  25  :  15.      «  Gen.  1 :  16.  «  Deut.  28  :  28. 

» 1  Chron.  28  :  9.     «  Gen.  1 :  16.        »  Gen.  15  :  12.  «  Gen.  1 :  21. 

» Ex.  25  :  20.  «>  Gen.  1  :  16.  »i  Lev.  11 :  42.  "  Gen.  3  :  14. 

"  Gen.  2  :  21.  "  Gen.  2  :  23.  "  Num.  18  :  31.  »  Jon.  1 :  3. 

"  Gen  18  :  14.  i»  Gen.  24  :  33.  '»  Gen.  19  :  4.  »  Isa.  24  :  23. 

«  1  Kgs.  7:8.  "  Josh.  21  :  12.  »  Gen.  24  :  30.  "  Gen.  50  :  7. 

»  2  Kgs.  21  :  5.  *•  Gen.  24  :  52.  "  Deut.  29  :  9.  «  Nah.  2  :  8. 

*»  Gen.  18  :  4.  »<>  Gen.  20  :  18.  "  Gen.  19  :  4.  »«  Gen.  24  :  2. 

»»  Gen.  2:11.  »«  Gen.  2  :  12.  »*  Gen.  1  :  6.  »«  Gen.  1  :  20. 

"  Gen,  38  :  28.  »»  Gen.  41  :  35.  »»  Gen.  37  :  22.  *o  Gen.  9  :  6. 

«  Deut.  28  :  28.  *-  Deut.  10  :  16.  «  Gen.  2  :  21.  **  Gen.  17  :  13. 

«  Gen.  20  :  6.  "  Gen.  40  :  19.  «  Ps.  21  :  7.  *»  Gen.  14  :  18. 

«•  Gen.  47:22.  »o  Ps.  119  :  162.  "  Gen.  4  :  14.  »»  Gen.  18  :  25. 
M  peut.  16  :  18. 


§  109]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  169 

The  noun-stem,  if  it  contains  two  changeable  vowels  (§7.  4),  is 
subject  to  change, 

(1)  when  terminations  of  gender  and  number  are  added; 

(2)  when  the  noun  stands  in  the  Construct  relation  with  a  fol- 
lowing word; 

(3)  when  pronominal  suffixes  are  added. 

The  changes  which  take  place  are  due  to  the  shifting  of  the  tone: 

1.  With  affixes  for  gender  and  number  {Absolute) ^  viz.,  H »  V\\ 

D^-^»  U\-^f  and  with  the  light  (§  51.  1.  6)  suffixes,  the  tone  is  shifted 
one  place;  in  which  case, 

a.  An  original  a  or  i,  which  had  become  &  or  e^  before  the  tone 
is  reduced  to  S*wa; 

b.  An  ultimate  tone-Zon^  §,  or  e  is  retained,  since  it  stands  now 
directly  before  the  tone. 

2.  With  affixes  for  gender  and  number  in  the  Construct y  viz.,  ^ , 

Jnl  (also  the  sing.  fem.  H-^-.)*  and  with  the  grave  suffixes  when  at- 
tached to  plural  nouns,  the  tone  is  shifted  tvx)  places;  in  which  case, 

a.  The  penultimate  vowel  being  now  in  a  closed  unaccented 
syllable  remains  short,  but  §.  is  often  attenuated  to  i; 

b.  The  ultimate  vowel  reduces  to  §*wa. 

3.  In  the  case  of  the  Construct  singular  of  masculine  nouns  and 
with  the  grave  suffixes  (DD,  |D)  when  attached  to  singular  nouns, 
the  tone  is  shifted  one  place;  in  which  case, 

a.  The  penultimate  vowel  is  reduced  to  S'wa. 

bi  An  ultimate  tone-long  (originally  short)  &  or  e  gives  way  to  a. 

Remark  1. — While  an  original  a  is  rounded  to  ^  before  71 ,  it 

remains  short  before  Q3 . 

Remark  2. — ^The  principles  here  given  apply  also  to  the  forma- 
tion and  inflection  of  feminine  nouns. 

Remark  3. — J^U  active  participles  and  nouns  of  like  formation 
(92.),  in  whose  inflection  the  final  vowel  becomes  S*wa  before  all 
affixes  (except  T|,  Q2,  )2)»  furnish  an  important  exception  to  the 
principle  stated  in  1.  6  above.  The  difference  in  treatment  is  due  to 
the  fact  that  the  participial  forms  have  an  unchangeable  vowel  in 
the  penult. 
» The  vowel  o,  except  in  w-class  Se^^lates,  is  generally  unchangeable. 


170  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBBEW  [§  109 

4.  a.  ri^D  (14:17)  dbs.;   Tl^D  (14:1)  Const.;  ■^Sp'  abs.;    ISD 
(5:1);  "IJ?r 
h.  ^3^0';  n^ni  (3:15);  lO^a  (1:27);  Ijpba  (1:26);  ^00*; 


6;  ?i-(nr« 


c.  D^D^D  (14:9);  nlD^O';  Dn^^  (33:1);  Dnp3.' 

d.  (TD^D';  IDa:?  (2:23);  tlV"!  (30:26);  Timj'";  TTit^^-Ip." 

e.  ^5^0(17:16);  DD^iy^  ^^1^"-  D?^?'lp" 

/•  D''J1p"6«<  D"'J1p";  D^Jno";  Dnna  (43:16). 

5.  a.  T]in^  T]1n  (1:2),    nplD  (41:48);    niD".   HlD   (25:11), 

"•'nlO  (27:2),  rnlO^";   n^2  (17:12),  n"'2  (12:15),  ^^''2 
(15:2),1n"'3  (12:17). 

6.  an  (24:25),  n3"1  (6:5),  D^31  (21:34);  QK  (3:20),  iQK 
(2:24),  DnbS";  p'n  (47:22),  Dj?n  (47:22),  D^pH", 
Him- 

6.  nit  (2:5)  6trf  nip  (14:7),   nllE'",  nC^";    nJS   (not  in 

«»e).  D"':S  (32:31),' 1JS  (6:13),  6«/lJS  (1:2),  D.T'JS  (9:23). 

4.  Sepolatestems  (§90.)  deserve  particular  attention: 

a.  The  form  assumed  in  the  absolute,  viz.,  /CDp  from  ^^p, 
7I0D  /'■o^  /CDD»  ^COD  /^om  7C0D>  remains  unchanged  in  the  Con- 
struct  singular  of  words  with  strong  consonants  or  laryngeals. 

b.  In  the  singular  before  all  suffixes  the  noun  takes  the  primary 
form  (§  90.);   a  is  sometimes  attenuated  and  ii  regularly  becomes  6. 

c.  Before  the  plural  affixes  (absolute)  a  pretonic  k  appears,  and 
the  primary  vowel  becomes  S«wa. 


»  2  Kgs.  5  :  5. 

« 1  Sam.  2  :  13. 

» 2  Sam.  19  :  44. 

«  Ex.  32  :  33. 

•  Lev.  25  :  37. 

•  Deut.  15  :  14. 

J  Cant.  6  :  8. 

•  Ps.  73  :  14. 

» Isa.  7  :  16. 

10  Deut.  12  :  17. 

"  Deut.  12  :  26. 

»  Deut.  12  :  6. 

»  Lev.  22  :  15. 

»  Ezek.  20  :  40. 

»  Dan.  8  :  6. 

«  Hab.  3  :  4. 

"  Deut.  33  :  11. 

18  Judg.  16  :  29. 

i»  Josh.  2  :  13. 

»  Isa.  53  :  9. 

«  Jer.  16  :  3. 

"  Deut.  4  :  6. 

S3  Ex.  13  :  10. 

"  Neh.  12  :  29. 

»  Ruth  1 :  2. 

§  110]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  171 

d.  In  the  plural  before  light  suffixes  the  pretonic  &  is  retained. 

e.  In  the  plural  Const,  and  before  grave  suffixes  the  k  disappears, 
and  the  primary  vowel  is  retained,  though  sometimes  in  attenuated 
or  deflected  form. 

/.  In  the  dual  the  form  is  generally  that  which  is  found  in  the 
plural  (see  c),  sometimes  that  used  in  the  sing,  before  suffixes  (see  b). 

5.  a.  Nouns  from  bi-Uteral  roots  (§  100.)  of  the  Middle- Vowel 
class  have  monosyllabic  forms  with  6,  ^  and  i  everywhere  except  in 
some  absol.  sing,  forms  in  which  )  and  *>  appear  as  middle  consonants. 
Cf.  a  similar  development  of  diphthongs  to  consonants  in  English 
bower  from  older  bur;  dowel  from  older  dowl;  fire,  often  pronoimced 
fiyur,  from  older  fyr. 

b.  'Aym  Doubled  (y^^)  Segolate-stems,  before  affixes  of  gen- 
der and  number,  and  before  suffixes,  take  D^geS-forte  in  the  second 
radical,  the  preceding  vowel  remaining  short. 

6.  L§,med  He  (H^^)  nouns  ending  in  n__  lack  this  before  affixes 
and  suffixes  beginning  with  a  vowel;  the  tone-long  k  of  the  first 
radical, 

a.  Is  retained  when  it  would  be  pretonic,  but 

b.  Yields  to  S'wa  in  the  Construct  (sing,  or  plur.),  and  when  it 
would  be  ante-pretonic. 

110,     Classification  of  Noun-Stems 

1.  y-iN,  iDp,  -ip3,  ->i?i  Dx.  nip.  ns,  =inn- 

2.  -Qi,  Di«.  lE'a.  ipi,  1D3,  33^,  mc;,  Dii?. 

T        T  T    T  T        T  J  I   ••  T  "      T  T    "  V    T  ^ 

3.  Db'W'  2:>.  np:!,  n3i2^,  obiji.  Dsz^p.  nnpy. 

4.  bna,  TDX.  K^DJ,  -inx,  niKD,  d^dt^. 

T  •         T  •      T  T  T  I  '      " 

5.  2n3,  -I^On,  "1133-  "IIBi?,  DID,  ')W.  p,  D-1- 

For  purposes  of  inflection,  nouns  may  conveniently  be  divided  into 
five  classes: 

1.  The  first  class  includes  the  so-called  Segolates,  nouns  which 
originally  had  one  changeable  vowel  (§90.); 

2.  The  second  class  includes  nouns  which  have  two  changeable 


172 


ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW 


[§m 


vowels;  here  belong  stems  which  had  originally  the  vowels  a — a,  a — ^i, 
a— u,  1— a,  etc.  (§  91.). 

3.  The  third  class  includes  nouns  which  have  an  unchangeable 
vowel,  whether  by  nature  or  position,  in  the  penult,  and  a  change- 
able vowel  in  the  ultima  (§  92.). 

4.  The  fourth  class  includes  nouns  which  have  a  changeable  vowel 
in  the  penult,  and  an  unchangeable  vowel  in  the  ultima  (§  93.). 

5.  The  fifth  class  may,  for  convenience,  include  all  nouns  of  what- 
ever origin,  the  vowel,  or  vowels,  of  which  are  unchangeable. 


111.    Nouns  of  the  First  Class 
1.     STRONG   AND   LARYNGEAL   STEMS.— TABULAR  VIEW 


m&lk 
iking) 

sifr 
{book) 

(holiness) 

Sg.  abs. 

*9 

^19 

const. 

i?9 

-1DD 

^1\? 

1.  8Uf. 

^3^0 

"•IBp 

'Pl\> 

gr.  8uf . 

Q??^o 

:  :     • 

°??^1f? 

PI.  abs. 

D^D^P 

DnDD 

DT*1)^ 

const. 

..  J    - 

^1.BP 

'Pl^ 

1.  suf. 

-  T     : 

-  1    : 

'^19 

gr.  suf. 

D?^1SP 

op^e'lj? 

Du.  abs. 

(feet) 

(two-fold) 

(loins) 

'd'       t       T 

const. 

^■^n 

'^^■Q 

n&T 
(0  youth) 

(perpetuity) 

pfl'i 

(tcorlt) 

Sg.  abs. 

"1^; 

n«jj 

^VS 

const. 

"IJ?; 

nw 

^J?'? 

1.  suf. 

nyj 

VP 

'"^m 

gr.  suf. 

°?1J?J 

V   -:   :   • 

^ii'JM 

§111] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD 


173 


PI.  abs. 

n&'r 
(a  youth) 

iperpetuitu) 

D^na: 

pO"! 
(work) 

const. 

nji^J 

^nv^ 

'k^ 

I.  suf . 

^")V^ 

-    T  : 

^bys 

gr.  suf. 

Du.  abs. 
const. 

(sandals) 

DD^bj?B 

(noon) 

Dnna 

•  ^-t;  it 

REMARKS 

(For  general  remarks  concerning  the  inflection  of  Segolates  see  {  109.] 

1.  Instead  of  the  original  pure  vowel  -v,  there  appears  everywhere 
in  w-class  stems  the  deflected  vowel  -?-  (6),  the  latter  always  represent- 
ing the  former  in  closed,  as  distinguished  from  sharpened,  syllables. 

2.  Instead  of  simple  S'wa  as  a  reduction  of  the  original  u  in  the  pi. 
abs.  and  the  pi.  with  light  suffixes,  a  compound  S'wa  (-tt)  is  generally 
found. 

3.  In  the  laryngeal  stems,  -=r  and  -tt  before  -r-  become  -^  and 
-T-  (6). 

NOTES* 
1.  In  reference  to  the  a-class  stems,  it  may  be  noted  that, 

a.  In  pause  the  a  generally  becomes  k  ( Vlt),^  though  sometimes 

-AT 

e  remains  (DTp)^>' 

b.  In  such  forms  as  Hp^  (1:11),  J^^JB  (16:12),  the  K  is  to  be 
treated  as  a  full  consonant. 

c.  In  many  forms,  the  original  a,  before  suffixes  and  before  the 
dual  ending,  is  attenuated  to  i  ("TI^T)-* 

d.  In  a  few  a-class  stems,  especially  'Q  laryngeal,  before  suf- 
fixes, e  (-T-)  stands  under  the  first  radical  instead  of  the  primary  a 


1  Under  "Notes"  there  are  given  the  more  important  variations  from  the  para- 
digm-forms. 

» Gen.  1 :  29.  »  Gen.  2:8.  *  Ex.  23  :  18.  «  Gen.  2  :  20. 


174  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  lU 

e.  In  a  few  plurals,  like  D^J^DE^**  D^i^E^H*  pretonic  -?-  does 
not  appear. 

/.  There  are  a  few  forms,  especially  '7  laryngeal,  which  make  a 
Construct  like  J^tpp  instead  of  i;£}p  (c/.  i;**)]).^ 

2.  In  reference  to  z-class  stems  it  may  be  noted  that, 

a.  In  a  few  cases,  -v-  (e)  stands  under  the  first  radical  instead  of 
the  original  -r-  (nij;,'  "h^^)'^ 

3.  In  reference  to  w-class  stems  it  may  be  noted  that, 

a.  The  6  is  sometimes  retained  before  suffixes  (^"^iin)-* 

h.  The  writing  ^f-  (6)  is  sometimes  found  as  a  substitute  for  -rr 

•        t|.t 

4.  Segolates  with  the  vowel  under  the  second  radical, 

a.  In  some  cases  have  the  usual  inflection  (HlIlDti^  jrom  33E^*)»^ 
h.  In  others  treat  this  vowel  as  unchangeable  (^3t«^]).^ 
c.  In  still  others  preserve  it  by  an  artificial  doubling  of  the 
final  consonant  before  affixes  (D^Bi^D)-^ 

2.   Vj;,  ^"j;,  n"^  AND  j;"j;  stems.— tabular  view 


Sg.  abs. 

mo 

nn     ns      D^^ 

Di? 

P" 

const. 

niD 

nM     ns  D>  Di 

Q^ 

■po 

1.  suf. 

^r\\a 

^OM    ^ne     ^i?"i 

^s« 

?n 

gr.  suf. 

:       1             V     :    1"        V    :     :  v             v    :   - 

D?i?i? 

°?pn 

PI.  abs. 

D^niD 

.     ..             .  T    :                   •   - 

niGK 

D^pn 

const. 

^niD 

^0'!                   ^!?: 

nisK 

^pn 

1.  suf. 

^nia 

in^]             ij3^ 

^nisx 

^^^ 

Du.  abs.  D^JJ^J^  D^'^'n^   D^'SS         D'^iE^' 

const.  •Ji^j;     '^^in^     *>S3  ''JIE^ 


1  Num.  11:7.  2  Ex.  18  :  4.  » 1  Kgs.  12  :  28.  « Isa.  52  :  14. 

•  Ex.  30  :  36.  «  Gen.  19  :  33.  '  Zeph.  3:3.  » Ps.  109  :  8. 


§  111]  BT  AN  JNDUCTIVE  METHOD  176 

REMARKS 

1.  The  absolute  forms  of  Middle-Vowel  stems  are  perhaps  develop- 
ments from  diphthongal  forms  which  were  the  basis  of  both  Absolute 
and  Construct  forms;  maud  or  mawdf  e.  g.,  becoming  mo^  and  m§,we^; 
bayt  or  baiO  becoming  both  bdyid  and  bed;  cf.  the  analogous  case  of 
the  Middle-Vowel  Pi'el  forms. 

2.  In  ''*lp,  the  -r-  is  a  reduction  of  the  original  -^,  while  i  =  ly, 
the  third  radical  with  a  helping  vowel;  the  i  of  B  in  ^^"^S  is  an 
attenuation  of  the  original  -=",  while  the  -n-  of  QD^'^S  is  a  deflec- 

V   :    :  V 

tion  of  a. 

3.  In  y^  stems,  the  original  vowel,  a,  i,  u,  is  generally  changed 
in  the  abs.  sg.;  but  before  affixes  the  second  radical  is  doubled  and 
the  original  vowel  retained,  though  6  is  rarely  found  for  u. 

NOTES 

1.  In  reference  to  Middle-Vowel  stems,  it  may  be  noted  that, 

a.  Full  tri-literal  forms  sometimes  occur  in  the  plural  (□*' /^H)** 
and  before  suffixes  and  He  directive  (nn^3)-^ 

b.  Stems  t^'J?,  {e.  g.,  E^i^-|' =  i^^l  |i^a*=JKa)  are  a- 
class  Segolates,  the  a,  lengthened  to  a,  becoming  6;  these  also  will 
be  included  in  the  fifth  class. 

2.  In  reference  to  H' /  stems,  it  may  be  noted  that, 

a.  Forms  like  ^^'Q  become,  in  pause,  ^*^B,^  the  S  being  a 
deflection  of  the  original  a. 

b.  Inflected  forms  like  '^I^C^/  11*1^2:^'/  D'^lb^.^  Hl^'^l^?*' 
D^'i^Da'^  for  D^'^na,  occur;  cf.  also  forms  like  nD2/'  inh"'; 
these  are  some  of  the  irregular  forms  assumed  by  H' /  stems. 

3.  In  reference  to  ^"^  stems,  it  may  be  noted  that, 

a.  While  15^^  stands  even  in  Abs.,  Q^^*  stands  even  in  Const. 

b.  Forms  like  ^H  have  Const,  like  ^T\^^ 

c.  -^  is  often  attenuated  to  -^  {7ir\B^^ M  "HnS)- 

1 1  Kgs.  15  :  20.  « Ex.  28  :  26.  »  Gen.  3:15.  *  Gen.  4  :  2. 

»Eccl.  2:5.  'Ps.  30:7.  ^Jer.  22:21.  s  Num.  11:  31. 

•  Judg.  14  :  5.  Ml  Chron.  12  :  8  "  Ezra  10  :  1.  "  Gen.  1  :  2. 

"  Jer.  50  :  6.  "  Gen.  14  :  3.  »  Gen.  42  :  15.  »« Ruth  2  :  14. 


176  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§  112 

d.  Many  fully  tri-literal  forms  are  in  use. 

e.  Yy  forms  like  r]J»{  (='anp)  are  inflected  like  yjj  forms 

T      - 

112.    Nouns  of  the  Second  Class 
TABULAR  VIEW 

d&-v&r  |^S,-x&m        z&-l^In  ^&-$Ir        s^-d^y  *&-mtlV 

(word)  {wise)  {old)  (.court)         (Jield)  {deep) 

sft.abs.      -13-n      opn      |j?j     nan    nit    pD^ 
const.      -)5"n     DDn      ipT     nan    ni?'    pb;; 
i.8uf.      n^n    "•DDn    ""jpT     narj  •  nir 
gr.suf.  Dpnpn  Dpp?n  Dp:pj  npnan  DpiE^ 
PI.  abs.    onnn  D''aDn  D"'jpi  onan  innE']  D"'poy 
const,     nnn    ^pDn    ^jpi    nan     ^ip  ^pD^r 
i.8u£.      nan     ^oDn     ""jpi    naq     n.E^ 
gr.  suf.  DDnan  DD^DDn  dd^jdi  DDnan 

*     ....      >    ..  .  -       ;,    ..|.  .      ...      .. .  - 

{wings)  {loins)  (thighs) 

Du.abs.    D^p^s    D^^^bn  D^T 

const.  ^B^3 

REMARKS 

1.  This  class  includes  all  nouns  with  two,  orig.  short,  vowels. 

2.  While  the  original  penultimate  a,  in  Const,  pi.  and  before  grave 
suffixes,  is  generally  attenuated  to  i,  it  is  retained  unchanged  under 
laryngeals. 

3.  In  i:a-til  forms,  there  appears  in  the  Const,  sg.,  a  instead  of  i, 
because  the  latter  cannot  stand  in  a  closed  accented  syllable;^  in  the 
sg.  with  grave  suffixes,  this  i  is  deflected  to  e. 

4.  The  n ^^^  n 111  the  Abs.  and  Const,  of  H'' /  stems  is  for 

ay;   this  ay  is  entirely  lacking  before  affixes  of  gender  and  number, 
and  before  suflBxes. 


» Gen.  2:7. 

*  This  principle  is  Icnown  as  Pliilippi's  law,  after  the  scholar  who  first  formulated  It. 


§  U3J  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  177 

5.  Many  words  artificially  double  the  last  consonant  before  all 
aflfixes;  the  preceding  vowel  is  then  necessarily  sharpened.  Here 
may  be  included, 

a.  Adjectives  in  6,  ^jy,  Hpi  Um>  etc. 

h.  Nouns  in  &,  PDJl,  the  adjective  form  |COp>  etc. 

NOTES 

1.  The  X-r;-  of  H/  stems  stands  unchanged  even  in  the  Construct. 

2.  Some  words  of  this  class  assume  in  the  Construct  state  a  Segolate 
form,  e.g.,  nHlp^  from  nn3,  ^*1^^  from  TTV;  some  of  these 
words  have  also  the  regular  form  in  the  Const.,  e.  g.,  n23,  both 

n53«andnn3.^ 

3.  In  some  verbal  adjectives  the  e,  lowered  from  i,  is  retained  even 
in  the  Construct  state,  e.  g.,  VSn/  nD2^>*  W"^'"^ 


113,    Nouns  of  the  Third  Class 

TABULAR  VIEW 

«6-l&m 
{jetemity) 

mH-pat            '6-yIv           'fl-Um 
{judgment)        {.enemy)        {blind) 

'6-fin 

Sg.  abs. 

D^lj; 

DSE^p     n:K    ubvi 

mil 

V 

]m 

const. 

Dbii? 

JOiE^P       2:K 

HTh 

|P1N 

1.  suf . 

^pblj; 

^pBE^P      iT« 

im 

■•ISlK 

gr.suf. 

D?0^13? 

DDtn 

V  :  I 

PI.  abs. 

D^pJ>iV 

•    T    :      •                  •    :  1             •    :     • 

Dnn  D"'^DlK 

const. 

ip^ij; 

M'n 

1.  suf. 

'^Yy. 

^iDBpD    ^n^N 

\Tn 

gr.suf.  uyr:h^v  Ds^tDScy'D  dd^d^k         i 

DD^in 

(/on(7s)  (6otance5) 

Du.abs.  D^inp^O  D^'JTi^O 

const.  -JJl^D 


» Num.  34:11.  =  Gen.  24  :  9.  «  Ex.  4  :  10.  «l8a.  1:4. 

»  Ps.  35  :  27.  «  Ps.  35  :  26.  ^  Dan.  12  :  2. 


178  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§113 

REMARKS 

1.  This  class  includes  nouns  with  an  unchangeable  vowel  in  the 
penult;  this  may  be  a  naturally  long  vowel,  or  a  short  vowel  in  a 
closed  syllable. 

2.  The  following  formations  are  included:  ^CO^p,  7C0lp,  /COlp> 
7C9D»  7C3p>  72DD»  /BDj  many  nouns  with  the  third,  or  the 
second  and  third  radicals  reduplicated;  some  nouns  with  J^,  H  and  ^ 
prefixed;  bCpO.  bjpj?p,  ^pj^O,  "PDpp,  ^0^!?.  b^D^F). 
ztDpn*  /CDpRj  many  nouns  formed  by  affixes;  some  nouns 
with  four  radicals. 

The  existence  of  the  form  i;6tdl  from  ^dt&l  is  questioned  by 
many  scholars,  who  trace  such  words  to  a  Icautal  form.  But  many 
proper  names  and  the  taZ  active  participle  seem  to  make  this  form 
secure. 

3.  Original  a  in  the  sg.  Const.,  and  in  the  sg.  with  grave  suffixes  re- 
mains unchanged;  it  is  reduced  in  the  pi.  Const.,  and  in  the  pi.  with 
grave  suffixes. 

4.  An  original  i  in  the  sg.  before  ?|,  Qp,  |p  is  usually  unchanged, 

but  sometimes  is  deflected  to  e;  before  all  other  suffixes  and  before  af- 
fixes it  is  reduced, 

5.  The  !ljfal  act.  participle  of  verbs  H'v  ^^s  the  same  ending 
(n )i  as  was  seen  in  certain  nouns  of  the  second  class,  like  HTE^J 

V    T 

but  its  first  vowel  is  unchangeable. 

6.  Many  nouns  of  this  class  treat  the  ultimate  changeable  vowel 
in  the  manner  described  in  §  112.  R.  5,  i.  e.,  artificially  double  the 
following  consonant,  and  sharpen  the  vowel: 

o.  |S1K(§92.);  p)^  (§99.);  D^fe^D  (§96.);  and  others. 

^-  PO  ])^P  (§  ^^•)'  D1!?1^  (§  ^4-  2);  and  others. 
c.  ^na,  !?Dn5  (§  99.  1.  a);  ^^^  (§  100.  1);  and  others. 
d^  ^"^J^Vj  Dbnn,  D'lnp  (§  lOl.  D;  and  others. 


§114] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


179 


114,    Nouns  of  the  Fourth  and  Fifth  Classes 
TABULAR  VIEW 


g&-(i6i          p&-kid 
gd.      (great)          (overseer) 

'&-nly 
(poor) 

sOs 
(horse) 

DID 

t&l-mjd 
{disciple) 

•   : 

ki-«av 

T    : 

const,  ^na    nipB 

m 

DID 

•    :     - 

3n3 

T   : 

1. 8uf.         i-jips 

V^D 

n^p^n 

^3n3 

T   : 

&.  suf.      DDn^ps 

DDD© 

V    :       1 

V      :     r   :     - 

D33n3 

V    :    IT  : 

PI. 

abs.Di>n-lDn^pS 

^^^M 

D^pID 

Dn^p^n 

D^3n3 

const.  1^113  n;pB 

''^.^^. 

iDiD 

....   - 

^3n3 

••     T   : 

1.  suf.               l-]ipB 

ipiD 

^TP^n 

^3n3 

~     T   : 

gr.  suf.    D^n^'DS  DD":i; 

DD^pIp  DD^Tp^n  i 

D3^3n3 

••   IT  : 

REMARKS  ON  NOUNS  OF  THE  FOURTH  CLASS 

1.  The  fourth  class  includes  nouns  which  have  a  changeable  vowel 
in  the  penult  and  an  unchangeable  vowel  in  the  ultima.  Here  belong 
many  adjectives  like  /^COp  and  ?^CDp  (§  91.  1.  a,  6);  passive 
participles  like  7^J0p  (§  91.  1.  c);  formations  in  which  a  -^j  orig- 
inally in  a  closed  syllable,  has  become  -r-  in  an  open  syllable;  and  a 
few  nouns  ending  in  on  with  a  pretonic  -r-  (99.  2.  e), 

2.  In  a  few  r\"b  stems  with  the  form  b'^CDp  (§  91.  1.  b)  the 
radical  ^,  when  final,  in  the  absence  of  an  affix,  is  absorbed  in  the 
formative  vowel  i;  but  when  affixes  of  any  kind  are  attached,  it  ap- 
pears in  the  form  of  DigeS-forte;   D^^^J^/ 

REMARKS  ON  NOUNS  OF  THE  FIFTH  GLASS 

1.  This  class  includes  those  nouns  which  do  not  suffer  change  of 
any  kind  in  inflection. 

2.  Here  belong  monosyllabic  nouns  like  D1D>  T*!*  1lE^>  with  an 
unchangeable  vowel;  participles  like  Qp  and  HO 5  formations  like 


180  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§115 

^tpp,  b)W'  b^^p^  b)^p  (§  91-  d-f)  which  have  an  unchange- 
able  vowel,  with  a  S*wa  reduced  from  an  original  i  or  u;  formations 
like  b)^pDf  b^^pD.  b)lDpD  (§  96.  6-8);  formations  like 
/''ppn*  71CDpn  (§98'  4,  5);  some  formations  with  the  aflfix 
on  (§  99.  2);  and  a  few  denominatives  (§  103.). 


115,    Feminine  Nouns 
I.    FEMININES  OF  THE  FIRST  GLASS 
TABULAR  VIEW 


(queen) 

(reproach) 

tiir-bJW 
(ruin) 

(statute) 

g<virt 
(mistress) 

Sg.  abs. 

T   :    - 

ns-in 

nann 

T      :  T 

m 

const. 

-   :     - 

nsin 

-      :  V 

nain 

:  T 

n^n 

n-i3a 

1.  suf . 

•   T      :  V 

•    T       :  T 

^nj?n 

:  •    : 

gr.  suf. 

D30?i'O 

DDnsnn  DDnann  DDnpn 

DDmna 

V     :      :  •    : 

PI.  abs. 

T     : 

T  t: 

nipn 

[nii2ai 

T   : 

const. 

•      — 

;    T 

nipn 

(embroidery) 

(cymbals) 

Du.  abs. 

D^nDjp-) 

'  4-  :    '    : 

REMARKS 

1.  The  feminine  ending  is  added  to  the  ground  form,  e  and  6  ap- 
pearing in  t-class  and  w-class  stems  in  closed  syllables;  the  older 
form  J^ appears  in  the  Const,  and  before  suffixes. 

2.  The  pretonic  h  is  found  in  the  feminine  declension  as  well  as  in 
the  masculine. 

3.  Examples  of  weak  feminine  Segolates  and  monosyllabic  nouns 
with    feminine    ending    are    (1)    rTlJ?!    (2)   rTIHEJ,    (3)   H^lj^* 

(4)  m^a,  (5)  nra,  (6)  nsiD,  (7)*  n^^t«,  (s)  n^'n,  (9)  hid, 


115] 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


181 


(10)  nSl*  (11)  ni?n>  of  which  those  numbered  3-6,  8-11  suffer  no 
change  of  stem,  following  the  inflection  of  npH  given  above. 
4.  Just  as   Tl/D  ^s  derived   from   Tl^D,  so   H^^Dil   is   derived 

from  "^^il  by  the  addition  of  J^ »  and  the  deflection  of  a  to  I. 

Before  sufl[ixes  the  original  -=-  is  attenuated  to  i. 


2.    FEMININES  OF  THE  SECOND  CLASS 
TABULAR  VIEW 


(Xighteousness) 

1            {.cry) 

(l/eor) 

(jcrown) 

(tiofence) 

Sg.  abs. 

^pl^ 

"RVJ 

T     T 

^19^-.. 

T  •• : 

const. 

npiv 

^m 

njE^ 

n-iojf 

rih? 

1.  8Uf . 

^npnv 

'Op^,! 

•    T      J 

T    T     ; 

gr.  suf . 

°?0P1V 

°?rip^,i 

V     :  -   : 

' 

PL  abs. 

nipiV 

niJE' 

nliD:? 

const. 

nip")v 

(Hpj)  ' 

nncj;? 

Du.  abs. 

•  J-  T    : 

const. 

^^^V 

REMARKS 

1.  The  same  stem-changes  take  place  before  the  ending  n as 

before  the  plural  endings  (§  109.). 

2.  In  the  Const,  sg.  and  pi.,  as  well  as  before  suffixes,  the  original 
a  of  the  first  syl.,  while  retained  with  laryngeals,  is  generally  atten- 
uated to  1. 

3.  The  §*w&  before  the  endings  0-=-  (Const,  sg.)  and  J^l  (Const, 
pi.)  is  silent,  except  in  laryngeal  nouns  where  it  serves  as  a  helping- 
vowel. 

4.  Before  the  fem.  ending  the  final  ^-^  of  H' /  forms  is  lacking; 
in  this  case  the  a  of  the  first  syl.  is  rounded  or  reduced  according  to 
the  position  of  the  accent. 


182  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§115 

5.  Several  nouns  with  the  form  H^COD  in  the  Abs.  have  O^CDD 
in  the  Const. ;  these  in  the  singular  as  well  as  those  which  have  the 
form  n /CDp  in  the  Abs.,  attenuate  the  original  a  to  i  before  suffixes. 

6.  Nouns  of  the  form  H^COD  frequently  retain  the  -^  in  the 
Construct. 

NOTES 

1.  Forms  like  ka-til  become  ka-tal  when  the  fem.  ending  is  added. 

2.  Forms  like  n'^^f  HDL  HnD*  from  bi-literal  roots  in  which 

t  T  T     T  T      •• 

the  stem-vowel  is  naturally  long,  retain  it  in  the  Const. 

3.     FEMININES  OF  THE  THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CLASSES 
TABULAR  VIEW 

y6-n&lft  gfll-gmt         lj:6-^i-l&e       g«(16-iae      t«hll-iae       m«nQ-^^&e 

(sprout)  {skull)         {killing  f.)     (great  f.)     (praise)  (rest) 

sg.abs.  ripjl""  nblbn  n^CDlp  nbiii  n^nn  nnijo 
const.  nj^Jl^  rh}b\  n^Dip  nVn^  rhm  nrnjjp 
i.8uf.  inDJl"!  "in^sbrnbcDlp  Ti^nn'TiniJo 
gr,  8uf.  DDnpJi-;  Dpn^a^a  DpHiTin 

PI.  abs.  [npm  ni^a^3ni^tDipniynanl>>nnnimjD 
const,     nlpjl^    n)b:h:i  nlVn;i  nl^nn 


REMARKS 

1.  Feminines  in  f^ <^f  the  third  class  arise  in  the  same  manner 

as  those  described  in  §  115,  1.  R.  4,  the  ground-form  generally  hav- 
ing a  in  the  ultima,  though  sometimes  ii. 

2.  As  before,  the  original  a  (or  6  deflected  from  ii)  appears  before 
suffixes. 

3.  The  feminine  participle  most  frequently  assumes  the  form 
n^CDD*  though  H/COD  is  common;  the  form  HH/^  (Gen.  16:11) 
is  of  interest. 

4.  Feminines  of  the  fourth  class  present  no  points  of  difficulty. 


§  116]  BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  183 

116,    Irregular  Nouns 

1.  2{<  Father;  Const.  ^i^Jj^;    with  suf.,  "^^^  {my  father),  TP'Z^, 

in^DX  or  V3t^,  n^3x,  DD*»D«  piur.,  nlD><;  Const,  n{2«. 

2.  riif,  Brother;  Const.,  "intj|;    with  suf.,  "ipi^  {my  brother),  TprHf,, 

nym-,  piur.,  n'^m-.  const.,  in«;  with  suf.,  inx,  T)in«. 

DD"'nX.  etc. 

3.  "inX  (for  ini<.  with  D.  f.  implied)  One;  Const.,  nn4<  (used 

T       V  T        -  -      - 

also  before  |0);    fern.,   HPI^^  (=  mnXX  in  pause,  nHX; 

J     •  -      -  VaV     -  AT     V 

piur.,  D^THi^  Some,  the  same. 

4.  nlnX  Sister;  Const.,  HlllK;  with  suf.,  ''nlriK;  P^ur.  with  suf., 

Tin"'n«;  also  inln«,  DD''nlni<  from  nni<. 

T       :     -  -  -:  V       ••       I    -:  t    t 

5.  \^^i^Man;  piur.,  D'^E^iJ*  (three  times  D'^ty'^'J^);  Const,  "JE^ JK- 

6.  HDX  Maid-servant;  with  suf .,  TlUDi^;  piur.,  nlHD^?;  Const., 

T    T  )   :   IT  -;  T   -: 

7.  nC^ijt  Womxin;  Const,  HE^X  =  'i^t;  with  suf.,  "^niZ^N,  ^RlZ^i^J 

piur.,  D'^E^i;  Const.,  1t£fj;  with  suf.,  y^^X  DiT^t^J- 

8.  ^'*>'2  House;  Const,  H^  3  J  plur.,  Q'^J^S;  Const,  ^p3;  with  suf., 

"    IT 

9.  n  Son;  Const,  "D,"p,  "^^3  (Gen.  49:11),  1J2  (Num.  23:18); 

with  suf.,  ^^2»   t]J3;  piur.,  0^213;    Const,  ^J3;   with  suf., 

^J3,  ?]^J3,  Dn^J3. 

10.  ri3  (for  nJ3,  fem.  of  |3)  Daughter;  with  suf.,  "JpS  (=''0^3 

=''n:i3);  piur.,  nlJ3  (qf.  D'»J3  ^orw);  Const,  nlJ3. 

•   :   -  T  •   T  : 

11.  nn    Father-in-law;  with  suf.,   Tj^^pri;    HlDH    Mother4n4aw; 

T  )       J-       T  T 

12.  D^*J  Pat/;  piur.,  D*)^*';  Const, '>D'»  and  nlO^  dual,  D^'DI^ 

13.  *J^3  Vessel;  piur.,  D*)^3;  Const,  1^3;  with  suf.,  "J^S,  Dn*'^3. 


184  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW  [§117 

14.  D'jp  (plur.)    Water;    Const.,   'JQ,    'ip'jp;    with   suf.,    VD'^D, 

15.  'yy  City;  plur.,  U"^'!^;  Const.,  ^.j;. 

16.  nS   Mouth;   Const,  "^e  (c/.  i^X,  ""nX);  with  suf.,  "^B,  Ti'^Qy 

in^s  or  VB,  n^s,  DD^S;  plur.,  ni^s. 

J.  .        T     J.  «       . 

17.  E'^^n  (/or  E'XI  =  £?«-))  Head;  plur.,  D^E^t*"!  (/<"•  D"'E'«"1); 

Const.,  '»E?{<^;  with  suf.,  5|je^K*1. 

18.  D^'OE^'  (plur.)  Heavens;  Const.,  "JOE^. 


117.    Numerals 

GENERAL 

VIEW 

With  the  Masculine. 

With  the  Feminine. 

Absolute. 

Construct. 

Absolute. 

Construct. 

i 

T      V 

nnx 

T\m 

T\m 

;^ 

D^JEf 

"'J?' 

U^T0 

^nE^ 

5 

T         : 

V    J     : 

T 

E^^E^ 

^ 

nv2-]« 

ny2-j« 

y?*!*^ 

j;?-]« 

5 

T     •    -: 

nE^on 

V  J"   -: 

E^Dn 

••       T 

E^on 

6 

HE^E' 

T 

HE^E^ 

V     J" 

E^E^ 

EfE^ 

7 

nj;nE^ 

ni?3E^ 

i'5!2' 

^'Se' 

8 

njbE^ 

T         : 

njbE^ 

njbE^ 

: 

9 

nvE'n 

ni^E'n 

VE'n 

ve^n 

10 

nnfe^y^ 

n-i.E'i? 

-lE^y 

V     iv 

■lE^j; 

With  the  Masc. 

With  the  Fern. 

-IE?;;  inx 

nn.E';;  nnx 

11 

lE'V 

ipE^y 

nn.E'j^'inE^y 

§  117]                                      BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  186 

^00  nt<o  /«m-;  c-on**.,  4000  D"'D'?i<  nj;3"iK 

n^^D;  P^M  n1^<D  f  n22^»  but  m  later  books, 

SOOU\r\i<D     dual    (for  W,000     i^^^^'^j     13*1^     plural, 

D^nxo)  I  nl^an  (contracted  ni2n) 

500  nli<D  a^^E^  ^0,000  D*;n*2T  i^uai)  aiso  "jriEf 

400  nixp  yanx  nl2n 

^000  P|^J<;  plural,  U^^bv^  30,000  n)^2'l  ^h^ 

2,000  D^B^K  {dual)  40,000  nl^^S^  ^2"!^ 

3,000  D^D^X  HE^'^C;  ^0,000  n1>^3TE^'E^' 


REMARKS 

1.  The    numeral   HD^^   one  is    an   adjective,  standing  after  and 

T       V 

agreeing  with  its  noun. 

2.  The  numeral  □'^Jt^  (fem.  Q^REf,  pronounced  §ta-yim)  is  a 
noun,  used  either  in  the  appositional  or  Construct  relation  with  the 
word  which  it  enumerates,  and  agreeing  with  it. 

3.  The  numerals  from  three  to  ten  are  abstract  feminine  substan- 
tives, used  in  appositional  construction  with  the  noun  which  they 
enumerate.  The  feminine  form  is  used  with  masculine  nouns;  the 
masculine  is  a  shorter  form  used  with  feminines. 

4.  The  numerals  from  eleven  to  nineteen  are  formed  by  uniting 
^f^y  ten  (or  the  feminine  form  H'^E^J!/)  with  the  units;  here  it 
may  be  noted: 

a.  In  eleven,  IHt^  ^^^  HnX  have  a  form  like  that  of  the 
Construct. 

5.  ''HE^J^,  in  the  second  form  of  eleven,  is  to  be  connected  with 
an  Assyrian  word  i^ten  (=one). 


186  ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW  [§  117 

c.  In  twelve,  Q^iEf  is  a  contraction  of  D^J5y*>  and  "'JEf  a 
shortened  form  of  Q^Jt^,  the  contraction  and  shortening  being  due 
to  the  close  connection  of  the  words;  these  forms  cannot  be  called 
Constructs. 

d.  The  feminines  from  thirteen  upward  have  a  shortened,  but 
not  a  real  Construct,  form. 

5.  The  numerals  thirty  to  ninety  are  formed  by  adding  the  masc. 

plur.  ending  Q^ to  the  units,  but  twenty  (D*'*1E^V)  is  the  plural 

of  ten  Op^)- 

6.  The  units  are  added  to  the  tens  by  means  of  1;  in  the  earlier 
books  preceding  the  tens,  in  later  books  following  them. 

7.  The  units  take  the  noun  in  the  plural;  the  tens,  when  before 
it,  take  the  noun  in  the  singular,  when  after  it,  in  the  plural. 

8.  The  numerals  eleven  to  nineteen  take  the  noun  in  the  plural, 
except  in  the  case  of  a  few  very  common  nouns  like  day,  man,  etc. 

9.  The  ordinal  first  is  pE^K^  (c/.  ^^'^,  head), 

10.  The  ordinals  from  two  to  ten  are  formed  from  the  correspond- 
ing cardinals  by  means  of  the  termination  ^__,  another  ^__.  being  in- 
serted between  the  second  and  third  consonants.  Note  that  ''^^^'H 
lacks  the  initial  J<. 

11.  Above  ten,  cardinals  are  used  for  ordinals. 

12.  The  feminines  of  the  ordinals  are  used  to  express  fractional 
parts. 


XIV.    Separate  Particles 

118,    Adverbs 

1.  a.  ^i^  Where?;  ]><  There;  ^  Not;  QEf  There;  ^H  Not, 

"  T  T  - 

h.  n]  Here;  H JH  Hither;  E^?£f  Thrice;  V2E^  S^^n  /i?7ie*. 
<?.  li^D  Very;  V^^  Abroad;  ^5^  Alone;  r\^2D  Within, 

d.  r\2^n  Much;  DB^n  Well;   DSE^'H  ^ar/i/;  nHD  -S^^eetiiYy. 

e.  iDX^^^mZi/;  3to^^^^-  r\lWi<'l  Formerly;  HlK^SJ  ^on- 

derfully. 

/.  j;np  (^j^n'i'np)  tr^^i/^-  n^^p^p  (=n^^p  with  p 

and  7)  Upward;  TVu)  Wherefore? 

:  T  T 

2.  o.  |n  Here  is;  ijjn,  T||n,  UJH.  U2iT\,  D|n.  etc. 
6.  2^1  There  is;  "aE^\  ^J^fi,  DDE''''- 

c.  pK  nere  i«  7io<;  l^y\A,  TIJ^X.  liirX.  DDJ^iX,  etc. 

d.  n'lJ^  Where  is  f;  HS^K,  l^^i^l,  D^«. 

e.  n^i;  Sii7/  ^.;  ^^ili;,  TjHl^,  ^iHl^;,  n^nly,  ijnly,  dhIj;. 

1.  Adverbs,  and  words  used  adverbially,  may  be  briefly  classified 
as  follows: 

o.  Those  which  may  be  called  primitive. 

h.  Pronouns  and  numerals  used  in  an  adverbial  sense. 

c.  Nouns,  either  alone  or  with  a  preposition. 

d.  Infinitives  absolute,  especially  of  Hif 'il  and  Pi'el  stems. 

e.  Adjectives  of  all  formations,  especially  in  the  feminine. 

/.  Words  formed  by  the  composition  of  two  or  more  distinct 
words. 

2.  Certain  adverbial  particles,  involving  a  verbal  idea  and  thus 

187 


188  ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW  [§119 

often  dispensing  with  the  copula,  take  suffixes.  The  suffixes  attached 
are,  in  most  cases,  the  verbal  suffixes.  The  so-called  Nun  Demonstra- 
tive (§71.  2.  c.  (3)  and  N.  1)  is  of  frequent  occurrence. 

119,    Prepositions 

1.  "nntlt  After;    p3  Between;    1j;3    About;    ^rh)]  Besides;    W 

On  account  of;    ^^D    Over  against;    ^^J  Before;    ^y  During, 
until;  7^  Upon;  Qy  With;  nHO  Under,  in  place  of. 

2.  nnrip  From  under;    JD^  Since;  r3"^i<  Till  between;    "J^B^ 

Before;   ^Q^  According  to;  }J?D7  For  the  sake  of;    ^^23  With- 

o^y  w3D  For  lack  of,  without;  T^J^3  During;  '^^S  Accord- 
ing to  measure  of. 

3.  a.  ^r\^  After,  more  often  nHiJI;  with  suf.,  nnJSt,  V^ll^t,  etc. 

b.  '^^  Unto,  poet.,    ^h^;    with   suf.,    ^h^,    T^^hv^,   Dp^|?«, 

c.  p3  Between;  with  sg.  suf.,  ^^2,  Tj^S,  1^2,  (K'H  V^?); 

with  piur.  suf.,  )y:^2.  DD^ra,  aiso  ii^ni:i^3,  Dnij^s- 

^-  D^3D  Around;  with  suf.,  ?]^D^3D>  V3^DD>  also  with  fem. 

•    T  )    .-.       •    :  T      •     : 

rny3D,  ^nb'^ntp,  Dn^nn^ntp,  etc. 

e.  nj;  Unto,  poet.,  *)'-|j;;;  with  suf.,  "il}},  TT^l)},  Vl^. 

f.  ^y  Upon,  poet.,  ^^y;    with  suf.,  ^b^.  T]^^);,  V^j;,   H""^;;, 

?•  nnn  under.-  with  suf.,  "innn,  rnnn,  DH'innn.  onnn; 

cf.  also  the  form  with  Nfln  Demonstrative  ("l^nnH- 

1.  PrefK)sitions  were  originally,  in  most  cases,  nouns;  they  were 
generally  Constructs,  governing  the  following  noun  as  if  it  were  a 
genitive. 

Note. — ^Many  words  in  common  use  as  prepositions  still  retain 
their  origiaal  force  as  substantives. 


§  120]  BT  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD  189 

2.  Prepositional  phrases,  composed  of  two  prepositions  or  of  a 
preposition  and  a  noun,  or  of  a  preposition  and  an  adverb,  occur 
frequently. 

3.  Many  prepositions,  especially  those  denoting  space  and  time, 
\    are  in  reality  plural  nouns;  some  of  them,  when  standing  alone,  have 

the  form  of  the  plural  Construct,  ending  in  ^ ;   before  pronominal 

suffixes,  most  of  them  assume  this  form. 

Note. — ^For    the    inseparable    prepositions,    see     §§  47.    1-5; 

51.  3-5. 

120.  Conjunctions 

1.  1  And;  \^  Or;  T\^  Also;  U^  When,  if,  or. 

2.  ^3  Thatj  because,  for,  when. 

3.  ^5^  That  not;  |S  That  not,  lest ;  ^^^^2  Before  that ;  1E^^^- 

4.  nE^^-^i?,  ^3"^j;,  nc^'x  nnn,  ^3  nnn,  ni?^x  npj;, 

^2  3pJ?»  Because,  since;  ^^^  W^7  ^^  ^^^^  ^^^^'    ^^^^ 
According  as. 

Conjunctions  may  be  classified  as  to  their  origin  as  follows: 

1.  Certain  words  used  only  as  conjunctions,  the  origin  of  which  is, 
in  most  cases,  doubtful. 

2.  Certain  words  which  were  originally  pronouns. 

3.  Certain  words  which  were  originally  substantives,  or  composed 
of  a  substantive  and  a  preposition. 

4.  Prepositions  which,  by  the  addition  of  HE^X  or  ^2,  become 
themselves  a  part  of  a  compound  conjunction. 

Note  1. — In  general  it  may  be  said  that  any  preposition  may  be 
followed  by  ^{^{^  or  ^2,  and  be  used  as  a  conjunction. 

Note  2. — In  many  cases  the  lE^i^  or  ^3  is  omitted,  and  the 
preposition  standing  alone  used  as  a  conjunction. 

121.  Interjections 

1.  r\r\i<,  n{<  ^h!  nj<n  HoI  aha!  DH  Hush!  "^i^  Alas! 

T      -:  T  TV  ~ 

2.  ''I^,  •'In  Woe!   |n,  r\in  Behold!    ni^'l  Lo!    HDH    Come  on! 
n^b  Come  on!  H^'^^ri  Far  be  it!  *»2  /  beseech!  J^J  Pray! 

T      :  T        J-       T  •  T 

Interjections  may  be  divided  into  two  classes: 


190  ELEMENTS  OF  HEBBEW  [§  121 

1.  Those   which   were   originally   interjections,    "natural   sounds 
called  forth  by  some  impression  or  sensation." 

2.  Those  which  were  originally  substantives  or  verbal  forms,  which 
have  become  interjections  by  usage. 


PARADIGMS 


192 


ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW 

Paradigm  A,     The  Personal 


Nominative  of  the  Pro- 
noun or  Separate  Pronoun. 


Genitive  of  the  Pronoun,  or  Suffix 
of  the  Noun  (jpossessive  Pron.). 


With  Nouns 
Singular. 


Sing, 

1.  com.  ^3 Jt<,  in  pause 

J'  IT 

0'Jfr5;'^Ji<»  in  pause 

•AT       w«  -: 


^ my  (prop.  Gen. 

mei). 


3. 


JT      -  T      - 

pause  n^^^ 

T  AT 

:    -  :    - 

m.  J^!|n  he. 
/.  NTl  she. 


s 
^ 


Tj  Tj__,  in 
pause  71 


thy 
(tui). 


in,  1;  in^  1  (ri) 

his  {ejus  and  suus). 
H;  n_;  ri—her. 


T  T 


Plur. 

i.com.  ijnjtji  o^np. 


1J;  i:_;  (U^)  o«r. 


ye. 


3. 


/•ran -in" 

)    ••  T    4" 


<Aey. 


DH;  D_;  10_ 

10'  lb- 1^' 


their. 


With  Nouns 
Plur,  and  Dual. 


my. 


<A3/. 


U^ OWf. 


your. 


lev 


:i 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 

Pronoun  and  Pronominal  Suffixes 


103 


Accusative  of  the  Pronoun,  or  Suffix  of  the  Verb. 


By  itself. 

With  Ndn 
demonstrative. 

\: 

?];  T]-^  in  p.  Tj__,  ?J  ^  1 

thee. 

Tj  JV          tJ ;   JV 

■^:  V  V'1^-^, 

not  found. 

in.  1;  in_  (li).  1;  in_.  *»"». 

:  -V             JV 

j        ("3;  H— ;  f^_  *«^- 

n5_ 

T     JV 

W;  IV;  IV  «*• 

1M^) 

I 

DD;  DD_1 

1  V          V     : 

These  forms 
do  not 

(DH),  D;  D^.  D_^;  D_.  D_-;l 

10^10..- 

them. 

occur. 

(|n),  ];  1 , .  ] .  . :  j ..  '*^- 

194 

ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW 

Paradigm  B.     The 

K:ai. 

HMp&'el. 

HOf&l. 

TTTf'tl 

Middle  O. 

Middle  E. 

nbspnn 

r\b^ph 

T     :   ):    T 

^'Ppn 
n^''C?pn 

nbbp 

P^^PR 

n^iDpnn 

P^P)"?0 

r)^5?p'"i 

nVop 

etc. 

n^^pnn 

n^Bpn 

Pi^Ppn 

"•nyop 

^n^ispnn 

^n^Dpn 

^n'???pn 

Dn^bp 

...      r    1  - 

iVepnn 
DnViDpnn 

i^ppn 

i^''??pn 

jn^iDpnn 
u^Epnn 

u^ppn 

ij^tppn 

etc. 

^ipp^. 

)pp^ 
b^pt^ 

'bpp^ 

b^pX\\ 
b^pm 
bcspnn 
■'Vepnn 

7Dpn 
^^c?pn 

^^c?p^. 

Tppn 

^"'CDpn 

^^^ppn 

t^p\ 

nj^ppn 

i^cppn'; 
nj^Qpnn 

nj^Dpn 

i^icpp! 
nj'pdpn 

i^ppn 
nj^CDpn 

T   :   J-  1 :     • 

i^cppnn 
nj^bpnn 

n:^Dpn 

=i^^Dpn 
nj^bpn 

bapJ 

b^pT\^ 

^^pi 

^'PpJ 

^!?p 

b^pryry 
i^Bpnn 

i^jppnn 
nj^tDpnn 

wanting 

^EPpn 
^^^Dpn 

i^^ppn 
nj^Dpn 

6?3p)yDp 

6'C3pnn) 
^??pri'"' 

"^^P^ 

^i?P 

^EpriP 

^BpD 

^'PpP 

BY 

Strong  Verb 

AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 

195 

Pii'&l. 

PPel. 

NIfSI. 

¥il. 

n^CDp: 

n^Dp 

r      :    lir 

Sff.  3  m. 
3/. 

^)w. 

n^C3p 

i^^^P^ 

I?^iPp 

2  TO. 

n^ep 

n^iDp 

PI^^^P^ 

lii^^p 

2/. 

^n^Dp 

^ri^Dp 

"Ti^^pJ 

^n^pp 

Ic. 

1 

DPi'pbp 

Dn^bp 

6ipp: 
Dn^6pJ 

PL  3  c. 
2  m. 

£ 

U^ESp 

i:^Bp 

lJ:>^i2p: 

l^^i'^P 

2/. 
Ic. 

Sff.  3  TO. 
3/. 

2  TO. 

2/. 

^spn 
b©pn 
'^cppn 

^5p;. 
^spri 

^^cppn 

^??p' 

,^'^P^ 

^Dpn 
^bpn 

^^Ppn 

i^cspi 
nabspri 

^2Dp>? 

'ij'?2?pn 

^i?p^ 
nj^Bpn 

i^Ppi 
n:yDph 

Ic. 

P/.  3  TO. 

3/. 

! 

6©pn 
n:?!spn 

i^Bpn 

i^ppn 
nj^Dpn 

2  TO. 

2/. 

^?p: 

^^p^ 

^!?p^ 

Ic. 

Sff.  2  m. 

2/. 
PZ.  2  TO. 

2/. 

065. 

C07lSt. 

act, 

pass. 

wanting 

b©p 

'^?p 

i^©p 

nj^bp 

^!?pn 
6jppn 

^CDp 

l'?pp 
'■^^r'^'P 

■M 

E 

•pbp 

bQp;^bp 

^isp 

^bp;;yDpn 

7CDp 

S3 
1—4 

^Dpp 

^22pD 

^^P^ 

^Dp 

^l6p 

1 

196 


ELEMENTS   OF  HEBREW 

Paradigm  C,    Strong  Verb 


3  pi.  f. 

3  pi.  m. 

2  pi.  m. 

1  pi.  C. 

3  8g.  f. 

2^E:p 

-        •■.-]: 

=ijn)Dp 
i:n^Dp 

jT  :    -  J: 

irn^Dp 
i:in^£2p 

nbop 
nn^CDp 

T  J-    T  1 : 

n^n^Dp 
n^n^Dp 

nij^ipp 

fr^R 

D^Dp 

DD^pp 

=lj)CDp 

n^CDp 

Cl!?^pi 

Di^£:p^ 

m^epn 

1j)i?P^. 
=)jbDp^ 

jv     :  1 :    • 

UI^CDp^. 

uiVapn 

1   0)P|T. 
nVcDp^ 

nij'Pp"! 
m^Dpn 

d"??)^ 

iJ^Dp 

f?^p. 

°^c?R 

DD^Dpl 
DD^CDp 

V    :     T  |:    J 

^^)?p 

pibtQp 

BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


197 


with  Suffixes 


3  sg.  m. 

2  sg.  f. 

2  sg.  m. 

1  sg.  c. 

in^Dp 

jT    T  1 : 

inn)Dp 

';ri)i?R 
^;n^^p 

^JI^Dp 

^1 

3  m. 
3/. 

2  m. 
2/. 

Ic. 

P/.  3  c. 

2  m. 
Ic. 

S^.  3  m. 
MzW/c  E 

S^.  3  m. 

Epenthet. 
PL  3  m. 
2/. 

1 

i^Dp 

^^^1? 

^^iSR 

^:Jc?p 

1 

jv     :   1 :    • 

'■il^^R' 

^:ibopn 

1 

in^Dj!) 

^*?R 

S^.  2  m.        1 

l^Dp 

^"^^P 

1    ^^=PR 

^^iPR 

'^)9R 

Construct 

•a 

i) 


198 

Paradigm  D.     Verb  PS  ('Q)  Laryngeal 

HSfai. 

Hlf'tt. 

Nlf'il. 

g&i. 

nbavn 

Dnbbjin 

bpJ?J 

n^pj;: 

n^pj?j 

^n^pj;: 

]n^p|;j 

:    J-  ^:iv 

b^yi 
n^p^ 

n^p:; 

n^p:; 

^n^p;; 

i^P^ 
Dn^pij 

jf^i^P^ 
i:^pj; 

iSj.  3  m. 
3/. 

2  m. 

2/. 

Ic. 

PZ.  3  c. 
2  m. 

2/. 
Ic.     ■ 

Sj.  3  m. 
3/. 

2  m. 
2/. 

Ic. 
PI  3  m. 
3/. 

2  m. 

2/. 

Ic. 

5^.  2  m. 
2/. 

P/.  2  m. 
2/.      . 

at*. 
Const. 

act. 
pass. 

1 

T  :   J-    t:  it 

b'^Vn 

njbp:^n 

b^)3i 

^P^D 
^bp:i?n 

^Pi?^ 
ni^pVn 

^pj?n    ^b:s;n 

bpj?n    yDj?n 
"•^p^n   ""^pj^n 

^pj;«    "pbj^x 
i^pi?;^    i^p]?;: 

t  :   ,-    v:  IV         t  :     4    "^i  i- 

n:^p^n  n^yp^n 

1 

6 

wanting 

b^i^r\ 
^^p^n 

i^P^n 
nj^jp^ri 

i^pj?     "i^p;? 
na^p;;^  '"i^ypa 

i 

1 

^cp^D 

b^)SJ) 
^'Pi(n 

b^'QV.)  1 
^P^b 

bW 

^^J!P 

^'PJ!P 

T  'v:iv 

b^v 

4-! 

1 

Paradigm  E,     Verb  *Ayin  ('y)  Laryngeal 


199 


HWp&'el. 


T    -:).T   :     . 
T  :    j-|  T    :     . 


n:^«pnn 

T :   .-It    :     • 
T  :   j"Jt    :      . 

^>^pn: 


••^xpnn 

•    -:J.T   :    . 

nj^Kphn 

^iiipnn 
^KpnD 


po-ai. 


ph^p 

^)^P 
^ph^p 


)y7i^D 


b^pn 
b^ppi 
^b^p^ 
b^p^ 
i'?^p'. 

T  :   J-  ]       : 

i'?{<pn 
n:^i^pn 


wanting 


■ptoD 


Pi'el. 


n^«p 
n'pxp 
n^«p 

"P/'i^^P 
i^^P 


ij^«p 


^*?p'. 
"^^ispri 
b^ppi 
^^«pn 

•    -:|.T    : 

b«p« 

)b^p;, 
ni^^p'n 

T  :   .-JT     : 

=l^^pf!i 
n:^«pn 

T  :   .-It    : 

^><P2 


^^p 

^bvip 

i^^p 
r\:h\Ap 

bi<p 


Nlf&l. 


phi^pi 

^bvip; 

'ph^p^ 

i^^p; 


bxp"! 
^«pn 
b^pp 
^bupp 

•     -:).T  . 

^^^^ 
1^«p; 

n:'?i<p"n 

T  :    .-)t     • 

i^^pn 
n:^xpn 

T  :   J-  )t     • 

^«p: 


^ii^pn 
"■bt^pn 

•    -:).T   . 

i'?^pn 
n:^«pn 

T  :    .-)t     . 

^li^p: 

_^5?pn 


t;u. 


^^P 

rhup 

T    -:).T 

n^«p 

f^i'^p 
'pb^p 

i^«p 

DP^^p 

l^r'^P 
W^«p 


b^p"". 
bi<pp 
b^pp 
'^^pn 

^«p« 

i^^p^ 
n:'?xpn 

T  :   J-  ):     • 

i^«pn 
nj^xpn 

T  :    .-|:     • 

^«PJ 


b^p 
''b^p 

"ib^p 
n:b^p 

T  :    .-|: 

^*^P 

^^P 
bwp 


S^.  3  m. 
3/. 
2  m. 
2/. 
Ic. 

P/.  3  c. 

2  m. 

2/. 
Ic. 

Sy.  3  m. 
3/. 
2  m. 

2/. 
Ic. 
PI  3  m. 
3/. 

2  m. 

2/. 

Ic. 

S^.  2  m. 

2/. 
PZ.  2  m. 

2/. 

abs. 
Const. 

act. 
pass. 


200 


Paradigm  F,     Verb  Ldmed  fy)  J^aryngeai 


HI«p&-eI. 

HlfU. 

PI'el. 

Nifa. 

^&i. 

nppnn 
nncppnn 
nnbpnn 

rjippn 
nn"' c?pn 
nnbpn 

npp 
nmp 
nnsp 

T    :    --  1  • 

nppJ 
nnppj 
z^inpp; 

npp 
nnpp 
nnpp 

Sg.  3  m. 

3/. 
2  m. 

nnDpnn 
"•nnbpnn 

inbpnn 
Dnnppnn 

nnopn 

^nnbpn 

in'^bpn 

Dnnbpn 

nnpp 

^nnbp 

inbp 

Dnnsp 

V    :    -  J« 

^nnbpj 

inpp: 

nnnppj 

nnpp 

^nnbp 

inpp 

Dnnpp 

2/. 

1  c. 
PI.  3  c. 

2  m. 

1 

'nnppnn 
!i:nDpnn 

?nnc3pn 

V    :    -  f:    • 

ijnjppn 

lOCPp 

=i:n^pp 

lf!inpp: 
ijnopj 

jrinpp 
i:npp 

2/. 
Ic.      , 

Sg.  3  m. 
3/. 

2  TO. 

2/. 
Ic. 

nppn: 

nppnn 

nppnn 

"•n^pnn 

n'bpnx 

n^pp! 

n^ppn 

n^ppn 

^n^ippn 

n^bpK 

npp"; 
nppri 
nppn 
^nppn 
nbpx 

npp^ 

nppn 

nppn 

"inppn 

npp« 

npp^. 

nppn 

nppn 

^nppn 

nppN 

1 

inppn^. 

in^Dp! 

inpp"! 

inDp^ 

inpp^. 

H.  3  TO. 

1 

n:nDpnn 

n:nppn 

n:n^pn 

njnppn 

n:nppn 

3/. 

.  inppnn 

in^Dpn 

inspn 

inppn 

inppn 

2  m. 

njnspnn 

^)m^ 

njncDpn 

T   :   J-  1  -    : 

nancopn 

njncopn 

2/. 

nppn: 

n^pp: 

nppj 

nppj 

nppJ 

Ic. 

Sg.  2  m. 

nppnn 

nppn 

npp 

nppn 

npp 

a> 

^nppnn 

'n^ppn 

^npp 

^nppn 

'npp 

2/. 

a 

inppnn 
n:ntspnn 

in^Dpn 
ninhpn 

intDp 
njnep 

inppn 
n:in6pn 

inpp 
njnbp 

P/.  2  m. 

2/-      , 

nppn 

npp 

nbpj 

nlDp 

d 

nppnn 

n^ppn 

npp 

nppn 

nap 

Const, 
ad. 

nppnp 

n^ppD 

nppo 

npp 

1 

npp; 

niDp 

pass. 

Paradigm  G,    1 

^erb  PS  NUn  (T^) 

201 

H6f>Sl. 

HlfU. 

NIf&l. 

K&l. 

bm 

r\b''^r\ 

bm 

r\b^: 

bm 

etc. 

Sg.  3  m. 
3/. 

rh^n 

n^csn 

r\b^: 

2  m. 

nb^n 

rh^r\ 

ph^: 

2/. 

• 

^nb^n 

^ph^n 

in^s: 

regular 

Ic. 

1 

^bm 

• 

PL  3  c. 

2  m. 

S 

2/. 
Ic. 

Sgr.  3  m. 
3/. 

2  m. 
2/. 

b^' 
bm 

bm 
-'bm 

b^m 
b^m 

bm    bm 

bm    bm 

bm 
]b^\ 

n:ibm 

b^m 
)b^^: 

Ic. 
P/.  3  m. 
3/. 

a 

^bm 
mbm 

n^bm 

r\:bm  n:^Qn 

2  m. 
2/. 

b'm 

"     T    • 

■^Qj     ^^: 

Ic. 

%2m. 
2/. 

^DJ         blD 

6 
> 

wanting 

T  :    J-    T    • 

P/.  2  m. 
2/. 

11 

^^n 

1  bi2ir}  1 
1  b)m 

T 

bm 

b^iDn 

••      T      • 

^bJ     rb^ 

ac<. 
pa55. 

b^tsa 

bm 

4.3 

1 

202  ELEMENTS  OP 

Paradigm  H.    VerbPe*Mf  (5<"D). 


HEBREW 

Verb  Pe  Ydd  0"B)»     Para- 


Nif&l. 

j^M. 

Hlf'il  (prop.  '"0). 

?j:ai  (prop.  ^"D). 

Same  as  the  verb 
Pe  Laryngeal. 

-       T 

Same  as  the  verb 
Pe  Laryngeal 

T          J' 

etc. 

^n'?D"'n 

regular 

Dphyn 

:   J- 

b^^n 
b^om 
-^bmn 

bm 

)bm] 

r\:bmr\ 

bm^ 

^ip^: 

^ip^j 

bm 
''bm 

)bm 

T  :     J    v: 

T  :   J" 

T  :   J-    : 

b)m 
bm,  bm 

: 

■ 

bm 

T 

b'lD^D 

BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 

digm  L     Verb  Pe  W&w  (V'B) 


203 


H6f«&l. 

Hlfll. 

NIf&l. 

VM. 

T    :       1 

T    :    J- 

•   :   J- 

Dn^bin 

V  :     -       1 

T         J- 

:  :    - 

Dn^bln 

V  :    -       1 

:  J- 

bm 

nb^s^ 

T  :  4- 
:   :    - 
•   :  J- 

Dnbbi: 

V  :    -      1 
:  J- 

b^] 

etc. 
regular 

Sg.  3  m. 
3/. 
2  m. 

2/. 

1  c. 
P/.  3  c. 

2  m. 

2/. 
Ic. 
S^r.  3  m. 

3/. 
2  m. 
2/. 
Ic. 
PI.  3  m. 

3/. 
2  m. 
2/. 
Ic. 

Sfir.  2  m. 

2/. 
P/.  2  m. 

2/. 

a65. 

C07W<. 

ac/. 
pass. 

1 

n:bbin 

T  :  J- 

njbbln 
njbbin 

T   :   d" 

b^v 

"     T    • 

etc. 
regular 

b^^\     b^l 
^Qin    bm 
be^n    bm 

^a^x    bm 

)b^^l    6p;:. 

n:^b^n  n:ibm 

i^Q^n   )bm 
n:^b^ri  r\:hm 

T  :   J-        •          T  :   J-     •• 

b^     b^: 

■M 

t 

a 

wanting 

n:]bbin 

T  :  J" 

b^\n 
nj^bin 

T  :  J-  T  • 

bob:? 

T  :  J" 

1 

a 

>b4 

N4 

T 

^^DlD 

b:2)^ 

^iS 

1 

204 


ELEMENTS  OP  HEBREW 


Paradigm  K,     Verb 


HI»p&'el. 

H6r&i. 

Hlf'il, 

PO'&l. 

nJDpnn 

r\^^r\ 

riDpn 

mp 

nnEspnn 

T     :   1  -    :     • 

nnppn 

nnppn 

nnsp 

n"'C3pnn 
n''C3pnn 

n^epn 
n^EDpn 

n^2?p 
n^Esp 

^n^^pnn 

in''Dpn 

onv)  ^n^2?pn 

in^sp 

^"Q^^^T^ 

^^pn 

iDpn 

Bp 

Dn^Bpnn 

^^''^p^ 

(Dnv)  Dri''C?pn 

Dn"'CDp 

•jn^Dpnn 
ij^Epnn 

in^epn 
irsDpn 

ir^'CDpn 

lO^ep 

nispn^. 

npp^. 

^^^\ 

•"liSp^ 

HBpnn 

V  1  :    T 

nippn 

niDpn 

nepnn 

nepn 

nt:pn 

nispn 

i^pnn 

^ppn 

^ppn 

•>spn 

HBpnx 

ncDpx 

V  J:    - 

nQp« 

Bpn^. 

iDp: 

icDp: 

1  '••  • 

nrepn'n 

T      JV    ):      T 

nrepn 

nrispn 

iCDpnn 

it:pn 

ic:pn 

lEDpn 

nrspnn 

nrcDpn 

nrDpn 

nj\i?pn 

n^pnj 

nepj 

HQpJ 

'■'^Rr' 

Dpnn,nBpnn 

nepn 

"icsprin 
icspnn 

wanting 

^ppn 
mpn 

wanting 

nj\E)pnn 

^TW^ 

— 

^^p.^ 

ni?pn 

ntepnn 

niDpn 

ntep 

nspnp 

HDpp 

V     )!      T 

LdmM  He  (j-j'^b) 


BY  AN  INDUCTIVE   METHOD 


205 


Pl'el. 

Nlf&I. 

?&i. 

n^p 

n^p; 

n^Dp 

Sj.  3  m. 

nncsp 

nnppj 

^m^ 

3/. 

n\Bp 

T       J-           T     J"  J  :  • 

^'Wr 

2  m. 

n^Qp 

n^cpp^ 

n^Dp 

2/. 

••n^Esp  ,^n^c?p 
=)bp 

"•n^EDp: 
ibp: 

^n^CDp 
i^p 

Ic. 
PI.  3  c. 

1 

Dn^sp 

Dn^Dpj 

Dn^pp 

2  TO. 

in^Ep 

IC^iPpJ 

lO^pp 

2/. 
Ic. 

Sj.  3  TO. 

i^^p' 

HQp^ 

n^pi 

n^pn 

V    JT        • 

HQpn 

3/. 

nispn 

ncppn 

nepn 

2  m. 

•>^pn 

ipjjn 

^Dpn 

2/. 

ni3p« 
isp"! 

ncDpx 

n£Dp« 

Ic. 
Pi.  3  m. 

j 

nr^pn 
'^lispn 

nrjppn 
'ibpn 

'"i^'iPpn 
'ibpn 

3/. 

2  TO. 

nrspn 

n:\!ppn 

n^\^pn 

2/. 

nispJ 

V    1  ,  • 

n^pj 

Ic. 

Sy.  2  m. 

23p  'HCpp 

nippn 

HDp 

s? 

't?p 

^ppn 

^PR 

2/. 

:& 

icsp 

iCDpn 

=lDp 

Pi.  2  m. 

n^^^P 

nrcDpn 

T       JV    |t      • 

T    JV  J : 

2/. 

065. 

nc3p  ,nbp 

nigpn  ,nbp;i 

r(^p 

<s 

niEp 

niepn 

niDp 

const. 

ad. 
pass. 

I- 

nE5p?p 

'■^^pJ 

ndp 

1 

206 


ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW 


Paradigm  L.     Verb 


HI»p8'el. 

po-ai. 

P6'el. 

HSf&I. 

DDipnn 

DDip 

tOCD^p 

Bpin 

HDBlpnn 

n^Dip 

HiDDlp 

nspin 

npplpnn 

npDip 

nppip 

ntepin 

npiplpnn 

:    :   j~     1 

npDip 

ntep=in 

^npplpnn 

^npDip 

"•noipip 

^nlQpin 

iDDipnn 

lap^p 

=iDbip 

lepin 

DPipDlpnn 

Dncpipip 

□npD^p 

Dntopin 

inpDipnn 
iJDCDipnn 

UDipip 

jntepin 
liitepin 

DCDlpni 

o^ipi^ 

CSD^pi 

Dp\,Dpr 

£:Dlpnn 

D^ipn 

Dtplpn 

Dpin 

Dcplpnn 

DDipn 

Dipipn 

Dpin 

^ipsDipnn 

^Dcipn 

^DDipn 

•     :      |.     : 

^Dpin 

Dt?1pn{< 

DDlp^ 

DQlp^5 

cspw 

itDtDipn^ 

i£3t:lp"i 

1^?^P: 

Bpi^ 

njDDlpnn 

T    :   .-      )       :     • 

njtoDlpn 

T    :   .-      )        : 

nJDiplpn 

n^^^pin 

iDCDipnn 

iD£:lpn 

iDDipn 

:      |i     : 

ispin 

n:cpplpnri 

nJDplpn 

njDDipn 

T    :   J-     1       : 

nrispin 

DDlpnj 

DEJipj 

DCDipJ 

DpIJ 

DDlpnn 

CDDip 

"•ptDipnn 
iCDDlpnn 

wanting 

wanting 

njDplpnn 

njipplp 

Diplpnn 

DCpIp 

DDip 

DCDip 

HQE^n  ,^p^r\ 

ocDipnp 

CDCpIpP 

ctpiprp 

Dpio 

BY  AN  INDUCTIVE  METHOD 


207 


'Ayfn  Doubled 

(i?";;) 

Hlfil. 

NIf&l. 

K&l. 

t3pn  r^Dpn 
ntepn 

cop  J  'top  J 
'nispj 
niEpJ 

DDp  ,CDp 

nDipp'/HEp 
niQp 

S^r.  3  m. 
3/. 

2  m. 

ntepn 

ntepj 

ntep 

2/. 

-w 

^ntepn 

^ntep; 

^ntep 

Ic. 

1 

^p^n  ,m\>n 

©p^ 

ICODp  ,1CDp 

PZ.  3  c. 

IS 

Dntepn 

Dntepj 

Dntep 

2  m. 

|nl2Dpn 

jntep 

2/. 
Ic. 

Sg.  3  m. 

,23p.:i  'Bp^, 

jopi 

'?p\CD'pi         Dp^, 

■    23pn 

epn 

CDpn     epn 

3/. 

epn 

CDpn 

CDpn     E:pri 

2  m. 

^tppn 

sQpn 

ippn    ^:spn 

2/. 

^P« 

cop^ 

ep5<      CDp« 

Ic. 

1 

!)tSpi  ,!|23p1 

nr:spn 

isp;. 
nrcDpn 

T       JV     )-       • 

njjppnnrtspn 

PZ.  3  m. 
3/. 

a 

iiDpn 

=iC3pn 

iDpn    iiDpn 

2  m. 

nriDpn 

na"'©pn 

njDpn  nrspn 

T    :    1 J    •           T    JV   1  \   : 

2/. 

^p;i 

Dp; 

^p:i      EDpj 

Ic. 

S^r.  2  m. 

^P'7 

lo^n 

top 

« 

^^PO 

i^pn 

^cpp 

2/. 

> 

2 

isp..O 

i£3pn 

ICDp 

P/.  2  m. 

f3 

n:^^pn 

nr©pn 

nrsp 

2/.      1 
at*. 

»l4 

copn 

t:pn,CDlpn 

CDlCDp 

^pn 

C3pn 

Dp 

con^^. 
act. 

23pP 

CDDp 

£2R; 

Diep 

pass. 

tfi 

208 


Paradigm  M.    Middle-Vowet 


P6iai. 

Polel. 

Hofai. 

Hif'ii. 

^^1p 

^■^V 

bp'^n 

^'pn 

^)'^>[> 

n^^^P 

nbp^n 

n'p^'^n 

etc. 

r>k^^p 

nbpin 

n^^^pn 

rn^^ip 

n^pin 

ni^-ipn 

^n^^ip 

^n^p^n 

^ni^^pn 

i^^ip 

i^pin 

ib^TH 

nn^^V 

Dn^pin 

2ni^"'pn 

jn^blp 

in^P^n 

jni^^pn 

ij^>ip 

i:^p.in 

1^^^'pO 

^^i,T 

b^ip^ 

^pi^ 

b^p^ 

V^ipri 

bVi,^n 

^pw 

L     '■  ' 

Tpn 

etc. 

^^ipn 

^pin 

^'PO 

.  -.  1 , 

i^pin 

*   )  :       I 

'^'pJ? 

^!?^p« 

■^pIX 

"^'P^ 

i^^ip^ 

hpv 

6^p^ 

n:^^'fpn 

T    • J~         1            • 

n^Vpjn' 

nr>^pn  ,nj^p.n 

i^^ipn 

^P'ln 

ib^pn 

nj^^ipn 

T     •   J-          1             • 

nj^p,in 

'"■^^pJ? 

'^".^ipj 

^pij 

■^^P^ 

•p^lp 

^PO 

^^^^P 

' 

'^'PO 

wanting 

6^1p 

wanting 

i^^pn 

nj^)lp 

ni^pn 

bpn 

^^lp 

^pin 

L   '  " 

^^IpD 

^N'^D 

^^ipp 

••      1        ! 

^pio 

r  •• 

Verbs  (Y^  and  V'^) 


209 


Nif'ftl. 

W6\  (}"V)- 

KM  (V'W. 

b\y>^ 

^p 

^P 

^P 

5^.  3  m. 

'^S'P. 
J?^P 

'■"i'P 

3/. 

2  m. 

nibipj 

etc. 

P'^'P 

n^p 

2/. 

^ni^ipj 

'J^^^P 

^nS":) 

Ic. 

ibip^ 

4. 

4 

PZ.  3  c. 

1 

DniVipj 

Dn^p 

Dfii^P 

2  m. 

l^^P 

2/. 
Ic. 

-Sfif.  3  m.    ' 
3/. 

bipri 

^ipn 

'p^pn 

b^pv\ 

2  m. 

^^ij?n 

'^'pJ? 

^^ipn 

2/. 

^lp« 

^'P^ 

^ip« 

Ic. 

t 

iVip^. 

nj^pn 

nj^pn , 

;i^^p: 

nr?ipn 

PI  3  m. 
3/. 

1 

^^ipn 

=)V>pn 

i^ipn 

2  m. 

n^^pPi 

n:^)ipn 

2/. 

^lp: 

^ip: 

Ic. 

(Sgr.  2  m. 

'^ipn 

^^P 

^:)   ■ 

^^^p" 

^^^p 

'bv^ 

2/. 

i^fen 

''^^'^ 

ibip 

PL  2  m. 

^ 

n^!'p 

2/. 

const 

act 

pass. 

s 

^Ipi  ,^1pn 

Vip 

• 

1 

b^p; 

Tp  71p 

bip 

-M 

210 


ELEMENTS  OF  HEBREW 

Paradigm  N,    Verb  Ldmid'Alif  (i^"^) 


Hi»p&'a. 

Hif>n. 

pra. 

Nlf-H. 

KH. 

KDpnn 

x^ppn 

1     ^Sp 
1     «Sp 

«!Pp; 

1      ^W\ 
«^P| 

Sg.  3  m. 

nxQpnn 

T    :    1  -   :     • 

'"i^^^pn 

nj^sp 

T    :  )  • 

n«Qp; 

n{<pp 

3/. 

n^tDpnn 

T       J"  J  -    :    • 

n«bpn 

T        J"  |:     • 

C^??p 

O^bp: 

nt^bp 

T            JT     |t 

2  m. 

nscDpnn 

nxcDpn 

n^bp 

n«bpj 

nt<Bp 

2/. 

1 

^ni^CDpnn 

^nxippn 

'O^isp 

J"  1  :  • 

^n«bp 

Ic. 

1 

=i«bpnn 

iN^bpn 

J*  J  :    • 

it^bp 

1«tppJ 

1«Dp 

PL  3  c. 

DnxiDpnn 

°C^I?R'"' 

Dnxbp 

nrixbp; 

Dnxbp 

2  m. 

jnt^spnn 
yxcspnn 

jni^Dpn 

J"  1  :    • 

jn^iDp 

IC^OP 
U«ipp 

2/. 
Ic. 

Sg.  3  m. 

5<2?pni 

*<'Pp! 

^2?p^ 

*^?p^ 

«ipp": 

«!Dpnn 

x^ppn 

xiDpri 

KCppn 

«bpn 

3/. 

HEpnn 

x^ppn 

«iDpn 

XDpn 

^bpn 

2  m. 

^{<spnn 

^«^cppn 

■'{«5!ppn 

^i^Ppr^ 

^i<(bpn 

2/. 

*i 

^??pp^ 

i^'bpx 

>«!?p^ 

i^bpx 

«Dp« 

Ic. 

1 

ixsp'n^ 

=IX"'Dp.'' 

1«!Dp^. 

i^Pp^ 

=i«bp'^. 

PL  3  VI. 

1 

njxippn 

njxbpri 

nJxcDp'h 

T           JV    1    T      • 

n:Nbpn 

T       jv  )  :     • 

3/. 

M 
H4 

ixspnn 

ik^bpn 

ix^pn 

^^Ppn 

WDpn 

2  m. 

n^xspnn 

n:t<bpn 

n:«spn 

nj^bpn 

n^XDpn 

2/. 

'  ^SDpnj 

'x^'ppj 

'  «'^p^ 

*<??P; 

'  «'9pJ 

Ic. 

Sg.  2  m. 

fr^iDpnn 

^!?pn 

-^2Dp 

«i?pn 

t^ipp 

• 

^«!spnn 

''^"'DDpn 

^ijt^p 

^^Ppn 

'»<bp 

2/. 

1 

i^apnn 

:  1"     :    • 

1^'bpn 

li^bp 

ixppn 

it^bp 

P/.  2  m. 

nji^Qpnn 

njxbpn 

T       jv  f  :    - 

njxbp 

'"i^^bji'i 

nji^bp 

2/. 

i<??pn 

t^Dp 

i^Dpj 

{<top 

«cppnn 

K^ippn 

^2?p 

i^Dpn 

^^i? 

const. 
act. 

i^ispnp 

j^^ppp 

«©pp 

XDp 

i 

i^Dpj 

xiBj:) 

pass. 

1 

& 

INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


[The  references  are  to  sections,  unless  otherwise  indicated.] 


a-class  vowels 7. 

a-class  vowels,  what  they  include 33. 

a,  naturally  long,  where  found 30.  1. 

fi,  pure  short,  where  found 29.  1. 

a,  tone-long,  where  found 31.  1. 

Absolute  and  construct  states 107. 

Absolute  Dual 106.  5. 

Absolute  infinitive 67.  1. 

Absolute  masc.  plur 106.  4. 

Abstract  ideas  expressed 98. 

Abstract  nouns,  formation  of 98. 

Accent  defined 20.  4.  N.  2. 

Accent  in  inflected  words. . .  .20.  4.  N.  1. 
Accent  in  verbs  with  suffixes.  .71.1.  c.  (3). 

Accents 20.-25. 

Accents,  relative  power  of — 24.  2.  N.  2, 

Accents,  table  of 22. 

Accusative,  formation  of 105.  2. 

Accusative  of  Pronoun,  table  of ..  .p.  193. 

Active  Intensive,  pointing  of 62.  2.  a. 

Active  Participle,  J^U 68.  1.  a. 

Active  Verbs 60. 

Adjectives  as  Adverbs 118.  1.  e. 

Adjectives  in  j 99.  2. 

Adverbs 118. 

Adverbs  and  suffixes 118.  2. 

Affix,  feminine 106.  2. 

Affix  ^__ 103.  4. 

Affix  ji  or  ] (seldom  ]n) 103.  3. 

Affixes  for  gender  and  number 106. 

Affixes  of  nouns 99,  100. 

Aflormatives  and  Preformatives 

104.  1.  c.  d. 

Alphabet 1. 

Analysis  of  noun-forms 110. 

Anomalous  form  of  V'Q  verb 

78.  2.  R.  2,  3. 

Apocopation  in  n""?  verbs 82.  5. 

Arabic  Personal  Pronouns. .  .50.  3.  N.  2, 

Aramaic  form  in  J?";?  verbs 85.  1.  b. 

Aramaic  Personal  Pronoims.  .50.  3.  N.  2. 

Archaic  construct  forms 107.  5. 

Article  and  Prepositions 45.  4.  R.  3. 

Article  before  laryngeals 45.  2,  3. 

Article,  The 45. 

Article  with  Dage§ 45.  1. 

Artificial  doubling  in  II.  el.  noims 

112.  R.  5. 

Assimilation 39. 

Assimilation,  how  indicated 39.  3.  N, 

Assimilation  of  n  and  t 39.  2. 

Assimilation  of  J  in  ?"P  S«gol's. .  .89.  2.  b. 


Assimilation  of  S  and  ^ 39.  3. 

Assimilation  of  J  in  ?"9  verbs 78.  2. 

Assimilation  of  J,  exceptions  to.  .39.  3.  R. 

Assimilation  of  Waw,  verbs  V'D 80.  4. 

Assimilation  of  weak  J 39.  1. 

Assyrian  Personal  Pronoun.  .60.  3.  N.  2. 

•AOnah 22.  1,  2. 

'Adnah  and  Siimij: 24.  2. 

'Adnah  and  Sillfil?,  consecution  of. .  .25. 1. 

Attenuated  Vowel-sounds 7.  3.  c. 

Attenuation,  when  it  occurs 36.  4. 

ftyim,  dual-ending 106.  5.  a. 

'Ayin  doubled  Segolate  stems.  .109.  5.  b. 
'Ayin  doubled  verb.  Paradigm  of.  p.  206. 

'Ayin  doubled  verbs 85. 

'Ayin  laryngeal  verbs 75. 

'Ayin  laryngeal  verb.  Paradigm  of  .p.  199. 

'Ayin  Waw  or  Y6d  verbs 86. 

'Ayin  Waw  Segolate  stems ....  109.  5.  a. 
'Ayin  Waw  verb.  Paradigm  of. .  .p.  208. 

'Aiyn  Waw  verbs 86. 

'Ayin  Yod  verb.  Paradigm  of p.  208. 

'Ayin  Y6d  verbs 86. 

Biliteral  nouns 100. 

Biliteral  roots 55.  3. 

Biliteral  Verbs 84-87. 

Breathings 2.  1. 

Cardinals 117.  R.  10.  11. 

Cases,  formation  of 105. 

Causative  passive  stem 59.  6. 

Causative  verb-stems 59. 

Changeable  vowel-soimds 7. 4.  a. 

Change  in  noun-inflection 106. 

Characteristic  long  vowel 30. 

Closed  syllable,  accented 28.  2. 

Closed  syllable,  quantity  of 28.  2. 

Closed  syllables 26.  2. 

Cohortative  Imperative .69.  3. 

Cohortative  Imperfect 69.  1. 

Command,  how  expressed 69.  2.  b. 

Commutation  of  >  into  ^ 44.  1. 

Commutation  of  letters 41.  3. 

Compensation 30. 

Compensative  Dfige§-f6rte 15.  1. 

Compound  S«wa 9.  2. 

Compoimd  §*wa,  forms  of 32.  3. 

Compound  S«wa  and  laryngeals — 42.  3. 
Compound  S^wa  and  laryngeal  verbs 

75.  3. 
Compound  S'wa  and 7  laryngeals... 76.  2. 
Compound  S«wa  In  ';>  laryngeals. .  .75.  3. 

Conjimction  with  verb. 70. 

Conjunctions 120. 

211 


212 


INDEX 


Connecting  vowels 108. 

Consecution  of  accents 24. 

Consecution  of  accents,  table  of 25. 

Consonant  additions  in  inflection  of 

n"'?  verbs 82.  3. 

y'V  verbs 86.  2. 

r'P  verbs 85.  3. 

Consonantal  character  of  n  lost. .  .79. 1. 
Consonantal  force  of  i  or  ^  retained  44.  5. 

Consonants  liable  to  rejection 40. 

Construct,  archaic 107.  5. 

Construct,  dual 107.  6. 

Construct  form  explained ..  107.  6.  B.  3. 

Construct  Infinitive 67.  2. 

Construct  masculine  plural 107.  6. 

Construct  sing.,  stem-changes  of. .  109.  3. 

Construct  state 107. 

Constructs  and  Prepositions 119.  1. 

Contracted  weak  verbs 77.  2. 

Contraction 36.  7. 

Contraction  of  l  or  ^ 44.  3. 

Contraction  producing  long  vowel 30. 

Contractions  of  nouns  w.  suflf.  108. 1.  R.  1. 
Contractions  with  suffixes. .  .71.  1.  c.  N. 

Conversive,  Waw 73. 

Counts  (accents) 22. 1.  d.  4>23.  3. 

Dageg-rfSrte 13. 

Dages-fSrte  after  np 54.  2.  N.  1. 

Dages-f6rte  and  n 42.  2.  N.  1. 

Da^e§-f6rte  as  a  Dages-lene.l3.  2.  N.  1. 

Dage§-f6rte,  characteristic 15.  2. 

Dage§-f6rte,  conjunctive 15.  3. 

Dage§-f6rte,  emphatic 15.  5. 

Dage§-f6rte,  firmative 15.  6. 

Dage§-f6rte,  separative 15.  4. 

Dages-f6rte  firmative  in  nVs 52.  1.  d. 

Dage§-f6rte  implied  14. 3.  nTi  ;  42. 1.  b.,  N. 
Dage§-f6rte  in  IV.  cl.  nouns, . .  114.  R.  2. 

Dage§-f6rte  in  Pe  laryngeals 74.  1. 

Dage§-f6rte,  kinds  of 15. 

Dageg-lene ^ 12.  1. 

Dageg-lene  after  a  silent  S^wE 12.  2. 

Dageg-lene  after  disj.  accents 12.  3. 

Dages  of  the  article  omitted. .  .45.  4.  R.  1. 
DageS  of  Waw  conversive.  .73.  2.  a.  (1). 

DS-rga 22.  2.  22. 

Declension  of  nouns ^88-117. 

Def.  written,  tone-long  vowels  31.  4.  N.  1. 
Defectively  written,  vowels . .  6.  4.  N.  2. 

Defiected  vowel-sounds 7.  3.  b. 

Defiection,  occurrence  of 36.4. 

Defiection  of  preformative  vowel  78.  2,  b. 

Deformities,  nouns  expressing 93.  4. 

Demonstrative  pronoun 52. 

Denominatives 103. 

Dentals  or  sibilants 4.  1. 

Dependence  of  noun  on  noim. .  107.  1,  2. 

Desire,  how  expressed 69.  1.  b. 

Determination,  how  expressed. .  .69.  1.  b. 

Diminutive  idea  expressed 94.  2. 

Direction  expressed 105;  2.  a. 

Disjunctive  accent  and  spirants 12.  3. 

Disjunctive  accents 22. 1 :  23.  2.  a. 


Double  consonants  (j;";;) 85. 

Double  pliiral 108.  4. 

Doubling  in  verb-stem 57.  1.  b. 

Doubling  of  final  consonant  in  III 

cl.  nouns 94.  R.  6. 

Doubling  of  laryngeal  refused 74.  1. 

Doubtful  vowels 7.  2.  N. 

Dropping  of  N  (H''h) 83.  8.  R.  2. 

Dual  niunber 106.  5. 

Dukes 22.  1.  cl.  3;  23.  3. 

6,  naturally  long,  where  foimd 30.  4. 

6,  short,  where  found 29.  4. 

Elision  of  N 43,  1.  R.  2. 

Elision  of  1  and  > 44.  2. 

Emperors  (accents) 22.  1.  cl,  1;  23,  3. 

Emphatic  forms  w.  suffixes.  .71.  2.  c.  (3). 

Endings  char,  of  abs.  and  const 107. 

Endings  of  noims  with  suffixes 108. 

Epenthetic  Nfin 71.  2.  c.  N.  1. 

Epithets  expressed 93.  7. 

Etymology 45-121. 

Euphonic  change  of  6  to  fl. .  .86,  1.  b.  N. 

Euphonic  n___(n"*7) 82.  4.  N. 

Euphony  of  consonants 39-44. 

Euphony  of  vowels 29-38. 

Exhortation,  how  expressed, . .  .69.  1.  b. 
Feminine  ending,  modifications  of,  106,  2. 

Feminine  in  verb 60.  2. 

Feminine  noims 115. 

Feminine  noims  and  suffixes 108.  2. 

Feminine  nouns,  declension  of 115. 

Feminine  nouns,  IV  class 115.  3. 

Feminine  nouns  from  S^,  stems , .  89.  4. 

Feminine  noims  in  n_ 91.  2;  98.  R. 

Feminine  nouns.  III  class 113.  3. 

Feminine  plural 106.  3. 

Feminine  plural  affix 107.  6,  R.  1. 

Feminine  plural  and  suffixes 108.  4. 

Feminine,  singular  sign 106,  2. 

Feminines  with  two  short  vowels ...  90.  2. 

Fifth  class  nouns 114. 

Final  N  and  <i  not  consonants.  ,42.  2.  N.  2. 

Final  N  (verbs  N"V ) 83,  1. 

Final  short  vowel  lost 103,  2,  R. 

Final  vowelless  consonant 14.  1. 

First  class  feminine  nouns 115,  1. 

First  class  nouns 111.  1. 

Foreign  words,  how  formed 101,  2. 

Formation  of  cases, , . 105. 

Formation  of  noun-stems,  table  of 104. 

Formative  vowel  in  Segolates 89.  3. 

Forms  of  letters 3. 

Fourth  class  nouns 114. 

Fractional  parts,  how  expressed  117.  R.  12. 

Fragments  in  J^M  perfect 60.  1. 

Full  vowel  to  follow  doubling 13.  1.. 

Full  writing  in  later  O.  T.  books.  6. 4.  N.  4. 

Fully  written  vowels 6.  4,  N.  2. 

Function  of  consonants 4.3. 

Future  idea  and  Waw 70.  1.  b. 

Gender 106.  3. 

Gender,  affixes  for 106. 


INDEX 


213 


Gender  in  verb 60.  2. 

Gender  of  verb 57.  3.  N.  2. 

General  view  of  strong  verb 72. 

Genitive  case 105.  3. 

Genitive  of  pronoun,  table  of p.  192. 

Gentilics 103.  4.  b. 

G«ra§ayim 22. 1.  14. 

Ger6§ 22.  1.  13. 

Ger6§  with  other  accents 25.  2,  3. 

Grave  suflQxes 51.  1.  a. 

Grave  suflBxes  and  II  cl.  nouns.  .112.  R.  2. 

Grave  suflBxes  and  tone 109.  2. 

Grave  terminations  and  changes ...  60.  4. 

Half-open  syl.,  quantity  of 28. 4. 

Half-open  syUables 26.  2.  N.  2. 

Half-vowel 9.   1. 

Half-vowel  before  T  changed  to  6  in 

pause 38.  1.  N. 

Half-vowel  restored  in  pause 38.  1 

Half- vowel  synonymous  w.  S*w§,. . . . 

32.  3.  N.  1 

Half-vowels 7.  2.  c;  27.  1 

Hatef-P&eab .8. 

^&tef-?:am5§ 8. 

^&tef-S«i61 8. 

He  directive 105.  2.  a. 

He  interrogative 46. 

Helping- vowel. 71.  1.  c.  (3). 

Helping- vowel  in  '^  laryngeals. .  .76. 1.  d. 

Helping- vowel  in  Segolates 89. 

Helping-vowel  with  fem.  ending.  106.  2.  b. 

Hifll 58.5. 

Hif'il  and  HSfai 72.  6.  7. 

Hif'il,  characteristic  of. .  .* 58.  5.  b. 

Hlf'Il  form  with  Waw  conv 70.  3.  R. 

Hif'il  forms.  V"y  verbs 85.  4.  d. 

Hif'Il  Imperative  and  suflf. .  .71.  3.  b.  R.  2. 

Hirn  of  verbs  Pe  Y6d 81.  2. 

Hif'il  with  suffixes 71.  1.  b.  R.  2. 

Hir6t : 8. 

HiepS,*el,  characteristics  of 58.  7. 

Hiflpa,'el  with  suffixes 71.  1.  b.  R.  2. 

HiOpSiai  stem 85.  6.  b. 

HidpSlel  stem. 85.  6.  a. 

Hsrai 58.  6. 

HSfai,  characteristics  of 58.  6. 

Hol6m 8. 

i  in  'Ayin  Y6d  verbs 86.  1.  f. 

I,  from  6,  in  active  perfects 30.  4.  N. 

I,  naturally  long,  where  found 30.  2. 

I  of  Hif'il  before  suffixes 71.  3.  b.  R.  2. 

i,  pure  short,  where  found 29.  2. 

I  -class  vowels 7.  1.  b.  2. 

i-class  vowels,  what  is  included  in, . .  .34. 
Imperative,  aflformatives  of. . .  66.  2.  N.  1. 

Imperative,  cohortative 69.  3. 

Imperative,  how  used 57.  3.  N.  3. 

Imperative  with  suffixes 71.  3.  b. 

Imperatives  of  V'd  verbs 80.  2.  b.  N. 

Imperatives,  inflection  of 66.  2. 

Imperatives,  view  of 66. 

Imperfect,  accent  of 21.3. 

Imperfect,  affixes  of 63.  1.  b. 


Imperfect  (active),  analysis  of 63. 

Imperfect  and  Perfect  with  W&w .  70. 1 .  b. 

Imperfect,  cohortative  and  jussive 69. 

Imperfect,  with  the  form  Spp 64.  3. 

Imperfect,  Hif'il .'. 65.  5. 

Imperfect,  Hi0p3.'el 65.  3. 

Imperfect.  H6f'ai 65.  4. 

Imperfect,  Nifai 65.  1. 

Imperfect  of  n"S  verbs 82.  5.  b. 

Imperfect  of  Middle  A  verbs 64.  1. 

Impf.  of  Middle  E  and  Middle  O  verbs 

64.2. 

Imperfect,  original  stem  of 63.  2. 

Imperfect,  Pe  'A16f  verbs 79.  1,  2. 

Imperfect,  Pi'el 65.  2. 

Imperfect,  Ptt'Sl 65.  4. 

Imperfect  ^f  8,1  (active) .  prefixes  of.  63. 1 .  a. 
Imperfect    IJZai.    weak    and    strong 

verbs  compared 87. 

Imperfect.  Stative.  view  of 64. 

Imperfect,  vowel-additions  to 63.  3. 

Imperfect  with  suffixes 71.  2. 

Imperfect  with  Waw.  form  of 70.  3. 

Implication,  Dage§-f.  omitted  by 

14.  3.  N.  1. 

Implied  doubling  in  ']?  laryn 75.  1.  b. 

Imv.  and  Impf.,  stem-vowel  of,  .63.  2.  a. 

Indefinite  pronoun 54.  2.  N.  5. 

Infinitive  absolute  as  adverb. . .  118.  1.  d. 
Infinitive  absolute,  vowel  of.  .67.  1.  R.  3. 
Infinitive  construct  nS^^....80.  2.  b.  R.  1. 

Infinitive  construct  Pi'§l 93. 3. 

Inf.  const.  J^U,  a  Segolate. .  .89.  4.  N.  1. 

Infinitive  with  suffixes 71.  3. 

Infinitives,  changeableness  of  vowels  of 
67.  2.  N.  1. 

Inf.  const.,  comparison  of 87.  5. 

Infinitives,  view  of 67. 

Inflection 57. 

Inflection,  difference  between  verbal 

and  nominal. 36.  3.  N.  1. 

Inflection  of  nouns 88. 

Initial  i,  not  lost 78.  1.  R. 

Initial  S«wa 10.  1. 

Inseparable  particles 45-49. 

Inseparable  prepositions 47. 

Inserted  comp'd  S«wa  for  euphony 

42.  3.  b. 

Insertion  of  euphonic  vowel 27.3. 

Insertion  of  helping  vowel  (n"*?).  .82.  5.  a. 

Instrument,  expression  of 97.  3. 

Intensity  expressed  by  Pi'el. . .  .59.  2.  a. 
Intensity,  how  expressed  in  noims . .  94.  2. 

Intensive  reflexive  stem 59.  5. 

Intensive  verb  stems 59. 

Interjections 121. 

Interpxmction  and  accent 23.  2. 

Interrogative  particle 46. 

Interrogative  pronoun 54. 

Interrogative    pronoun    hd,    how 

pointed 54.  2. 

Irregular  noims 116. 

Jussive  Imperfect 69.  2. 


214 


INDEX 


Jussive  of  the  Hif •!! 69.  2,  a. 

Jussive  of  n"S  verbs 82.  5.  b. 

Jussive  of  yy  verbs 86.  1.  f.  R. 

KSf  with  the  S«wa 11.  2.  a. 

K'^iv 19.  1,  2,  3,  4. 

Kings  (accents) 22.  1.  cl.  2;  23.  3. 

Labials.  .^ 4.  1;  7.  1.  c. 

Lam6d  'A16f  verb,  Paradigm  of. .  .p.  210. 

Lam6d  'A16f  verbs 98. 

Lam6d  He  stems  and  changes 109.  6. 

Lam6d  He  verb,  Paradigm  of p.  204. 

Lam6d  He  verbs 82. 

LamSd  laryn.  verb,  Paradigm  of .  .p.  200. 

Lam6d  laryngeal  verbs 76. 

Lam6d  Waw  and  Y6d,  see  LS,m6d  He. 

Laryngeal  Verbs 73-76. 

Laryngeals,  peculiarities  of 42. 

Late  Hebrew  and  full  writing. 31.  4.  N.  1. 

L«g&rmeh 22.  1.  15. 

L«g8.rmeh  and  other  accents 25.  5.  N. 

Lengthening,  occurrence  of 36.  7. 

Letters,  classification  of 4. 

Letters,  extended 3.  1. 

Letters,  forms  of 3. 

Letters,  how  written 1.  1. 

Letters,  the 1-4. 

Letters  to  be  distinguished 3.  3. 

Letters  with  two  forms 3.  2. 

Light  suffixes 51.  1.  b. 

Linguals 4.  1. 

Logical  pauses  and  accent. . .  .24.  2.  N.  2. 

Long  and  short  vowel  nouns 92. 

Long  vowel  before  MS,kkef 17.  2. 

Long  vowel-soimds 7.  3.  d;  7.  3.  e. 

Long  vowels 7.  2.  b. 

Long  vowels,  naturally 30. 

Loss  of  n 43.  2. 

Loss  of  J  in  ya  verbs 78.  1. 

Loss  of  vowel  takes  place 36.  8. 

Lowering  of  vowels 7. 

Mahp&x 22.  2.  24. 

Maii:l?ef 17. 

M&ljctef  and  HD 54.  2.  N.  3. 

Mapplt 18. 

Mappilj  in  n  in  verbs 'S  laryn..  .76. 2.  N.  3. 
Marginal  (?:«r6)  readings.  19.  1,  2,  3,  4. 
Masculine  nouns  and  suffixes. . . .  109.  1. 

Masculine  plural 106.  4. 

Masculine  plural  and  suffixes 109.  1. 

Masculine  singular 106.  1. 

Massoretes  and  the  text 19.  1,  2. 

M«'&yy«la 22.  2.  27.  footn. 

Medial  n  (verbs  n"S) 83.  2. 

Medial  consonants  omitting  D.-f . . .  14.  2. 
Medial  first  radical  and  pointing .  74.  3.  b. 

Medial  §«wa 10.  2. 

Medial  Waw  in  V's  verbs 80.  3. 

Medium  consonants 4.  2. 

M6rk& 22.  2.  19. 

MSrka  k«fai& 22.  2.  20. 

MSrka  with  SilltO? 24.  7. 

M6«6g 18. 


M606g  before  compound  §«wa 18.  3. 

Mgegg  before  Makkef 18.  4. 

Mgegg  before  tone 18.  1. 

Mgflgg  before  vocal  S«wa  pretonic. .  18.  2, 

M6e6g  in  n;n  and  n^n 18.  5. 

M6d6g  with  unaccented  __ 18.  6. 

Middle  A  verbs 61. 1. 

MiddleE  V'V  verbs 86.  1.  a.  R. 

Middle  E  verbs 61.  2. 

Middle  E  verbs  and  suffixes. 71.  1.  b.  R.l. 

Middle  O  verbs 61.  3. 

Middle  O  v;?  verbs 86.  1.  a.  R. 

Mil'el 20.  1. 

Milri' 20.  1. 

Modal  idea  intensified  by  nj 69.  3.  R. 

Monosyllabic  nouns 100. 

Moods  in  Hebrew  verb 57.  3.  N.  1. 

Mfinahi 22.  2.  21 ;  25.  5.  N.  6. 

Mfinah  for  M6d6g 18.  N.  1. 

Mfinalj  with  'Aflnalj 24.  8. 

MOnah  with  S«golta 24.  9. 

Musical  notes  expressed  by  accent 

23. 1.  a. 

Names  of  vowels 8. 

Naturally  long   distinguished   from 

tone-long  vowels 30.  7.  N.  1. 

Naturally  long  vowel-sounds 7. 3.  e. 

Naturally  long  vowels 30. 

Nat.  long  vowels  imchangeable  30, 

7.  N.  2. 

Nature  of  vowel-sounds 7.  3. 

Nifai 62.  1.  a. 

Nif'S,!,  characteristics  of 72.  R.  2. 

Nifai  Infinitive  absolute 67.  1.  R.  1- 

Nif'&l  Inf.,  abs.,  'S  laryngeal.  .76.  2.  N.  1. 

Nifai  Participle 68.  2. 

Nif'Sl,  strong  and  weak  compared .  .87.  4, 
Nominal  infiection,  exceptions .  36.  3.  N.  3. 

Nominal  suffix  with  Inf 71.  3.  a.  R.  2. 

Nominative  of  pronoun,  table  of.  .p.  192. 

Nouns 88-1 17. 

Nouns,  as  adverbs 118.  1.  c. 

Noims,  I  class,  tabular  view 111. 

Nouns,  inflection  of 88. 

Noun-stem  formation  of,  table 104. 

Noim-stems 88.  1. 

Noun-stems  classified 110. 

Noim-sufflxes,  table  of p.  167. 

Nouns  and  affixes 99. 

Noims,  changes  in  inflection 109. 

Nouns,  compound 102. 

Nouns  from  other  nouns 103. 

Nouns,  irregular 116. 

Nouns  of  four  or  five  radicals 101. 

Nouns,  plural,  as  prepositions 119. 

Nouns,  II  class,  declension  of 112. 

Nouns  with  D  prefixed 96.. 

Noims  with  one  formative  vowel 89. 

Nouns  with  prefix  n 98. 

Nouns  with  two  vowels  (short) 90. 

Nimiber,  affixes  for 108. 

Numerals 117. 

Numerals  as  adverbs 118.  1.  b^ 


INDEX 


215 


NCln  demonstrative  and  adverbs.  .118.  2. 
Nfln  demonstrative  and  verb  suffixes, 

table  of ^\.T  ; 

Nan  epentlietic  or  demonst.71.  2.  c.  N.  1. 
6,  long,  from  au  or  aw,  where  foimd.  30.  7. 
6.  long  by  obscuration,  where  found.  30. 6. 

6*  of  K^l.  before  suffixes 71.  2.  b.  (1). 

6,  short,  sound,  where  found 29.  5. 

Object  of  an  action  expressed 97.  2. 

Obscuration  of  vowels  (n"S) . .  .82.  1.  d,  e. 
Occupation,  nouns  expressing. .  .93.  5.  a. 
Older  endings  restored  in  verb. .  .71.  1.  a. 

Omission  of  D&ge§-f6rte 14. 

Open  syllable,  accented 20.  2. 

Open  syllable,  quantity  of 28.  1. 

Open  syllables 26.  1. 

Ordinals 117.  R.  9.  10,  11.  12. 

Ordinals,  how  formed 103.  4.  a. 

Organic  formation 4.  1. 

Organic  formation  of  vowel-sounds.  .7.  1. 

Origin  of  vowel-sovmds 7.  3. 

Orthography J~^^- 

Otiant  « 43.  1.  R.  1. 

Palatals 4-  ^^^' 

Paradigm  word  Sjys 58.  2.  a.  N . 

Paradigms  of  verbs PP.  192-210. 

Participle,  feminine 106.  2.  b. 

Participle,  l^U  act.  n"S 82.  R.  5. 

Part.,  l^&i  act.  V'J7 86.  1.  g. 

Participle,  J^U  active,  fem 92.  1. 

Participle,  J^aX  act.,  inflection^of  ^  ^  ^ 

Participles  and  suffixes 71.  3.  b.  N. 

Participles,  formation  of 90. 

Participles,  passive 91. 

Participles,  view  of 68. 

Particles,  inseparable 45-49. 

Particles,  vowels  of.  changed 32.  2.  R. 

Passive  force  of  HiepSl'el 58.  7.  c. 

Passive  intensive,  pointing  of. .  .58.  4.  b. 

Passive  of  ?:8.1 ^^-  ^-  ^' 

Passive  participle,  W^l 68.  1.  c. 

Passive  participles  declined. .  .114.  R.  1. 

Passive  stem,  usual 58.  2. 

Past  idea  and  verb  with  WS,w 70. 1.  a. 

Tm^ ^^\}'l' 

pasta  and  :K:adma  distinguished ....  23.  7. 
P&sOl? ^^'  ^• 

p&e&b V«V'^' 

Paeaij  as  a  helping-vowel 76.  i.  a. 

P&eab-furtive 27.  1. 

PaeSLb-furtive  in  'S  laryngeals. .  .76.  1.  c. 
P&e&^i-furtive  w.  postpos.  accent. .  .23.  6. 

Patronymics 103.  4.  b. 

Pausal  forms,  P"y  uncontracted . .  .85.  2. 
Pausal  forms  with  suffixes. ... 71.  2.  c.  (3). 

Pause -38. 

Pause  and  accent -^a-  ^' 

Pause  affecting  P&e&h-furtive. . .  76^  ^^^ 

Pause,  perfect  in.  with  W.  conv..  .70.^  ^ 


P&zer 22.1.16. 

Pa,zer  and  other  accents 25.  5.  6. 

PeilSf  verb.  Paradigm  of p.  202. 

Pe'Alfif  verbs "^9. 

Pe  laryngeal  verb.  Paradigm  of. .  .p.  198. 

Pe  laryngeal  verbs 74. 

Pe  Nan  verb,  Paradigm  of p.  201. 

Pe  Nan  verbs 78. 

Pe  W&w  verb.  Paradigm  of P-  203. 

Pe  Waw  verbs 80. 

Pe  Y5d  verb.  Paradigm  of P.  202. 

Pe  Y6d  verbs 81. 

Peculiarities,  many,  in  one  stem.  .77. 

6.  N.  2. 

Peculiarities  of  larjmgeals 42. 

Perfect,  accent  of 21.  4. 

Perf .  and  Impf .  stems  compared  64 . 3 .  N .  1 . 

Perfect  and  Impf.  with  Waw 70. 1. 

Perfect,  form  of,  with  Waw 70.  3.  b. 

Perfect,  Hif'il 62.  2.  c. 

Perfect,  Hiflp^'el 62.  2.  b. 

Perfect.  H6f'&l 62.  1.  c. 

Perfect,  l^^l,  analyzed 60. 

Perfect,  :^&1,  strong  and  weak  verbs 

compared 87.  1. 

Perfect,  Nifai 62.  1.  a. 

Perfect,  Pi'el 62.  2.  a. 

Perfect,  Pii'^il 62.  1.  b. 

Perfect  (stative),  viewof 61. 

Perfect  with  suffixes 71. 1. 

Personal  pronoun 50. 

Personal  pronoim,  table  of. P-  192. 

Phonetics '• 

Phrases,  prepositional 119.  2. 

Pi'el  and  Pii'?ll  Perf.  and  Impf.  strong 

and  weak  compared 87.  2. 

Pi*el,  characteristics  of 72.  R.  3. 

Pi'el,  derivation  of  word 58.  2.  N, 

Pi'el,  how  used 58.  3.  c. 

Pi'el  infinitive  absolute 67. 1.  R.  2. 

Pi'el  infinitive  in'V  laryngeals .  76.  2.  N.  2. 
Pi'el  infinitive  with  suffixes. .  71. 3.  a.  R.  1. 

Pi'el  with  suffixes 71.  1.  b.  R.  2. 

Pilpai  stem 86.  5.  c. 

Pilpel  stem 85.  6.  c;  86.  5.  c. 

Place,  how  expressed 103.  2. 

Place  of  an  action,  how  expressed.  .97.  4. 

Place  of  the  accent 20. 

Poetic  accents,  difl.  from  prose..  25. 

Poetic  construct  form 105.  1.  R. 

Pol&l  stem 85.  6.  b. 

Polel  stem 85,  6.  a. 

Postpositive  accents 23.  5,  6. 

PrefixD ••96. 

Prefix  D  of  participles -68.  3. 

Prefix  n ^8. 

Prefixes  «,  and  "t  with  nouns 95. 

Prefixes  in  verb-stems 57.  1.  c. 

Preform,  vowel  in ]"D  verbs. . .  .78.  2.  N.  1. 

Preformative  vowel  (V'J?) 86.  3.  d. 

Preformatives  andaflormatives..65. 

5.  N.  2. 


216 


INDEX 


Preformatives  of  all  stems,  table  of 

65.  5.  N.  1. 

Prepositional  Phrases 119.  2. 

Prepositions 119. 

Prepositions  and  article 45.  4.  R.  3. 

Prepositions  and  Inf.'s  const . .  67.  2.  N.  2. 
Prepositions  and  vowel  changes.  .47. 

5.  N.  1. 
Prepositions  as  conjunct.'s.  .120.  4.  N.  2. 
Prepositions,  how  written. 47.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5. 

Prepositions,  inseparable 47. 

Prepositions  prefixed 47. 

Prepositions  still  subst.  in  force.119.  1.  N. 

Prepositive  accents 23.  4. 

Primary  section,  accents  of 24.  4. 

Primitive  adverbs 118.  1.  a. 

Prohibition,  how  expressed 69.  2.  b. 

Pronominal  fragments  in  ^^El 60.  1. 

Pronominal  sufllx  and  changes 57.  3. 

Pronominal  suffix  and  verb 71. 

Pronominal  suffixes 51;  108. 

Pronominal  suffixes  and  nouns 88.  5. 

Pronominal  suffixes,  table  of p.  102. 

Pronoun  and  verb 61. 

Pronoim,  demonstrative 52. 

Pronoxm,  indefinite 54.  2.  N.  5. 

Pronoun,  interrogative 54. 

Pronoun,  relative 53. 

Pronoims 50-54. 

Pronoims  as  adverbs 118. 1.  b. 

Pronouns  as  conjimctions 120.  2. 

Pronunciation  of  spirants 12. 1.  N. 

Pronunciation  of  letters 2. 

Pronunciation  of  vowels 5. 

Proper  names,  compound 102.  2. 

Proper  names  in  J 99.  2.  d. 

Prosthetic  N 95.  1. 

PQ'&l.  characteristics  of 72.  R.  4. 

Ptl'&l,  derivation  of  word 59.  4.  N. 

Ptl'ai,  how  used 59.  4. 

PG'&l,  strong  and  weak  vbs.  comp'd.  87.  2. 
Pure  vowel  bef.  doubled  letter .  13.  2.  N.  3. 

Pure  vowels 7.  3.  a. 

^admS, 22.  2;  23, 

]g:a,dma  and  other  accents 25.  4. 

]g[8.1  perfect,  view  of 60. 

^8,1  perfect  (stative),  view  of 61. 

]5[8J,  simple  verb-stem 58;  72.  R.  1. 

B:&m6§ 8. 

'^km6^  and  :le:&m6§-^atQf 5.  5.  N.  4. 

]^&m6§-|J&t<if 8- 

B:&rn6  ¥&rk 22.  1.  17. 

]j:5rn6  FSi-fi,  and  other  accents 25.  6. 

:B:Jitn  forms,  second-class 91. 1.  b. 

?:&tt&l  forms 93.  1. 

5:&ttel  forms 93.  3. 

?:&ttil  forms 93.  6. 

if&ttai  forms 93.  7. 

]^«r6 19.  2,  3,  4. 

]^bbfi§ ..8. 

^attal  forms 93.  2. 

:^iH&l  forms 93.  5.  b. 

BlittSl  forms 93.  4. 


B^ittei  forms 93.  5.  c. 

I^Ittai  forms 93.  8. 

Quadriliteral  nouns 101. 

Quality  of  root  expressed 97.  5. 

Quantity  of  vowel  in  syllables 28. 

Quantity  of  vowels 7.2. 

Quiescent  weak  verbs 77.  2. 

Quiescing  of  N 43.  1. 

Quiescing'of  medial «  (n"*?) 83.  3. 

Quinqueliteral  nouns 101. 

Radical  consonants 4.3. 

Radicals 55.  1. 

Rkm 16. 

Rank  of  accents 23.  3. 

R«vi(a)' 22.  1.7;  24.  5.  b. 

Reciprocal  force  of  Hiflpa'el 59. 

Reciprocal  force  of  Nifai 69. 

Reduction 7. 

Reduplication  of  |d 48.  2.  N. 

Reduplication  of  jp  before  suffixes.  .51.  5. 

Reduplication  of  second  radical 93. 

Reduplication  of  third  radical 94. 

Reflexive  force  of  Nifai 59, 

Reflexive,  intensive,  stem 59.  7. 

Rejection  of  a  consonant 40, 

Rejection  of  1  in  V'D  verbs 80.  2.  a. 

Rejection  of  Yod  (n"'^) 83.  1. 

Relation  of  words  shown  by  accent .  23 . 1 .  c. 

Relative  pronoun 53. 

Repetition  expressed  by  Pi'el 59. 

Repetition  expressed  (nouns) 94.  2, 

Retrocession  of  accent,  why 70.  3.  (3). 

Root,  how  pronounced 55.  2. 

Root  not  aword 55.  3.  N.  1. 

Roots  of  V';;  or  1"}!  vbs.,  pronounced 

55.3. 

Roots  of  strong  verb 55. 

Rounding  of  vowels 7. 

§ais616fl 22.  1.  4. 

Second  class  feminine  nouns 115.  2. 

Second  class  nouns 112. 

Second  class  nouns,  declension  of. ,  .112. 

S«g61 8. 

Segolate  form  of  second  class . .  112.  N.  2. 

Segolate  Inf.  construct 78.  1.  a. 

Segolate  Inf.  const,  in  Pe  Waw  vbs. 

80.  2.  a.  (3). 

Segolate  stems  and  changes 109.  4. 

Segolates,  accent  of 20.  4. 

Segolates,  construct  state  of 107.  5. 

Segolates,  changes  in 89.  2. 

Segolates  defined 89. 

Seiolates  of  I  class 110. 1. 

Segolates,  Y'^,  ■"';?,  n"*?  and  y"y  stems 

111.2. 
Segolates,  weak  feminine.  ..115.  1.  R.  3. 

S«golta 22.  1.  3;  24.  3, 

Semitic  and  Hebrew  final  vowels.  .36. 

8.N. 

Separate  Particles 118-121. 

Separating  vowel  in  vy  verbs 86.  2. 

Separating  vowel  in  V"y  verbs 85.  3. 

Separative  D^e§-f6rte 16.  4. 


INDEX 


217 


8. 

Servants  (accents) 22.  2.  cl.  5. 

Servile  consonants 4.3. 

S«wa,  compound,  three  forms  of . . . .  32.  3. 
S*wa,  compound  and  simple  standing 

together 74.  3.  c,  d. 

g«wa,  simple 8. 

§*w§.,  simple  and  compound 9. 

S«w§,,  vocal, underinitial consonant. 27.  2. 

Sharpened  syllable,  quantity  of 28.  3. 

Sharpened  syllables 26. 

Sharpening,  occurrence  of 36.  6. 

Shifting  of  the  tone 21. 

Short  form  of  verb 69.  2.  a. 

Short  forms  of  numerals. . . .  117.  R.  4.  d. 

Short  vowel  becoming  long 31. 

Short  vowel  lowered  in  pause 38.  2. 

Short  vowel  prec.  doubled  letter. .  13. 

2.  N.  3. 

Short  vowels 7.  2.  a. 

Sibilants  or  dentals 4.  1. 

Sign  of  definite  object  and  suffix 51.  2. 

Signification  of  noims  with  D  prefixed. 97. 

Silent  K  (verbs  N"*?) 83.  3.  R.  1. 

Silent  g^wa 11.  2.  R.  N.  2. 

SillQlj: 22.  1.  1;  24.  1,  2,  3,  4. 

SmOlj:  and  M606g  distinguished . .  24. 1.  N. 
Siimif  distinguished  from  M606g. .  .23.  7. 

Simple  §«wa 8:  9.  1. 

Simple  S*wa  for  short  vowel 32.  3. 

Simple  verb-stem 72.  R.  1. 

S6f  P&sCO: 24.  1. 

Space,  prepositions  of 119.  3. 

Special  forms  of  Impf.  and  Imv 69. 

Spirants 12. 

Spirants  and  Dage§-f6rte 14.  2. 

Stative,  ^i:s,l  imperfect 64. 

Stative,  ?:ai  perfect,  view  of 61. 

Stative  Participle,  ^f&l 68.  1.  b. 

Stative,  Perf.  J^U.  inflection  of.  61. 1.  2;  3. 

Stative  verbs 61. 

Stative  verbs  r'V 85.  5.  c.  R. 

Statives  and  infinitive  construct .  67.  2.  R. 

Stem  of  imperatives 66.  1. 

Stem  of  verb,  formation  of 57. 1. 

Stems,  characteristics  of 72. 

Stems  of  verb,  changes  of . ...  71. 1 .  b.  2.  b. 
Stems  of  verb  classified,  view  of,  59.  Notes. 

Stems,  verbal,  characteristics  of 58. 

Stem-changes  In  noun-inflection 109. 

Stem-changes  of  perfect 71.  1.  b. 

Stem-vowel  in  y"y  verbs 85. 

Stem-vowel  in  Wfl  verbs 79.  2. 

Strength  of  consonants 4.  2. 

Strong  and  laryn.  forms  compared 

42.  3.  R.  1. 

Strong  and  weak  verbs  compared 87. 

Strong  consonants 4.  2. 

Strong  noun  stems 110. 

Strong  verb  defined 56.  1. 

Strong  verb,  general  table  of 72. 

Strong  verb.  Paradigm  of p.  194. 

Strong  verb,  the 59-72. 


Subject  of  an  action  expressed 97.  1. 

Substantives  as  conjunctions 120.  3. 

Substantives  as  interjections 121,  2. 

Suffix  and  imperfect 71.  2.  c. 

Suffix  directly  attached 108.  4.  R. 

Suffix,  how  attached  to  verb 71.  1.  c. 

Suffixes  and  adverbs 118.  2. 

Suffixes  and  infinitive  construct. .  .67. 

2.  N.  2. 

Suffixes  and  perfect 71.  1. 

Suffixes  and  strg.  vb.,  Paradigm  of.  p.  196. 

Suffixes  and  verb 71. 

Suffixes,  pronominal 51 ;  108. 

Suffixes,  pronominal,  and  nouns ...  88.  5. 

Suffixes,  table  of p.  192. 

Suffixes  with  imperfect 71.  2. 

SQrgl^ 8. 

Syllabification 27. 

Syllables 26-28. 

Syllables  begin  with  consonants 27.  2. 

Syllables,  closed 26.  2. 

Syllables,  ending 27.  3. 

Syllables,  open 26. 1. 

Syllables,  quantity  of 28. 

Syllables,  sharpened 26. 3. 

Synagogue,  cantillation  and  accent  in 

23.  1.  a. 

Tables  of  vowel-changes 36.  b. 

T«vlr 22.  1.  11. 

T'liga  g'dSla 22.  1.  18. 

T«li§a  g«d61a  and  other  accents .  .25.  4.  5. 

TniSa  ?:«tanna 22.  2.  25. 

T«li§a  ^f 'tS-nna  and  other  accents. .  25. 4,  5. 

Tense  and  noim  relation 117.  R.  7. 

Tenses  in  Hebrew  verb 57.  3.  N.  1. 

Termination  of  verb,  changes  of 71. 

Terminations,  vowel,  and  changes.  .63.  3. 

Third  class  nouns 110.  3. 

Third  class  nouns,  declension 113. 

Third  syl.  bef.  tone  with  M6©6g 18. 1 

Tifta 22.  1.  10;  24.  6. 

Time  of  an  action,  how  expressed . .  97.  4. 

Time,  prepositions  of 119.  3. 

Tone,  definition  of 20.  4.  N.  2. 

Tone  in  P'T  vbs 85.  7. 

Tone,  in  construct  relation. .  107.  6.  R.  3. 
Tone-long,  distinguished  from  nat- 
urally long  vowels 30.  7.  N.  1. 

Tone-long  __,  where  foimd 31.  3. 

Tone-long  _i_,  where  found 31.4. 

Tone-long  vowel  from  rej.  D.-f.  .31.4.  N.  2. 

Tone-long  vowel-sounds 7.  3.  d;  31. 

Tone  restored  in  pause 38.  4. 

Tone  shifted  from  ultima 21.  1. 

Tone  shifted  in  noun-lnfiection  109. 1, 2, 3. 

Tone  shifted  in  pause 21.  2;  38.  3. 

Tone-syllable  and  accent 23.  1.  b. 

Tone  imchanged  in  perf.  w.  Wiw 

71.  3.  b.  N. 

Transposition  of  letters 41.  2. 

Transposition  of  n  in  HiOpJL'el. .  .59.  5.  b. 

Triliterals  and  biliterals. 55.  3. 

u-class  vowels 7.  1.  c,  2. 


218 


INDEX 


u-class  has  one  tone-long  vowel 31 . 

u-class  vowels,  what  they  include 35. 

H,  naturally  long,  where  found 30.  3. 

a,  plural  sign  of  verbs  for  (in . .  122.  5.  N.  2. 

a,  pure  short,  where  found 29.  3. 

Ultimate  vowel  of  Biai 58.  2. 

Unchangeable  vowel  in  y  laryngeal 

verbs 75.  1.  N.  3. 

Unchangeable  vowel-sounds 7. 4.  b. 

Unchangeable  vowels 30.  7.  N.  2. 

Uninflected  words  and  accent 20.  3. 

Union  of  suffix  with  imperfect. . .  71.  2.  c. 

Union  of  suffix  with  perfect 71.  I.e. 

Verb  and  suffljtes.  Paradigm  of p.  196. 

Verb,  Paradigm  of  strong p.  194. 

Verb,  weak 77-104. 

Verb  with  suffixes 74. 

Verbal  adjectives  in  second  class.  112.  N.  5. 
Verbal  form  with  Waw  conversive  ..71.3. 

Verbal  forms  as  interjections 121.  2. 

Verbal  inflections,  exceptions  in.  .36. 

3.  N.  2. 

Verbal  suffix  >j 51.  1.  c. 

Verbal  suffixes,  table  of p.  192. 

Verbs,  classes  of 56. 

Verbs,  Paradigms  of pp.  194-210. 

Verbs  'fi  laryngeal 74. 

Verb-stem,  formation  of 57.  1. 

Verb-stem,  simple 58. 

Verb-stems  classified,  view  of.  .59.  Notes. 

Verb-stems,  general  view  of 59. 

Vocal  S«wa 11.  2.  R.  N.  1. 

VocaJ  §«wfi,  before  spirants 12.  2. 

Vocal  S«wapretonic,  with  M606g. . .  18.  2. 

Vocalization  of )  to  "» 44.  4. 

Vowel-additions  and  JV'V  verbs 82.  2. 

Vowel  and  S«wa  stand'g  together 

42.  3.  R.  4. 

Vowel-changes,  tables  of. 36.  b. 

Vowel-letters 6;  6.  4.  N.  1. 

Vowel-signs 5. 

Vowel-signs,  introduction  of.  .6.  footn.  1. 


Vowel-so\mds,  classification  of 7. 

Vowels 5-11. 

Vowels,  changes  of 36. 

Vowels,  euphony  of 29-38. 

Vowels  in  Hif'il  of  vy  vbs 86. 1.  d. 

Vowels  in  verbs,  variations  of 56. 

Vowels,  names  of 8. 

Vowels,  naturally  long 30. 

Vowels,  pronunciation  of 5. 

Vowels  of  ?:ai 58. 1, 2. 

Vowels,  tone-long 31. 

Waw  conjunctive,  how  written  49. 1 , 2, 3, 4. 

Waw  conversive 49.  4.  N.  2. 

Waw  conversive  and  Hifil.  .70.  5.  b.  (1). 

Waw  conversive  and  tone 21.  3,  4. 

Waw  conversive  with  n"S  verbs. . .  82. 5.  b. 

Waw  conv.  with  V';;  verbs 85. 2.  R.  4. 

Waw  conv.  with  Perf.  and  Impf 71. 

Waw  conversive,  the  name. .  .70.  footn.  1. 
Waw  in  n"S,  V'j?  and  ""^  verbs..  .70.  3.  N. 
Waw  with  Impf.  strengthened.  .70.  2.  a. 

Waw  with  >r)\ 49. 4.  N.  1. 

Waw  with  perfect,  form  of 70. 2.  b. 

Weak  consonants 4.2. 

Weak  feminine  segolates 115.  R.  3. 

Weak  radicals  in  nouns 89. 2. 

Weak  verb  defined 56.  2. 

Weak  verb,  the 77-83. 

of  1  and  ^ 44. 

of  K  and-> 43. 

Wish,  how  expressed 69.  2.  b. 

Words  accented  on  ultima ....  20.  footn. 

Words,  how  written 3. 1. 

Words  receiving  in  inflection  no  endings 

accented  on  ultima 20.  3. 

Y6rah  b6n  y6m6 22.  2.  26. 

Y6rah  b6n  y6m6  and  other  accents . .  25.  6. 

yeiv 22. 1. 9. 

Y'Mv  and  Mahp^x  distinguished 23.  7. 

Zakef  gaddl 22.  1.  6;  24.  5.  a. 

Zakefkaton 22.  1.  5;  24.  4. 

Zarka 22.  1.  12;  24.  6. 


218 


INDEX 


u-class  has  one  tone-long  vowel 31. 

u-class  vowels,  what  they  include 35. 

(i,  naturally  long,  where  found 30.  3. 

a,  plural  sign  of  verbs  for  On . .  122. 5.  N.  2. 

a,  pure  short,  where  found 29.  3. 

Ultimate  vowel  of  J^M 58.  2. 

Unchangeable  vowel  in  y  laryngeal 

verbs 75.  1.  N.  3. 

Unchangeable  vowel-sounds 7. 4.  b. 

Unchangeable  vowels 30.  7.  N.  2. 

Uninflected  words  and  accent 20,  3. 

Union  of  suffix  with  imperfect. .  .71.  2.  c. 

Union  of  suffix  with  perfect 71.  1.  c. 

Verb  and  sufflates.  Paradigm  of p.  196. 

Verb,  Paradigm  of  strong p.  194. 

Verb,  weak 77-104. 

Verb  with  suffixes 74. 

Verbal  adjectives  in  second  class.  112.  N.5. 
Verbal  form  with  Waw  conversive  ..71.3. 

Verbal  forms  as  interjections 121.  2. 

Verbal  inflections,  exceptions  in.  .36. 

3.  N.  2. 

Verbal  suffix  ti 51.  1.  c. 

Verbal  suffixes,  table  of p.  192. 

Verbs,  classes  of 56. 

Verbs,  Paradigms  of pp.  194-210. 

Verbs  'fl  laryngeal 74. 

Verb-stem,  formation  of 57.  1. 

Verb-stem,  simple 58. 

Verb-stems  classified,  view  of.  .59.  Notes. 

Verb-stems,  general  view  of 59. 

Vocal  S«wa 11.  2.  R.N.  1. 

Vocal  §«wa  before  spirants 12.  2. 

Vocal  S«wa  pretonic,  with  Mgegg. . .  18.  2. 

Vocalization  of  i  to  •"» 44.  4. 

Vowel-additions  and  rvh  verbs 82.  2. 

Vowel  and  S«wa  stand'g  together 

42.  3.  R.  4. 

Vowel-changes,  tables  of. 36.  b. 

Vowel-letters 6;  6.  4.  N.  1. 

Vowel-signs 5. 

Vowel-signs,  introduction  of.  .6.  footn.  1. 


Vowel-soimds,  classification  of 7. 

Vowels 5-11. 

Vowels,  changes  of 36. 

Vowels,  euphony  of 29-38. 

Vowels  in  Hif'il  of  Y'y  vbs 86. 1.  d. 

Vowels  in  verbs,  variations  of 56. 

Vowels,  names  of 8. 

Vowels,  natiirally  long 30. 

Vowels,  pronunciation  of 5. 

Vowels  of  ?:ai 58. 1,  2. 

Vowels,  tone-long 31. 

Waw  conjxmctive,  how  written  49. 1 , 2, 3, 4. 

Waw  conversive 49.  4.  N.  2. 

Waw  conversive  and  Hif'il.  .70. 5.  b.  (1). 

Waw  conversive  and  tone 21.  3,  4. 

Waw  conversive  with  n"S  verbs. .  .82. 5.  b. 

Waw  conv.  with  V'j?  verbs 85. 2.  R.  4. 

Waw  conv.  with  Perf.  and  Impf 71. 

Waw  conversive,  the  name. . .  70.  footn.  1. 
Waw  in  n"*?,  vy  and  ^"y  verbs..  .70.  3.  N. 
Waw  with  Impf.  strengthened . .  70.  2.  a. 

Waw  with  -.n-" 49. 4.  N.  1. 

Waw  with  perfect,  form  of 70. 2.  b. 

Weak  consonants 4.2. 

Weak  feminine  segolates 115.  R.  3. 

Weak  radicals  in  noims 89. 2. 

Weak  verb  defined 56.  2. 

Weak  verb,  the 77-83. 

Weakness  of  )  and  ^ 44. 

Weakness  of  n  and  "> 43. 

Wish,  how  expressed 69.  2.  b. 

Words  accented  on  ultima 20.  footn. 

Words,  how  written 3. 1. 

Words  receiving  in  infiection  no  endings 

accented  on  ultima 20.  3. 

Y6rah  b6n  y6m6 22.  2.  26. 

YgrJih  t>6n  y6m5  and  other  accents . .  25.  6. 

Y«div 22. 1. 9. 

Y«eiv  and  MEhpSx  distinguished. . .  .23.  7. 

Zakef  gadol 22.  1.  6;  24.  5.  a. 

Zakefk&ton 22.  1.  5;  24.  4. 

Zarka 22.  1.  12;  24.  6. 


STAMPED  BeS/^«^  °ATE 

--Sl'j]^OP  25  CENTS 


3^ 


t 


/ 


4911(14 


^ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


